B.

Ed 1½ YEAR

GENERAL METHODS OF
TEACHING

UNIT: 1–9 CODE No: 8601

Department of Early Childhood Education and

Elementary Teacher Education
Faculty of Education
ALLAMA IQBAL OPEN UNIVERSITY
i
 (All Rights are Reserved with the Publisher)

Year of Printing ......................... 2016

Quantity .....................................

Price ........................................... Rs.

Layout ........................................ Muhammad Javed

Printer ........................................ Printing Press Operations Committee

Publisher......................................... Allama Iqbal Open University, Islamabad

ii
 COURSE TEAM

Course Team Chairman: Dr. Tanzila Nabeel

Chairperson, Special Education Department,
AIOU, Islamabad.

Course Development Coordinator: Dr. Shaista Majid

Assistant Professor, Special Education
Department, AIOU, Islamabad.

Authors: Dr. Shaista Majid

Dr. Naveed Sultana
Dr. Fazal-ur- Rehman
Dr. Ajmal Chauhdry
Dr. Amat-ul- Hafeez
Mr. Tanveer Afzal
Ms. Naila Naseer

Reviewers: Prof. Dr. Rehana Masrur

Prof. Dr. Javeed Iqbal
Dr. Qudsia Riffat
Dr. Hamid Khan Niazi
Dr. Tanzila Nabeel
Dr. Shaista Majid
Dr. Amat-ul- Hafeez

Members of Course Team: Dr. Tanzeela Nabeel

Chairperson, Special Education Department,
AIOU, Islamabad.

Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed

Dean, School of Social Sciences and
Humanities, University of Management &
Technology, Lahore

Prof. Dr. Shagufta Shahzadi

Department of Special Education,
University of Karachi

iii
 Prof. Dr. Nasir Sulman
Chairman, Department of Special Education,
University of Karachi

Prof. Dr. Naseer ud Din

Department of Special Education, University of
the Punjab, Lahore

Mr. Zahid Majeed

Assistant Professor, Special Education
Department, AIOU, Islamabad.

Mrs. Sadaf Noveen

Lecturer, Special Education Department,
AIOU, Islamabad.

Editor: Humera Ijaz

Course Coordinator: Dr. Shaista Majid

iv
 FOREWORD

The education system is aimed at the development of individuals who are identified by
level of current knowledge and skills in ever changing world. It can only happen if
education system creates a spirit of enquiry i.e. teaching our children to challenge the
status quo or old knowledge with new facts. Teachers well equipped with subject
knowledge and pedagogical skills play a key role in raising the creative individuals. In
functional schools the professional, physical, curricular and technological facilities are
available. Emphasis on professional development of teachers can support and lighten the
future of our nation. Associate Degree in Education is one step forward in the direction of
quality teachers training.

This course has been designed to meet the need of the time, so will certainly provide
student teachers with a broad foundation of knowledge, skills and attitudes necessary to
promote quality education at primary and secondary level. The contents of the course
have been presented in such a way that it would enhance the analytical skills of the
teachers about the latest teaching methodology and techniques. Moreover the
development of understanding of diversity of pedagogy and how this diversity impacts
the teaching and learning process have been emphasized in this course.

In this development process, efforts of Dr. Shaista Majid, Assistant Professor,

Department of Special Education are being acknowledged. Professional input of all
writers and reviewers for preparing this book is highly appreciated.

Vice Chancellor

v
 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

I feel deep gratitude to Almighty ‘Allah’ (the most compassionate and merciful) who
blessed me with the courage and enduring patient to learn and accomplish this important
target.

I feel greatly indebted to all the writers and reviewers whom efforts and professional
input support the completion of the course.

I pay my deep gratitude to Prof. Dr. Shahid Siddiqui, Vice Chancellor, Prof. Dr. Nasir
Mehmood, Chairman, Early Childhood Education and Elementary Teacher Education
Department, and Dr. Tanzila Nabeel, Chairperson Special Education Department for
extending all the help out while working on the development of this course.

I feel great pleasure in acknowledging the efforts of editor, composer of Print Production
Unit at Allama Iqbak Open University in bringing about this course an ultimate success.

Dr. Shaista Majid

Course Coordinator
August, 2016

vi
 CONTENTS

Sr. No. Titles Page No.

1. Introduction of the Course ----------------------------------------------------------------- viii

2. Course Objectives ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ x

3. Unit 1: Introduction to Teaching ---------------------------------------------------------- 01

4. Unit 2: Lesson Planning -------------------------------------------------------------------- 51

5. Unit 3: Student Motivation ----------------------------------------------------------------- 75

6. Unit 4: Inquiry Method --------------------------------------------------------------------- 95

7. Unit 5: Activity Methods ------------------------------------------------------------------117

8. Unit 6: Discussion Method ----------------------------------------------------------------133

9. Unit 7: Cooperative Learning -------------------------------------------------------------175

10. Unit 8: Teaching Skills ---------------------------------------------------------------------197

11. Unit 9: Teaching Tools ---------------------------------------------------------------------223

vii
 INTRODUCTION OF THE COURSE
Teaching is giving information. It is often defined as imparting new information to
pupils. There are a number of concepts in the field of teaching which cannot be
understood by the students unless they are explained through different means and
methods. The ways teachers impart knowledge directly affect the learning process.
Students learn those things easily which are presented properly. A number of teaching
techniques have been identified uptill now which relate particularly to the material and to
the comprehension level of the learners. Knowledge of teaching methods equipped the
teachers with skills that made the teachers professional and successful in their field. This
course describes the concepts of effective teaching methods and professional qualities of
good teachers in an interactive way. The main focus is to enhance the knowledge on
teaching skills.

The course consists of nine units. The unit concepts are divided into sub topics that are
explicit in nature. The students are required to read the concepts thoroughly, do activities
and exercises for self evaluation and direction. They may seek guidance from tutors of
the course in case of queries. At the end of each unit self assessment questions are
provided which covers the evaluation of whole unit concept understanding.

Assignments
Assignments are the compulsory component of the course. Each 3 credit hours course
comprised of two assignments. The students are required to write down the assignments
and submit according to the schedule in the given time period. The tutors check the
assignments and communicate the feed back to the student individually in a course of
time. The assignments are the part of continuous assessment of the course, therefore the
students have to be careful in attempting them.

Workshops
Workshops are the compulsory component. Workshop for each course is held by the
regional offices of AIOU. In the workshop the course concepts are taught by the experts.
You may find this opportunity the best to learn and exchange your ideas with others in
the discussion sessions. Attendance in workshops is compulsory. A student failing to
attend the scheduled workshop for the particular course will be declared as reappear in
workshop on the examination result card.

Tutorial support
Tutorials are necessary to complete the course. These are held at the proposed centers and
the students are got informed about these meeting by the tutors of the course. The

viii
students can avail this is opportunity to discuss the academic issues related to the course
concepts and the program. This support is the back bone of the distance learning system.

Activities
Each unit concept/sub concept comprised of activities. These are designed to apply the
learned concepts. Doing activities involves the student’s understanding and thoughts.
This is an opportunity to satisfy the creativity of the students. These will keep the
students actives throughout the semester and help in completing the course within the
required study time limits.

Suggested readings
The suggested readings mentioned in the unit will enable the student to read and locate
the sources for further study. A look on the suggested books and web sites will enhance
the knowledge on teaching methods.

Assessment
The students will be assessed on the following pattern:

i) Assignments: whole course comprised two assignments for continuous assessment

of the students. 40 percent marks in each assignment are the least criteria to pass
the course.

ii) Final examination: final examination at the end of the semester will be held as
annual assessment of the students. Again 40 percent marks are the least criteria to
go through the course.

The ratio of these two assessment variables is 30:70 respectively in final grading of the
student.

ix
 COURSE OBJECTIVES
The broad aims and objectives of this course are as follows:

 To explain the basic concepts of teaching.

 To demonstrate the essential attributes of the effective teacher.

 To describe the importance and types of teacher planning.

 To practice different teaching methods in classroom.

 To organize classroom discussion and demonstrate its appropriate use.

 To apply various techniques to motivate students.

 To select appropriate audio visual aids in classroom teaching.

 To prepare lesson plans according to Individual Needs.

 To apply teaching skills on identifying learning difficulties in the classroom

 To select, prepare and use appropriate teaching materials

x
Unit No. 1

INTRODUCTION TO TEACHING

Written by: Dr. Shaista Majid

Reviewed by: Prof. Dr. Rehana Masrur

xi
 CONTENTS

Introduction ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 03

Objectives ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 04

1. Definitions of Teaching --------------------------------------------------------- 05

2. The concept of Effective Teaching -------------------------------------------- 09

3. Role of Teacher for Conducive Learning Environment -------------------- 16

4. Characteristics of an Effective Teacher --------------------------------------- 22

5. The Concepts of Teaching Methodologies, Strategies and Techniques -- 31

6. Exercise ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 46

7. Self Assessment Questions ------------------------------------------------------ 46

8. References ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 47

xii
 INTRODUCTION
The students have their own way of understanding and demonstrating the acquired
knowledge. Students comprehend the presented information at their own pace. The
teaching adds the distinctive process of acquiring the knowledge. The teachers teach a
course of study or a practical skill to the pupils. Teachers use different techniques in
order to enhance the students’ learning. Students respond differently to different methods
of teaching. There are many teaching methods for children like questioning, modeling,
demonstrating, collaborating and explaining. Apart from these defined methods,
nowadays many other teaching methods in education are being applied for quality
learning. The methods like role-play, story or games, seminars, presentations, workshops,
conferences, brainstorming, case study, educational trips and modern audio-visual aids
like documentary films, computers, internet, etc have been introduced in education.
These new technologies have increased the pace of learning and understanding. The new
technologies have also enhanced the capabilities of the students to research and logically
think for a given problem.

There are many different ways to teach and help students to learn. A teacher considers
students' background knowledge, environment, and their learning goals when going to
decide what teaching method should be used. Beside this the knowledge of teaching
methodologies is also important for the teachers in planning to involve students in new
concepts of content. Knowledge of teaching methodologies helps teachers in facilitating
learning and retention of the content. Therefore teachers must understand the basic
concepts of teaching as well as the effective teaching.

This unit describes both personal and professional qualities and competencies of a
teacher. The concept of teaching methods, teaching strategies and techniques has been
explained clearly.

xiii
 OBJECTIVES
After the successful completion of this unit the prospective teachers will be able to:

1. Have a clear understanding of the concept of teaching.

2. Define teaching in more effective terms.
3. Debate on aspects of effective teaching.
4. Specify the personal and professional characteristics for making the teaching more
effective.
5. Discuss various ways of effective teaching.
6. Analyse your own teaching against factors of effective teaching.
7. Describe the role of teacher in making the learning environment more conducive.
8. Analyse your own role as a classroom manager.
9. Compare your teaching methods, strategies and techniques with model teachers’
methodologies.

xiv
 1. DEFINITIONS OF TEACHING
A child’s learning depends on the talent and skills of the person leading his or her
classroom, the teacher. Teachers are the persons who work in an applied discipline and
face the reality of nature in the form of growing minds before them, their students.

Teaching is an art and an academic process. In this process students are made motivated
by a number of ways to learn. A teacher begins with the student’s view about different
things, what do they know and think about the topic. The teacher keeps in mind the prior
knowledge of the students. Teaching positively influences the way students think, act
and feel.

Teaching is defined as a process in which students are prepared for learning by

providing initial structure to clarify planned outcomes and indicate derived learning
strategies. The teachers provide sufficient opportunities in the classroom for students to
practice and apply what they are learning and give improvement-oriented feed-back
(Good, T.; Brophy, J. 2000).
The teachers provide assistance to enable the students to engage in learning activities
productively (Meichenbaum, D.; Biemiller, A. 1998).

In the process of teaching the teachers take their students from a level of unknown to a
level of understanding the new concepts. Therefore an effective teacher is one who
contributes to the learning environment by increasing keen interest of the students. For
the purpose of teaching the teacher has to play five major roles. These roles are:

As a Subject matter expert

Teachers possess thorough knowledge of subject matter and go beyond the standard
textbook materials. Teachers develop important and original thoughts on the subject
matter. They tackle issues related to the discipline on the basis of their knowledge.

As a Pedagogical expert
Teachers set appropriate learning goals and objectives and communicates them clearly.
They show a positive attitude towards the subject, work to overcome difficulties that
might hindrance in learning. They evaluate and mark students’ work fairly. They guide
students through critical thinking, and problem solving processes and help them to
develop their own understanding. Teachers provide feedback to students about their
progress in learning.

As an Excellent communicator
A Teacher demonstrates effective oral and written communication, good organizational
abilities and planning skills. He/she helps students learn to use effective communication
skills; utilizes teaching tools appropriately and effectively.

xv
As a Student-centred mentor
A Teacher tries to encourage each student to learn through a variety of methods and
encourages student participation. Take his/her students to higher intellectual levels.

As a Systematic and continual assesser

A Teacher makes an appropriate procedure for student outcome assessments in order to
improve student learning experiences. He/she systematically assess his/her own
teaching, keeps the class material fresh and new. He/she uses new teaching style to
achieve the objectives of successful student learning by identifying his/her own
weaknesses and shortcomings in the teaching process.

Learning is very easy and natural process for the small children but it becomes hard and
difficult for the children as they grow older. Learning can be made easy and natural at
schools only if education and teaching is based on experiences in life of the children.

Alton-Lee (2003) has listed ten characteristics of quality teaching. Alton-Lee's ten point
model covers the following areas:

1. A focus on student achievement.

2. Pedagogical practices that create caring, inclusive and cohesive learning
communities.
3. Effective links between school and the cultural context of the school.
4. Quality teaching is responsive to student learning processes.
5. Learning opportunities are effective and sufficient.
6. Multiple tasks and contexts support learning cycles.
7. Curriculum goals are effectively aligned.
8. Pedagogy scaffolds feedback on students' task engagement.
9. Pedagogy promotes learning orientations, student self regulation, meta cognitive
strategies and thoughtful student discourse.
10. Teachers and students engage constructively in goal oriented assessment (Alton-
Lee, 2003: vi-x)

Long ago a Russian psychologist, L. S. Vygotsky’s (1956) ideas affected the world’s
understanding of teaching, learning, and cognitive development. Many researchers of
different nations have now elaborated, corrected, and developed the concept of teaching
differently. Much of this work was focused on the "natural teaching" of home and
community. It is now accepted that before the children enter school, they could be
"taught" cognitive and linguistic skills. teaching of these skills is done in everyday
interactions of domestic life by setting goaldirected activities of daily life. The new
concept of teaching consists of more capable family and friends assisting children to do
things which the children cannot do alone.

According to Vygotsky’s theory, the developmental level of a child is identified by the

ability of the child to do work alone. On the other hand the child’s ability to do work with
the assistance of anyone was called by Vygotsky the "zone of proximal development”.

xvi
Teaching may be defined in the proximal zone.
In Vygotskian terms, teaching is good only when it "awakens and rouses to life those
functions which are in a stage of maturing, which lie in the zone of proximal
development" (Vygotsky, 1956, p. 278; quoted in Wertsch & Stone, 1985).

Therefore a general definition of teaching was derived from this as: Teaching consists of
assisting performance through a child’s zone of proximal development (ZPD). But
teaching must be redefined as assisted performance; teaching occurs when performance is
achieved with assisting the students (teaching):

Students’ performance can be assisted by a number of ways. Behavioral and cognitive

science have given following seven means of assistance:

1. Modeling: teacher offers behavior for imitation. Modeling assists learning and
gives the learner information and a remembered image that can serve as a
performance standard.
2. Feeding back: teacher provides information on the performance of the students.
This enables the learners to compare their performance to the standard, and also
allows self-correction.
3. Contingency managing: teacher applys the principles of reinforcement and
punishment. In this rewards and punishment are arranged to opt desirable
behaviour and to avoid the negative behavior.
4. Directing: teacher requests for specific actions. Directing assists by specifying the
correct response. It provides clarification information, and promotes decision-
making.
5. Questioning: teacher produces a mental operation that the learner cannot or would
not produce alone. This interaction assists by giving the teacher information about
the learner’s developing understanding.
6. Explaining: the teacher provides explanation of the concepts in the content. This
assists learners in organizing and justifying new learning and perceptions.
7. Task structuring: The teacher organizes a task into different components in a
sequense. The students work on the task. the task structuring involve the chunking,
segregating, and sequencing.

Properly organized classroom activities in teaching also provide assistance to students’

learning. Many teaching methodologies like lectures, demonstrations, cooperative
learning exercises/activities, and textbook reading can all assist learning. Other
necessary elements contributing to classroom learning are recitation and assessment.

In past teachers emphasized rote learning and immediate responses. there were no
opportunities for give-and-take between a teacher and learning students. The student role
was passive. Very few teachers make efforts to adapt instruction to individual differences.
The other modern way/mean for effective teaching is "scripts" (scripted teaching). It
involves the traditional student-teacher interaction set up. It uses predesigned teacher talk
and predicts student responses. It offers more than the recitation script for learning. The

xvii
scripted teaching emphasizes: i) rote learning, ii) student passivity, iii) facts and low-level
questions, and iv) low-level cognitive functions (Tharp & Gallimore, 1991).

Activity:
Collect information from teachers working at different levels about the
concept of teaching and redefine the concept of teaching on the basis of
their opinions.

Let us do an exercise to check the knowledge.

Exercise

Q 1 Define teaching and elaborate this concept in the light of

theoretical perspectives.

Q2 Debate on old and new aspects of teaching.

xviii
 2. THE CONCEPT OF EFFECTIVE TEACHING
It is universally recognized that the teacher is the key person in an education system and
whole system of education revolves around him/her.

Educational practice and researches are continuously working in the area of

“improvement of learning”. The concept of effective teaching has emerged out as one of
the component that contributes a large in improving learning.

Interaction in classroom is often dominated by the teacher. According to Ilukena, A.

(1998) teachers are the persons who can bring a difference in educational practices.
Quality of their teaching is an important factor in promoting effective learning in schools.
Effective teaching involves talking to the learners about their learning and listening to
them. St. Augustine quoted in Fisher, (1992) says I learned not from those who taught me
but from those who talked with me.

Being important persons of the teaching and learning process, the effective teachers must
be highly competent in planning and organizing instruction as well as in managing in
classroom environment, if they want their students to be academically successful
(Dilworth, 1991).

Cruickshank, Jenkins & Metcalf (2003) define effective teaching:

Most people would agree that good teachers are caring, supportive, concerned about the
welfare of students, knowledgeable about their subject matter, able to get along with
parents…and genuinely excited about the work that they do….Effective teachers are able
to help students learn (p. 329).

2.1 The Definition

The concept of “Effective Teaching” is considered as a range of factors that collectively
work together and result in effective learning. Most of the people agree that the basic
purpose of teaching is to enable learning. An elaboration to this concept is required to
fulfill the needs of today’s youth in a knowledge-driven society where information
rapidly increases at great scale. Therefore the concept of teaching should move beyond
the lower order skills of acquisition and reproduction of knowledge and facts.

The students require equipping them with more recent and advanced body of knowledge,
and enabling them to apply, upgrade and create knowledge.

There are various aspects of effective teaching, such as;

1. Effectively managing a classroom,
2. Starting each class with a clear objective,
3. Engaging students with questioning strategies,

xix
4. Consolidating the lesson at the end of a period, and
5. Diagnosing common student errors and correcting them that can be systematically
measured by observing classrooms and by asking students.
These aspects would be useful for both developing teachers and staffing schools more
effectively.

Bulger, S. M. and Mohr D. J. (2002) describe that teaching effectiveness is dependent

upon the interaction between the instructor's subject-matter knowledge and teaching
(pedagogical) ability. There are two forms such interaction:

1. An individual may possess a substantial amount of subject-matter knowledge, yet

be unable to design and implement instructional methods to enhance student
learning due to a lack of pedagogical ability. On the other hand,
2. An individual may possess some generic pedagogical skills, yet have limited
subject-matter knowledge and again be prone to ineffective teaching.

The above forms indicate that it is impossible to be an effective teacher without being
competent in both subject-matter knowledge and pedagogical ability.

2.2 Effective Teaching Measures

Effective teaching involves effectively managing a classroom, starting each class with a
clear objective, engaging students with questioning strategies, strengthening the lesson at
the end of a period, and diagnosing common student errors and correcting them. MET
project (2010) enlisted the following seven measures:
1 multiple measures of effectiveness
2 accurate teacher evaluation
3 more meaningful tenure
4 differentiated pay based on effectiveness
5 strategic placement of teachers
6 more effective teachers
7 better student outcomes

The aims and desired learning outcomes of effective teaching bring positive changes in
the following areas:
i) Knowledge
  Discipline/profession-specific knowledge.
  General knowledge: fundamental concepts that an educated person/university
graduate should have, regardless of area of specialisation.
  Awareness/familiarity across knowledge domains (i.e. ‘rounded’ education).

ii) Abilities
  Ability to identify what information is needed and where to find it.
  Evaluation of information and discrimination of what is valid and useful from
what is not.
  Application/adaptation of knowledge to problem solving and making of

xx
 informed judgements.
  Self-directedness in learning and the ability to sustain lifelong learning.
  Capacity for independent research and knowledge.
  Ability to communicate ideas clearly and structure arguments convincingly.

iii) Mindset
  Questioning habit of mind with readiness to seek evidence/support for
ideas/concepts presented, and to investigate/challenge established and controversial
views including those which are generally taken as ‘knowledge’.
  Awareness of the complexity and dynamic nature of human knowledge and the
need for evaluation and re-evaluation of knowledge.
  Enjoyment of learning.
  Learning as a lifelong habit.
Let us read the principles of effective teaching.

2.3 Principles of Effective Teaching

Richard T. Walls (1999) makes links between "process" of teaching and the "student
learning" (the product) in "Four Aces of Effective Teaching". The Four Aces of Effective
Teaching are summarized in the following figure:

Ace 1 Outcomes
1 let students know where they are going and why
2 drive hard toward clear goals
Ace 2 Clarity
1 make the contact as clear and simple as possible
2 build on what students already know
Ace 3 Engagement
1 Don’t lecture for more than 30 minutes before running an activity that involves
all students
2 People learn what they DO, so have students DO everything that you want
them to learn
Ace 4 Enthusiasm
1 If you hate to teach it, your students will hate to learn it
2 The only key to motivation is success

The Four Aces of Effective Teaching

According to Walls (1999) student learning is better, faster, and/or more long-lasting
when teachers play the following four principles:

1: Outcomes
The outcomes enable students to focus their attention on clear learning goals.
These outcomes inform students of where they are going and how they will get
there. Outcomes also provide the teacher a framework for designing and
delivering the course content. Outcomes enable teachers to assess student

xxi
 learning as a measure of their own instructional effectiveness.

2: Clarity
The effective teachers provide explanations and give details of the course
concepts and content. If students DO NOT LEARN, it means the methods of
delivery may lack the required degree of clarity.

So the teacher should make the message clear from alternate perspectives to
alternate senses, the effective instructional practice of the teacher should afford
students the opportunity to make connections between the new material and the
concepts that they have already been learned.

3: Engagement
This principle suggests that students learn by doing. Teachers must create an
educational environment that offers students the opportunity to practice every
concept that they are learning. The effective teachers use those instructional
strategies that engage students throughout the lesson.

4: Enthusiasm
The principle of high level of enthusiasm reflects teacher's professional
competence and confidence, teacher’s subject matter knowledge and instructional
experience. Teachers establish a positive learning environment and show their
enthusiasm for the subject matter. They use student’s names, reinforce student
participation during class, and keep moving among the students.

With the knowledge of the stated principles, the perspectives teachers must have to apply
different approaches to make their teaching more effective. below are the approaches to
effective teaching:

2.4 Approaches to teaching effectiveness

Tharp, and Gallimore, (1991) viewed teaching effectiveness from three perspectives; the
‘style’ view (how teachers teach), The ‘outcomes’ approach (student result), and The
‘inquiry’ approach (style and outcomes within a framework).

i) The ‘style’ view

“Teaching effectiveness is determined by what the teacher does.” The following
statements illustrate this view of teaching effectiveness:
1. Effective teachers display warmth.
2. Effective teachers are enthusiastic.
3. Effective teachers provide an overview at the start of teaching something
new.
4. Effective teachers minimize the amount of time they are teaching the whole
class from the front (direct instruction).
5. Effective teachers facilitate the joint construction of knowledge through

xxii
 teacher-student and student-student conversations.
6. Effective teachers use teaching techniques and approaches that research has
shown to be effective.
ii) The ‘outcomes’ approach
“Teaching effectiveness is determined by student results.” The following
statements illustrate this view of teaching effectiveness:
1. Teaching effectiveness is determined by what students achieve.
2. The comparative effectiveness of teachers is best determined by comparing
the achievements of the students they teach.
3. The comparative effectiveness of teachers is best determined by comparing
the added value they contribute to the achievements of the students they
teach.

iii) The ‘inquiry’ approach

“Teaching effectiveness is determined by the quality of inquiry into the
relationship between teacher actions and student learning.”

This alternative view conceptualizes teaching effectiveness in a way that addresses the
problems raised in the discussion of style and outcomes. Put simply, this approach argues
that:
Effective teachers inquire into the relationship between what they do (style) and what
happens for students (outcomes). But effective teachers do more than simply inquire (or
reflect) – they take action (in relation to what they are doing in the classroom) to improve
the outcomes for students and continue to inquire into the value of these interventions.
The inquiry model depicts two phases of inquiry:

Inquiry 1 This inquiry focuses on the impact of teaching actions on student

outcomes. This inquiry involves the collection and analysis of
information about a key question: “What is happening for students in my
classroom?” and sub-questions that explore the relationship between
teaching actions and student learning.
Inquiry 2 This inquiry focuses on identifying possibilities for improvement through
the experiences of other teachers and from research.
The cycle of inquiry established by the processes of Inquiry 1 and Inquiry 2 enhances the
opportunity to learn for the teacher (in the sense that they are learning about the impact of
their own practice) and for the students (in the sense that changed teacher practices are
aimed at increasing student engagement and success).

Thus effective teaching is more than style and it is more than outcomes – it is the
continuous examination of the relationship between these two dimensions in order to
enhance student achievement.

Let us read how certain factors influence the effectiveness of teaching:

2.5 Factors of Effective Teaching

xxiii
Gurney, (2007) suggests five key factors that could contribute to an effective learning and
teaching environment.

KEY FACTOR 1: Teacher Knowledge, Enthusiasm and Responsibility for Learning

Good classroom is one in which knowledge is shared among teacher and students.
Teacher not only gives instructions but takes ideas of students during the teaching-
learning process and carry out discussions. In such an environment the knowledge is
shared; students and teachers all become learners and discover the world of the subject.
In such an environment, a teacher takes responsibility for the sharing and enjoyment of
the knowledge.

KEY FACTOR 2: Classroom Activities That Encourage Learning

In a classroom of opportunity and experience, the learners explore and do experiment. In
such a climate the process of learning become a measure of success and the students feel
that they are the masters of their own learning.

Attitudes of the teacher in such a classroom can influence the outcome. A teacher needs
to be prepared to test what is going on in the class.

The class activities used to engage the students must be reviewed, revisited and refocused
in order to draw students into an effective interaction with the subject.

KEY FACTOR 3: Assessment Activities That Encourage Learning Through Experience

The assessment contributes towards the creation of an effective learning process.
If the students know the value of assessment in the ongoing learning process, not at the
end, then they can work well and take part in the process and use it to gain better results.
The effective learning environment involves the processes of peer tutoring, co-operative
learning, questioning, clarifying and summarising. All of these processes are used to
empower the learners. For example if teacher asks the question: ‘What do you do in the
classroom?’ If assessment activities are part of the ‘doing’ then they become a central
part of the learning process.

KEY FACTOR 4: Effective Feedback That Establishes the Learning Processes In the
Classroom
Appropriate learning related feedback is one of the important factors in effective
teaching.
Different methods of feedback enable the teacher to engage the students with learning.
All explanations, questioning methods, instructions are part of feedback and student input
(Hattie, 1999, p.9). In an effective classroom the students actively seek the feedback of
their performance. Alton Lee (2003) highlights the value of feedback but warns that too
much can be harmful as too little. The feedback that a teacher gets from the students is
also essential to the creation of a learning environment. The more feedback that a teacher
can obtain from students, and the more the teacher can act on that feedback, the better the
learning environment will be that is created.

xxiv
KEY FACTOR 5: Effective Interaction between the Teacher and the Students,
Creating an Environment That Respects, Encourages and Stimulates Learning
through Experience
Learning is an emotional exercise. Students like those things or actions that appeals to
them emotionally. The teacher who brings a sense of personal involvement to the
classroom, and who wants to share the knowledge with the class, who shows that he/she
is also a part of the learning cycle, is setting up a relationship with the learners. The
working environment generated by the interaction can remove the stigma of ‘working’
and turn the learning process into rewarding.

Activity:
Draw out some ideas of effective teaching and discuss them with the class mates and
tutors.

Let us do an exercise to evaluate your learning of effective teaching:

Exercise:

Q. 1 Define and explain the concept of effective teaching.

Q. 2 How can you make your teaching more effective?
Q. 3 Highlight the principles of effective teaching.

xxv
 3. ROLE OF TEACHER FOR CONDUCIVE
LEARNING ENVIRONMENT
Teaching is a multifaceted profession. The teachers have to perform many roles other
than the process of teaching and imparting information to the students. They take up vital
places in the lives of the students in their classrooms. Mainly they set the tone of their
classrooms, build a warm environment, and take care of students by looking for any sign
of trouble. They become role models for the students.

The role of a teacher in the classroom as a leader is to lead students, and families. The
classroom teacher is responsible for creating a positive and disciplined learning
environment:
– in the classroom
– in co-curricular activities
– in interacting informally with students

In this way, each student is challenged to grow in knowledge and maturity, according to
his potential, in all aspects of his life.

3.1 Areas of Responsibility

The classroom teacher is responsible for:
- Promoting the mission and philosophy of the School/College through structured
classroom prayer, participation in the educational life of the College, and modelling
of appropriate standards of behaviour.
- Maintaining a positive and effective learning environment through well prepared
lessons, which cater a wide range of student abilities and interests.
- Setting of realistic and challenging academic standards of student performance.
- A challenging and realistic program of student homework.
- A comprehensive attention to students work submitted for marking and
supervision.
- Demonstrating knowledge, competence and confidence in the relevant subject
discipline.
- Demonstrating high levels of professionalism in all activities.

Let us have a detailed look on teacher’s roles as teachers serve many other roles in the
classroom:
1. Teaching Knowledge
The most common role of the teacher in the classroom is to teach knowledge to
children. Teachers are given a curriculum they must follow that meets state
guidelines. This curriculum is followed by the teacher so that complete knowledge
is conveyed to the students in the given time (academic year). Teachers teach in

xxvi
 many ways, such as lectures, small group activities and hands-on learning
activities.

2. Creating Classroom Environment

Teachers play an important role in making the classroom environment either
positive or negative. Students often imitate a teacher's actions. If the teacher
prepares a warm, happy environment, then students will also be happy. The
teachers are responsible for the social behavior in their classrooms. This behavior
is primarily a reflection of the teacher's actions and the environment she/he sets.

3. Role Modeling
Students spend a great deal of time with their teacher and their teacher becomes a
role model to them. This can be a positive or negative effect depending on the
teacher. Teachers not only teach the children, but also love and take care for them.
Therefore teachers are respected by the community and become a role model to
students and parents.

4. Mentoring
Mentoring is a natural role played by the teachers. Mentoring is a way by which a
teacher encourages students to do the best they can. This also includes encouraging
students to enjoy learning. Listening to students carefully is the part of mentoring.
By taking time to listen to what students say, teachers impart to students a sense of
ownership in the classroom. This helps build their confidence and helps them want
to be successful.

5. Signs of Trouble
As a protector, teacher looks for signs of trouble in the students. When students'
behaviors change and any sign of physical abuse are noticed, teachers are required
to look into the problem and solve it as per rules.

3.2 Conducive Classroom Environment

The best classroom environment is one that results in efficient learning (Callahan 1996).
The classroom atmosphere becomes conducive (favorable) to learning when teacher
before planning teaching analyzes the behavior of each student of the class. In such
environment students become self directive when encouraged through proper guidance
and teaching techniques of the teacher.

According to Arif (2003) in order to create conducive classroom environment, the

teachers must establish and maintain it through following teaching principles and
managing practices. They must utilize time in a productive manner in order to reduce the
disruptive behaviour. The students should remain involved in learning oriented actions
and activities. Following are the means to make the class room more effective:
(i) Keep students motivated by keeping the students motivated in learning. The
teachers set the stage for creating positive class environment. Motivating students

xxvii
 is the first step toward preventing discipline problems in classrooms because a
student involved in learning has no time to be involved in clash with others.
(ii) Meet basic needs. Teachers must try to meet students’ basic as well as age related
needs. Make students feel physically comfortable, safe, welcome, socially accepted
and valued. Otherwise, they more likely to face learning difficulties and involved
in disruptive actions.
(iii) Exercise moderate degree of control. The degree of class control must be moderate.
Student learning is great in classroom where teachers exercise neither too much nor
too less control. Too much control may be effective on memory tasks but it is
harmful for learning involving critical and creative thinking.
(iv) Empower the students. Make them responsible for their own learning through
group and individual learning activities so that they ultimately become independent
learners. This is one of the purposes of good classroom management.
(v) Keep instruction at the student level. Keep instruction at the students’ development
level so that they neither experience discouragement nor boredom. Otherwise, they
might behave disruptively.
(vi) Develop healthy and professionally sound relationship with all the students by
being friendly with them. Learn their names and some positive information about
each to greet them.
(vii) Communicate interest in all the students and show concern for each of them. The
interest and concern is communicated through brief eye contact with all and
through supporting gestures and facial expressions while teaching.
(viii) While instructing, ensure physical closeness with all the students by roaming
around the class.
(ix) Avoid labeling the students with negative adjectives, which are likely to lower their
self-esteem. Labeling influences teachers’ quality of interaction with the students,
which further influences students’ expectations and actions negatively.
(x) Describe the behaviour of the misbehaving student, not characterize the student.
Instead of saying, “you are rude” say “your comment was rude”. By criticizing the
personality of the students, he is less likely to change his behaviour.
(xi) Increase the “engaged time” by keeping the students involved in the learning tasks
through, wittiness, overlapping, smooth transitions and group focus.
(xii) Teach role and routines to the younger students in academic fashion with a lot of
explanation, examples and practices during initial classes.
(xiii) Develop a set of few general classroom rules applicable to variety of situations.
These rules should be displayed in the class.
(xiv) Be assertive, rather than passive or aggressive, in enforcing discipline. Apply the
rule forcefully fairly, consistently and calmly.

xxviii
(xv) Create business like climate in the classroom, where students understand that they
and the teacher have a commonly shared goal of accomplishing such activities that
promote learning, (Arif, 2003).
In order to handle misbehaving student, the following suggestions may prove helpful:
(i) Deal with the present, current problem immediately, not with the past instances of
the student misbehaviour.
(ii) Talk to the student directly, instead of talking about him with others.
(iii) Don’t be harsh and provoked. Stay calm and address firmly. Anger, empty threats
and physical handling must be avoided.
(iv) If the student is hostile, the teacher can diffuse his hostility by responding with
softly, calm, and soothing tone. The feeling of the students must be acknowledged
in order to calm him down.
The teachers’ role has been redefined as follows:

3.3 Redefining the Role of the Teacher

Teaching has become different from the old concept of "show-and-tell" practices. So as
the role of teachers in a child's education has also been fundamentally changed.

From the modern perspectives of the technical world, instruction not only consists of
primarily lecturing to students, but offers every child a rich, rewarding, and unique
learning experience. Students are no more required to sit in rows at desks and dutifully
listen and record whatever they hear. Now they are more active and need to participate in
the teaching and learning process by sharing knowledge with their peers and teachers.

The educational environment has now been extended from the classroom to the home and
the community and even around the whole world. Information is also not only bound to
the specific text books but it is available everywhere.

Schools are the centers of lifelong learning. In this changing era the teaching has been
taken as one of the most challenging and respected career because whole of our nation’s
social, cultural, and economic health depends on it.

Hence every part of the teaching process and the role of the teachers should be
reconsidered such as teacher students’ relationship, teaching tools and techniques, rights
and responsibilities of teachers, the form and content of curriculum, standards of
assessment, preparation and professional development of teachers and structure of the
schools as a working environment. So that teachers themselves and their occupation
better serve schools and students.

3.4 New Relationships and Practices

Traditionally teaching was considered as knowledge-dispensing, custodial child care and
identifying/helping the academically less able students. Schools –the education factories
pay to teachers and keep children still for taking lessons and tests. Teachers educate the
students in the same way, simply stood in front of the class and delivered the same
lessons year after year.

xxix
However, today, the teachers are encouraged to adopt new practices for teaching and
learning in the areas of art and science. Now the redefined nature of education involves
the close relationship between a caring adult and a secure, motivated child. So the
redefined role of the teachers is to get to know each student as an individual in order to
comprehend his or her unique needs, learning style, social and cultural background,
interests, and abilities.

Teachers have to;

- Help the students integrate their social, emotional, and intellectual growth.
- Enable the students to seek, understand, and use knowledge; to make better
decisions in their personal lives; and to value contributing to society.
- See themselves as masters of subject matter such as history, math, or science.

This new relationship between teachers and students will take the form of a different
concept of instruction.

It has been discovered that new teaching methodologies such as project-based,

participatory techniques, educational adventures, etc. can make the students participants
in the instructional process. Furthermore;
- the curriculum must relate to the students’ daily lives,
- the provided learning activities in the classroom must engage the students’ abilities
at their best, and
- the assessment must measure real achievements and be an integral part of learning.

The day-to-day job of a teacher has become;

- designing and guiding students through engaging learning opportunities,,
- to search out and construct meaningful educational experiences that allow students
to solve real-world problems,
- to learn big ideas, powerful skills, and habits of mind and heart that meet agreed-on
educational standards,

As a result the students used to memorize from routine lectures and textbooks, become
alive as they participate in the creation and extension of new knowledge.

3.5 New Tools and Environments

New technology is the most powerful force that is changing the role of teachers and
students in education. The teachers are no more the primary information providers. The
fundamental job of teaching has been shifted from distributing facts to helping children
learn how to use the knowledge of facts by developing their abilities to think critically,
solve problems, make informed judgments, and create knowledge that benefits both the
students and society. Teachers have more time to spend working one-on-one or with
small groups of students. The change in delivery of instruction demands a change in
structure of school as well. This may involve extended periods of instruction and school
to make learning free of time limits and mixed-aged classes in which students spend two
or more years with the same teachers.

xxx
The concept of team teaching is becoming popular in which two or more educators share
responsibility for a group of students. This means that an individual teacher will no longer be
responsible for all things to all students because there will be someone with a different set of
abilities to teach them. So our schools should have a number of teachers who have
appropriate levels of responsibility based on their abilities and experience levels.

3.6 New Professional Responsibilities

Aside from rethinking their primary responsibility as directors of student learning,
teachers are also taking on other roles in schools and in their profession. They are
working with colleagues, family members, politicians, academics, community members,
employers, and others to set clear and obtainable standards for the knowledge, skills, and
values we should expect America's children to acquire. They are participating in day-to-
day decision making in schools, working side-by-side to set priorities, and dealing with
organizational problems that affect their students' learning.
Many teachers also spend time researching various questions of educational effectiveness
that expand the understanding of the dynamics of learning. And more teachers are
spending time mentoring new members of their profession, making sure that education
school graduates are truly ready for the complex challenges of today's classrooms.
Let us do an activity to apply the learned concept.
Activity:
Play the role of a teacher of class III for a day. Try to make the
classroom environment conducive for learning by managing all
misdisciplines or misbehavior in the class. Prepare a report of your
role at the end of the day.

You can also check your concept by attempting the questions of the following exercise.

Exercise:
Q. 1 Enlist the role of a primary teacher.
Q. 2 Why do we need to redefine the role of the teacher? Does school need a change in
its structure to cope with the changing role of the teacher?

xxxi
 4. Characteristics of an Effective Teacher
Knowledge and skills are taught and learned at school. School is a little community in
itself where teachers and students interact with each other. During this interaction
teachers influence their learner’s behavior and learners influence their teacher’s behavior.
The nature of this interaction is an important factor in determining the learner's
perceptions of school and his/her attitudes toward school-related persons and activities.
This factor involves the relationship between the personality of the teacher and that of the
learner.

A teacher’s personality traits are important as Callahan, (1966) says that the teacher
whose personality helps create and maintain a classroom or learning environment in
which students feel comfortable and in which they are motivated to learn is said to have a
desirable teaching personality.

Research says that teachers are cognitively oriented toward pupils while pupils are
affectively oriented toward teachers. Teacher’s personality is, therefore, directly and
indirectly related to learning and teaching in the affective domain as well as to that in
cognitive and psychomotor domains, (LEW, 1977).

Teachers have rights and responsibilities to develop a climate in the classroom which
supports effective learning. Aristotle quoted in Stephen Covey, "The Seven Habits of
Highly Effective People", says we are what we repeatedly do.

Climate in their classroom is based on the teachers’ personality and style of teaching, the
tone of their voice, and the little things they continually say and do on a daily basis. In the
classroom, the learners’ behavior could be determined from the way their teachers behave
with them.

Best, (1991, p. 275) says the teaching is “primarily concerned with developing qualities
such as curiosity, originality, initiative, cooperation, perseverance, open-mindedness,
self-criticism, responsibility, self confidence and independence”.

Marchbanks, (2000) in a study, examined the personalities of sixty students at the

University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill through a 110-question questionnaire. The
traits of passion, patience, cooperation, authoritativeness, and creativity were studied in
particular because these are the essential personality traits of an effective elementary
school teacher. He says teachers in the twenty- first century are responsible for the
overall well-being of their students, as well as educating, disciplining, and stimulating
their developing minds. Because teachers have these additional duties, many more
requirements are needed to be an effective teacher. Let us read the personality traits,
necessary to be able to accomplish all of the above stated tasks and duties.

xxxii
4.1 Personal qualities
Elementary school teachers need the following characteristics:
 strong interpersonal and communication skills
 a genuine interest in children and respect for their individuality
 the ability to sense children's individual needs
 the ability to be creative, imaginative, patient, energetic, organized and resourceful
 the ability to establish rapport children and parents
 strong leadership and teamwork skills and a good sense of humour
 a high level of dedication to work which often impacts personal lifestyle choices
 a clear, pleasant speaking voice and the ability to convey confidence
 positive conflict resolution skills and the ability to handle stress well.

They can enjoy finding different ways to solve problems and present information, and
organizing and coordinating the work of others.

One must be passionate, patient, cooperative, authoritative, and creative in order to be

an effective teacher beside the basic and extended knowledge of the subject he/she is
teaching. A true passion for both the profession and the children is indispensable; a
teacher must look forward to his/her job every single day, having the desire to instill
in the students all the knowledge and skills needed to lead a happy, healthy life in
today’s world. Patience is needed to maintain that passion and desire for teaching. In
order to interact with the children and other teachers most effectively, an overall
cooperative personality is needed. A degree of authoritativeness is necessary to
preserve order and discipline in the classroom. Finally, teachers have to be creative in
their approaches to instruction to earn the most successful results in educating their
students (Marchbanks, 2000).

Thompson, Greer, and Greer (n.d) says that “every teacher should possess twelve
characteristics such as displaying fairness, having a positive outlook, being prepared,
using a personal touch, possessing a sense of humor, possessing creativity, admitting
mistakes, being forgiving, respecting students, maintaining high expectations, showing
compassion, and developing a sense of belonging for students”. Let us read these
characteristics as given bellow:

1) Fairness
Fairness is one of the characteristics of the students’ favorite teachers. All humans
possess an inbuilt sense of fair play. Whenever a person violates, the other person
in this situation is prone to react negatively.

Any impression of favoritism, or lack of fairness, leaves scars on the life of persons
that lasts forever. The students report in great detail, the unfair actions of their
teachers when they had negative experience of competition between classmates,
even after many years have passed.

xxxiii
xxxiv
2) Positive Attitude
Another characteristic that students’ like most is the positive attitude and approach
of their teachers they use into the classroom. Scholars suggest that effective
teachers are those who use meaningful verbal praise to get and keep students
actively participating in the learning process. The effective teachers are generally
positive minded individuals who believe in the success of their students as well as
their own ability to help students achievements.

If the teachers have positive attitude they “catch students doing things right” rather
than “catching them doing something wrong.” The students often recall praise and
recognition that was given by their teachers at schools, and they point to the
confidence and direction that often resulted in their lives.

3) Preparedness
Competence and knowledge of the content area being taught is something that our
college students have always mentioned about their favorite teachers. In a research
the students pointed out that in classrooms where teachers were well prepared,
behavior problems were less prevalent. The well-prepared teacher is more likely to
be able to take time during lessons to notice and attend to behavioral matters, and is
less likely to miss the beginnings of potentially disruptive activity. If, on the other
hand, teachers have not spent sufficient time in planning and preparation, they tend
to be so focused on what they are doing that they miss the early signs of
misbehavior. This ultimately results in frequent disruption, waste of valuable
instructional time, and student’s frustration.

4) Personal Touch
Teachers who are connected personally with their students; call them by name,
smile often, ask about students’ feelings and opinions, and accept students for who
they are. As well as the teachers who tell stories of their own lives events which
relate to subject matter currently being taught, motivate student’s interest and
endorse bonding with the students. Teachers who show interest in their students
have interested students.

5) Sense of Humor
If a teacher has the ability to break the ice in difficult situations with the use of
humor, this is an extremely valuable asset for teaching. According to McDermott &
Rothenberg (2000) students enjoy teachers with a sense of humor and remember
those teachers who made learning a fun. Good teachers enjoy a laugh with the class
occasionally.

6) Creativity
Students always like the unusual things that their teachers do in creative ways.
Construction of models or things from wastage like plastic bottles provides a field

xxxv
 into which children could go and work by themselves quietly on academics
activities like puzzles and word-finds.
Fun activities arranged by teachers into the classroom encourage the students
towards learning. Teachers can use unique ways of motivating their class. Teacher
can set a reward for the class on reaching a particular academic goal. For example a
teacher can give extra marks of work done by the students in a creative way.

7) Willingness to Admit Mistakes

Like everybody, teachers may make mistakes. Sometimes students may know
when their teachers make mistakes. Unfortunately, some teachers try to let the
mistakes go unnoticed or cover over them quickly. Teachers who recognize their
mistakes in a very humble and pleasant way and apologize them. This act of
teacher provides an excellent model for the students, and they may be remembered
as a good teacher.

8) Forgiving
The effective teachers reflect a willingness to forgive students for misbehavior. For
example if a student repeatedly asks irrelevant questions and detracts others from
the lesson. The teacher can simply say the question is irrelevant and direct the
student for further study.

9) Respect
The teachers desire be respected by their students. The teachers who give respect to
their students are always respected by them. Effective teachers can train their
students be respectful by many ways such as, he can keep individual grades on
papers confidentially, or can speak to students privately after misbehavior not in
front of others. Good teachers show sensitivity for feelings and consistently avoid
situations that unnecessarily make students uncomfortable.

10) High expectations

Teachers with positive attitudes also possess high expectations for success.
Teachers’ expectation levels affect the ways in which teachers teach and interact
with students. Generally, students either rise to their teachers’ expectations or do
not perform well when expectations are low or non-existent. The best teachers have
the highest standards. They consistently challenge their students to do their best.

11) Compassion
Hopefully, school is a place where children can learn and be nurtured in an
emotionally safe environment. Sometimes in youngsters classrooms there may
happens a significant amount of cruelty and hurt feelings. In these situations a
caring teacher tries to reduce the impact of hurt feelings on learning

xxxvi
12) Sense of Belonging
Teachers developed a sense of family in their classrooms. A variety of strategies,
such as random act of kindness awards, class picture albums, and cooperative class
goals build a sense of unity and belongings and maintain an emotionally safe
classroom. Good teachers also took strong measures to prevent mean and hurtful
behavior like teasing and bullying. Effective teachers know well that when children
feel emotionally and physically safe, they learn far better.

The teacher quality is the most important factor in determining school quality. But what
factors determine the teacher quality? There are fifteen key characteristics that the
administrators look for in their teachers, given in an article from Teaching for Excellence.
Let us read the teacher’s characteristics from the administrator’s point of view:
 Exhibit enthusiasm: The enthusiastic teacher can make learning fun for the
students. if the teacher has willingness to teach he can make a difference in the
motivation of students. This quality also helps in building a sense of teamwork
even beyond the classroom.
 Know your content: Teachers must keep up with their field of expertise. The
teacher must have mastery of the knowledge and new developments in the field.
For example if you teach kindergarten, subscribe to an early childhood journal. If
you teach chemistry, attend the seminar at the local college. Only the knowledge of
changing trends can make the teachers expertise of the field.
 Be organized: In order to be organized, the teacher must learn how to handle the
routine for example collecting student work, handing out materials, posting
assignments, what to do when finished with an assignment, communicating class news,
etc. Organized planning of teaching lessons spare teacher’s time and let him/her spend
more time on student’ learning. Time with students. Established routines keep the class
on track and give you more time for teaching and engaging students.
 Teach actively: Hard working teachers are always appreciated. Good teachers are
actively involved in teaching. They continuously move around, and notice the
students’ behaviour and their learning activity.
 Show a good attitude: A philosopher, Voltaire, said, "the most courageous
decision one makes each day is the decision to be in a good mood”. The students
need models with positive attitudes. Notice what you say to others and your tone of
voice. The teacher must show care, concern, and respect.
 Establish successful classroom management: Teacher must establish the
classroom management system from the first day of class. Because the discipline
and management structure are essential for students to be on work. Teachers
enforce management rules for an orderly class environment by using their qualities
of consistent and fair. The inconsistent rules should not be enforced.

xxxvii
 Pace instruction: learning is directly related to the opportunity to learn. Students
learn the most by doing, not by watching, not by standing in line, and not by
listening. Teachers must plan an instructional time line for courses to be taught.
 Maintain good people skills: On a primary report card, this trait is referred to as
"works well with others". the teachers must have quality of work well with other
people. the teacher’s behavior is judged by others. Education is a people business.
Good human relations skills are necessary for successful teachers.
 Communicative: Good teachers give information clearly. They are concise,
demonstrate and explain in detail. Teachers must give accurate directions when
presenting new information. This process includes explaining, outlining,
summarizing, and reviewing. Too often children have no idea what they are
learning or why they are learning it.
 Question effectively: Questioning is a powerful teaching tool. The productive
thinking occurs only through questioning. Ask questions directed to the whole class
as well as to individuals. The questions are asked directly to the students by calling
them by their names. Give time for students to think through their responses. This
wait time keeps everyone involved and gives students a chance to think.
 Differentiate instruction: One of the biggest challenges to teaching is working
with students having a great range of learning styles, personalities, and rates of
learning. Teachers need to mix different teaching techniques such as auditory,
visual, and hands-on techniques. For specific lessons, make subgroup of the
students with similar weaknesses or skills.
 Build success into your class: Success rate is important. If a student continuously
makes mistakes, he/she can become frustrated which may result in behavior
problems and loss of effort. Researches indicate that eighty percent success rate is
acceptable. When students are not successful, provide them, i) further instruction
and/or ii) simplify the task until they can master the task.
 Hold high expectations: High expectations need to be communicated for good
performance. Successful teachers don't just accept participation but they require it.
In fact, students respect teachers who expect them to do their best.
 Create a pleasant atmosphere: Don't allow your classroom to send out the aura of
the haunted house on the hill. Miserable, dull, and boring environment will
decrease the percentage of learning. Cheerful and happy classrooms will stimulate
learning. Teachers have to create a pleasant situation where students feel
comfortable is a must for turning up the academic burner.
 Be flexible: teaching requires flexibility. Teachers must be able to adjust and their
teaching according to the available time and resources. During teaching it usually
happens when teacher is sensitive enough to student needs. He/she can vary from
the routines and rules to help a child? As a recent saying goes, "The flexible shall
not be bent out of shape."
Let us have a knowledge of the teachers’ professional qualities.

xxxviii
4.2 Professional Qualities
The teacher’s professional characteristics are following:
Collaboration
The teacher works with others to achieve a common goal.
i) Interacts constructively with peers/colleagues, administrators, supervisors, staff,
mentor teachers, and parents
• Shows consideration and respect for thoughts and feelings of others
• Demonstrates effective verbal and non-verbal communication skills
• Demonstrates flexibility with others
• Solicits suggestions and feedback from others
• Maintains communication with colleagues, supervisors, and mentor teachers
when questions or concerns arise
• Recognizes a range of valid viewpoints
ii) Functions as a contributing member of an instructional team to achieve long-term
curriculum goals, state content standards, and district standards (term 4)
• Communicates effectively both verbally and non-verbally
• Shares ideas and materials
• Offers ideas and observations at IEP meetings

Honesty and Integrity

The teacher demonstrates truthfulness, professional behavior, and trustworthiness.
i) Displays honesty and integrity
• Maintains confidentiality
• Elicits trust and respect from both peers and supervisors
• In completing course and field experience assignments, produces original
work and credits sources when appropriate

Respect
The teacher honors, values, and demonstrates consideration and regard for oneself and
others.
i) Is respectful of cultural patterns and expectations within a community context
• Presents self in a professional manner (e.g., dress, communication)
• Speaks and behaves in a manner that is sensitive to linguistic and cultural
differences and respects the dignity and worth of others
• Establishes good rapport with students and colleagues
• Seeks to address the varied learning needs of students in his/her classroom,
including lower-performing children and those with disabilities
• Recognizes and respects identities informed by a group’s historical context

Commitment to Learning
The teacher values learning for self and students.
i) Exhibits energy, drive, and determination to make one’s school and classroom the
best possible environment for teaching and learning

xxxix
 • Plans and delivers instruction that engages all students in his/her classroom
and addresses their learning needs
• Values ongoing assessment as essential to the instructional process

ii) Demonstrates a commitment to students’ learning

• Implements research-based strategies
• Proposes ideas and solutions that address curriculum, instruction, and
classroom management
• Locates and/or creates materials that bring about student learning
• Assumes responsibilities, locates materials and resources, and improves
teaching
• Reflects upon and evaluates effectiveness as a teacher, and seeks to improve
skills
• Reflects on and offers ideas to address curricular, instructional and classroom
management matters
• Engages students in discovering how knowledge is constructed
• Actively and consciously looks for stories, wisdom, action, and creations of
knowledge from diverse perspectives
iii) Reflects on performance and attitudes as a teacher
• Reflects upon and evaluates effectiveness as a teacher, and seeks to improve
skills
• Receives feedback in a positive manner and makes necessary adjustments
• Regularly re-assesses his/her commitment to the profession
• Evaluates instruction and student interactions and modifies as needed

Emotional Maturity
The teacher demonstrates situation appropriate behavior.
i) Is self-confident and enthusiastic
• Displays enthusiasm for teaching and the subject matter
• Demonstrates self-confidence through body language, voice tone, eye
contact, preparedness
• Exhibits energy, drive, and determination to become a professional educator
ii) Is dependable, conscientious, and punctual
• Arrives early or on-time
• Completes assigned tasks in a timely manner
• Follows through with assignments and expectations

iii) Models social skills, character traits and dispositions desired in students.
• Establishes caring and mutually respectful relationships with students
• Explicitly teaches and models desired behaviors and attitudes

Leadership and Responsibility

The teacher acts independently and demonstrates accountability, reliability, and sound
judgment.
i) Is aware of and acts according to school policies and practices

xl
• Has obtained and read school policy manual
• Adheres to class, school, and district rules and policies.

xli
ii) Advises students in formal and informal settings
• Shows concern for all aspects of a student’s well-being, is alert to signs of
academic and behavioral difficulty, and responds appropriately
• Actively listens to and advises students, making referrals as appropriate
iii) Meets work schedule demands
• Is prepared for lessons and other responsibilities
• Meets and consults with mentor teacher each week to plan lessons
iv) Is aware of the importance of professional appearance and demeanor
• Dresses professionally
• Displays a positive attitude
• Communicates in a professional manner
v) Demonstrates initiative, in an acceptable manner, for introducing programs or
practices in a school or classroom
• Make suggestions at faculty meetings
• Offers ideas to mentor teacher and other instructional team members around
instructional, curricular, and behavioral needs of students (College of
Education, Division of Teacher Education, Revised May 10, 2010)

Four general predictors of professional teaching indicated in initial results reports of Bill
& Melinda Gates’ MET project (2009) were as follows:
1. A teacher’s past success in raising student achievement on state tests (that is, his or her
value-added) is one of the strongest predictors of his or her ability to do so again.
2. A teacher’s history of positive (or negative) value-added is among the strongest
predictors of his or her students’ achievement growth in other classes and academic
years.
3. The teachers with the highest value-added scores on state tests also tend to help students
understand math concepts or demonstrate reading comprehension through writing.
4. The average student knows effective teaching when he or she experiences it.
Doing an activity related to the above stated characteristics will enhance the learning of
the concept.

Activity:
Survey the nearby primary or secondary school and ask the students to tell
about the personal and professional qualities, they like most of their teachers
and discuss with your classmates after enlisting them. You can also compare
them with the qualities given above.

Let us do an exercise.

Exercise:

xlii
Q. 1 Reflect some common qualities of primary teachers. Why are these qualities
required for effective classroom learning?
Q. 2 Explain the personal and professional qualities of teachers.
5. THE CONCEPT OF TEACHING METHODOLOGIES, STRATEGIES &
TECHNIQUES
According to Lemlech (1988) classroom management makes teaching and learning
achievable. The classroom management is defined by using the key components that
affect success in the classroom. The components are planning curriculum, organizing
procedures and resources, arranging the environment to maximize efficiency, monitoring
student progress, fore looking potential problems.

5.1 Classroom management

Successful classroom management is defined as producing a high rate of work
involvement with a low rate of deviancy in academic settings.

To some extent teachers control their instructional effectiveness in the classroom. A

passive teacher simply relies on the same old teaching techniques. As compare to him an
active teacher plans different teaching strategic and techniques in order to motivate the
students and to achieve more success in teaching.

Different teaching techniques provide change for the teachers and minimize disturbances
and make sure that instruction can proceed efficiently; they set up their rooms according
to the following principles:
1) Teachers should be able to see all students at all times.
2) Teaching materials and supplies are readily available.
3) High – traffic areas should be free of congestion.
4) Students should be able to see instructional presentations.
5) Procedures and routines should be actively taught in the same way that academic
content is taught.

Time Management Skill

Academic learning time in the classroom is an important factor in keeping the classroom
discipline.
A teacher’s quick and efficient calls/instructions can vary the time allotted to all
classroom activities. The time spent on taking start, handle digressions, off-task
behaviour, discipline have an ultimate effect on student learning.

Student who spends more time on academic content learns more and receives higher
achievement scores. It is important to allocate adequate time to academic content.
Making time schedules is not enough, but the proper use of this allocated time leads
towards student achievement. In order to study the use of classroom times, researchers
have developed the following terms to allocated time, engaged time, and academic
learning time.

xliii
- Allocated time is the amount of time a teacher scheduled for a subject for example,
30 minutes a day for mathematics. The more time allocated for a subject, the higher
student achievement in that subject is likely to be.
- Engaged time is that part of allocated time in which students are actively involved
with academic subject matter (really listening to a lecture, participating in the class
discussion, writing a composition, and working on mathematics problems).
- Academic learning time is engaged time with a high success rate. Many researchers
suggest that students should get 70 to 80 percent of the answers right when
working with a teacher. Teachers who effectively provide and manage academic
learning time in their classrooms can determine student achievement.

Effective classroom managers are nearly always good planners. They do not become late;
handle the situation after noise and disruption. They teach the rules about appropriate
student behaviour.

Seating arrangement
Arrangements of space and furniture that cluster students together or hinder the teacher’s
view make teaching more difficult. Seating arrangement must depend on type of lesson to
be taught, and the type of classroom furniture.

Each teacher needs to know the appropriate seats of all students. A seating plan helps the
teacher to learn names easily.

Proper arrangement of furniture also contributes to the smooth running of classrooms

functions. According to Anderson (1991) desks, chairs and tables can be arranged in a
variety of ways; light and temperature can be increased or decreased. Paint wall
coverings, art work and plants can be used to enhance or detract from the attractiveness
of the physical classroom environment.

Discipline in the classroom

Discipline in the classroom involves using guidance and teaching techniques. Discipline
creates an atmosphere conducive to learning and encourages students to become self
directive.

The teacher must fairly examine the reasons of individual student behavior, and then he
can plan intelligently how to prevent disciplinary violations before they occur. If
violations occurs, appropriate steps can be taken so that as little injury as possible is done
to the learning process. Discipline rules should be posted in the classroom for all to see in
order to create a classroom environment with maximum productive time utilization.

5.2 Teaching Methods & Strategies

Educational institutions across the nation are responding to political, economic, social
and technological pressures. They are more responsive to students' needs for their well
preparation to assume future societal roles. In order to accomplish the desired roles the
teachers have to make learning environments more interactive, to integrate technology

xliv
into the learning experience, and to use collaborative learning strategies when
appropriate. Some of the more prominent strategies are outlined below.
The use of a variety of instructional strategies can positively enhance student learning.
Obviously, teaching strategies should be carefully matched to the teaching objectives of a
particular lesson.

Lecture
The lecture method is one of the most widely used instructional strategies in the
classrooms. Although the usefulness of other teaching strategies is being widely
examined, this method still remains an important way to communicate information. The
traditional lecture can be made effective to achieve instructional goals by using it in
combination with active learning teaching strategies.

The advantages of the lecture approach are that it provides a way to communicate a large
amount of information to many listeners, maximizes instructor control and is non-
threatening to students. The disadvantages are that lecturing minimizes feedback from
students, assumes an unrealistic level of student understanding and comprehension, and
often disengages students from the learning process causing information to be quickly
forgotten.

The following recommendations can help in making the lecture approach more effective:
1. Fit the lecture to the audience
2. Focus your topic - remember you cannot cover everything in one lecture
3. Prepare an outline that includes 5-9 major points you want to cover in one lecture
4. Organize your points for clarity
5. Select appropriate examples or illustrations
6. Present more than one side of an issue and be sensitive to other perspectives
7. Repeat points when necessary
8. Be aware of your audience - notice their feedback
9. Be enthusiastic - you don’t have to be an entertainer but you should be excited by
your topic. (Cashin, 1990, pp. 60-61)

Case Method
The case method is an instructional strategy that engages students in active discussion
about issues and problems inherent in practical application. It can highlight fundamental
dilemmas or critical issues and provides a format for role playing ambiguous or
controversial scenarios. It enables the students to apply what they learn in the classroom
to real-life experiences.

A case is an account of an actual problem or situation which has been experienced by an

individual or a group. It includes facts available to those facing the problem, along with a
description of perceptions and attitudes of those who are confronted with the problem

Course content cases can come from a variety of sources. Teachers have transformed
current events or problems reported through print or broadcast media into critical learning

xlv
experiences in order to find out solutions to critical social problems. The case study
approach works well in cooperative learning or role playing environments to stimulate
critical thinking and awareness.

Advantages
 The case method is realistic.
 By capturing and analyzing real problems , the student is able to bridge the gap
between school and real-life experiences.
 Case analysis treats feelings as facts
 By treating human emotion and feelings, the case approach captures the interest
and imagination of thr learner.
 Dısadvantages
 Although the case method is realistic it is not actual reality
 The case method tends to collapse time and space dimensions
 If used extensively, it will definitely limit the content material which can be
covered.
 Use of already prepared , fictional cases may limit the realism of case sitiation.

Discussion Method
Discussion method engages students in active discussion about issues and problems
inherent in practical application. Teacher places an issue in front of the students and starts
discussion with the help of a probing question.

There are a variety of ways to stimulate discussion. For example, some teachers begin a
lesson with a whole group discussion to refresh students’ memories about the assigned
reading(s). Others find it helpful to have list of critical points or emerging issues, or
generate a set of questions stemming from the assigned reading(s). These strategies can
also be used to help focus large and small group discussions.

A successful class discussion involves planning on the part of the instructor and preparation
on the part of the students. Instructors communicate the commitment to the students by
clearly articulating course expectations. Just as they carefully plans the learning experience,
the students must comprehend the assigned reading and ready to learn.

Active Learning
Meyers and Jones (1993) define active learning as learning environments that allow
“students to talk and listen, read, write, and reflect as they approach course content
through problem-solving exercises, informal small groups, simulations, case studies, role
playing, and other activities -- all of which require students to apply what they are
learning” (p. xi). Many studies show that learning is enhanced when students become
actively involved in the learning process. Instructional strategies that engage students in
the learning process stimulate critical thinking and a greater awareness of other
perspectives.

xlvi
Assessing or grading students' contributions in active learning environments is
problematic. It is extremely important that the course syllabus clearly outlines the
evaluation criteria for each assignment whether individual or group. Students need and
want to know what is expected of them.

Cooperative Learning
Cooperative Learning is a systematic pedagogical strategy that encourages small groups
of students to work together for the achievement of a common goal. The term
'Collaborative Learning' is often used as a synonym for cooperative learning when, in
fact, it is a separate strategy that encompasses a broader range of group interactions such
as developing learning communities, stimulating student/faculty discussions, and
encouraging electronic exchanges (Bruffee, 1993). Both approaches stress the importance
of faculty and student involvement in the learning process.

Careful planning and preparation are essential, when integrating cooperative or

collaborative learning strategies into a course. Understanding how to form groups, ensure
positive interdependence, maintain individual accountability, resolve group conflict,
develop appropriate assignments and grading criteria, and manage active learning
environments are critical to the achievement of a successful cooperative learning
experience

Integrating Technology
Today, educators realize that computer literacy is an important part of a student's
education. Integrating technology into a course curriculum when appropriate is valuable
for enhancing and extending the learning experience. Many teachers have found
electronic mail to be a useful way to promote student/student or teacher/student
communication between class meetings. Others use listserves, or on-line notes to extend
topic discussions and explore critical issues with students and colleagues, or discipline-
specific software to increase student understanding of difficult concepts.
Currently, our students come to us with varying degrees of computer literacy. Teachers
who use technology regularly often find it necessary to provide some basic skill level
instruction.

Distance Learning
Distance learning is not a new concept. Students experience learning outside of a
structured classroom setting through television, correspondence courses, etc. Distance
learning is defined as 'any form of teaching and learning in which the teacher and learner
are not in the same place at the same time' (Gilbert, 1995).

Information technology has broadened our concept of the learning environment. It has
made it possible for learning experiences to be extended beyond the boundaries of the
traditional classroom. Distance learning technologies take many forms such as computer
simulations, interactive collaboration/discussion, and the creation of virtual learning
environments connecting regions or nations. Components of distance learning such as

xlvii
email, listserves, and interactive software have also been useful additions to the
educational setting.

Here are some of the basic teaching methods for higher education as well as for the
middle education.

Questioning
Testing and questioning are always known to be effective teaching methods due to its
interactive nature. The questions are asked by the teacher with an intention to know what
the student has learnt from earlier discussions and what it helps in deciding what should
be taught further.

This can be even vice-verse, students questioning the teachers to clarify the doubts that
would enhance their understanding of the subject. The inquisitive instinct of the students
evoke them to ask questions and satiate their query.

The teacher should encourage this in a positive way so that the student's critical thinking
is developed. Testing differs in one aspect from questioning. Test in done in order to
know about the previous knowledge and already taught things to the student.

Explaining
Explaining is one of the very important teaching methods in education. It has taken a
form of lectures in teaching methods for higher education where the teacher presents the
factual information in a direct and a logical way.

Sometimes the experiences can also be shared as a part of knowledge that would work as
a source of inspiration for the students. While adopting this method the teacher should
give an introduction and a proper summary. Make sure that the information is specific to
the audience.

The explanation should be accompanied with suitable examples for the better
understanding of the students. It is like a discourse on a particular subject or topic that is
for the entire class or public. Explaining can be clubbed with the modeling process to be
more effective and to have a long-lasting effect on the pupils.

Modeling
Modeling is a type of visual aid for teaching as well as learning. It is a known fact that
human brain absorbs more and understands better when visual aid facilitates explanation.
This method works on three criteria - observing, retaining and replicating. The students
learn more by observing the things and acquire it by imitating it again and again.

This is also known as reinforced behaviour. This type of learning has very important role
to play in the learning process especially during the childhood, though it can happen in
any stage of life. This helps the students to visualize the things and, then hypothesize the
solution.

xlviii
Demonstrating
With the help of demonstrative teaching methods in education students get an opportunity
to explore the various aspects and understand the theory from a different perspective.
Demonstration is a step-by-step explanation along with their reasons and significance for
the better understanding of the student. It enhances the student's understanding by
practically applying the knowledge and sharpen their skills and hence, they become
capable of identifying and organizing the subject matter in a more efficient way. Practical
experimentation is a very good method used for demonstrating the subject.

Collaborating
Teamwork is a contemporary form of collaboration. The students are taught to work in a
group that makes the instructing easier for the teacher. This method of teaching promotes
a sense of mutual responsibility among the students. They learn to put in more effort to
research for the topic and apply effective techniques to get the result.

This inculcates patience and develops an ability to critically analyze a subject. It gives an
opportunity to the students to solve the problem by a healthy discussion and co-operation.
This is what we call 'group discussions' which motivates the students to perform in a
team, shows leadership skills and enhances the presentation capabilities as well. This is
one of the best direct instructional methods.

The teaching methods for special education is a little different from the teaching methods
for others. The education is imparted to these students based on their strengths and
weaknesses. The teachers cater to the special needs of the students like modification in
the regular teaching program, use of supplementary aids that allows students to
participate in the learning process. Different teaching strategies are adopted on the basis
of the disabilities.

Apart from these defined methods, nowadays many other teaching methods in education
are being adopted to give quality education. The methods like role-play, story or games,
seminars, presentations, workshops, conferences, educational trips and modern audio-visual
aids like documentary films, computers, internet, etc. have been introduced in education.
These new methods have increased the pace of learning and understanding. The capability
of the students to research and logically think for a given problem, has been enhanced
through modern methods. Some techniques have been added below for you.

5.3 Teaching techniques

5.3.1 Brainstorming
Brainstorming is a group creativity technique that was designed to generate a large
number of ideas for the solution of a problem.
It is particularly helpful there is a need to break out of established patterns of thinking, so
that new ways of looking at things would be developed. The teachers should develop new
opportunities to bring improvement in their services or when existing approaches aren't
giving the desired results.

xlix
There are four basic rules in brainstorming. These are intended to reduce the social
inhibitions that occur in groups and therefore stimulate the generation of new ideas.

Rules of Brainstorming
Focus on quantity: This rule is a means of enhancing divergent production, aiming to
facilitate problem solving through the maxim, quantity breeds quality. The assumption is
that the greater the number of ideas generated, the greater the chance of producing a
radical and effective solution.

No criticism: It is often emphasized that in group brainstorming, criticism should be put 'on
hold'. Instead of immediately stating what might be wrong with an idea, the participants focus
on extending or adding to it, reserving criticism for a later 'critical stage' of the process. By
suspending judgment, a supportive atmosphere could be created where participants feel free
to generate unusual ideas.

Unusual ideas are welcome: To get a good and long list of ideas, unusual ideas are
welcomed. They may open new ways of thinking and provide better solutions than
regular ideas. They can be generated by looking from another perspective or setting aside
assumptions.
Combine and improve ideas: Good ideas can be combined to form a single very good
idea, as suggested by the slogan "1+1=3". This approach is assumed to lead to better and
more complete ideas than merely generating new ideas alone. It is believed to stimulate
the building of ideas by a process of association.

Outline of the Method

Set the problem

One of the most important things to do before a session is to define the problem. The
problem must be clear, not too big, and captured in a definite question such as “What
service for mobile phones is not available now, but needed?“. If the problem is too big,
the chairman should divide it into smaller components, each with its own question.

Create a background memo

The background memo is the invitation and informational letter for the participants,
containing the session name, problem, time, date, and place. The problem is described in
the form of a question, and some example ideas are given. The ideas are solutions to the
problem, and used when the session slows down or goes off-track.

Select participants
The chairman composes the brainstorming panel, consisting of the participants and an
idea collector. Ten or fewer group members are generally more productive than larger
groups. Many variations are possible but the following composition is suggested.
 Several core members of the project who have proved themselves.
 Several guests from outside the project, with affinity to the problem.
 One idea collector who records the suggested ideas.

l
Create a list of lead questions
During the brainstorm session the creativity may decrease. At this moment, the chairman
should stimulate creativity by suggesting a lead question to answer, such as Can we
combine these ideas? or How about a look from another perspective?. It is advised to
prepare a list of such leads before the session begins.

Session conduct
The chairman leads the brainstorming session and ensures that the basic rules are
followed. The activities of a typical session are:

A warm-up session, to expose novice participants to the criticism-free environment. A simple

problem is brainstormed, for example What can be improved in Microsoft Windows?.
 The chairman presents the problem and gives a further explanation if needed.
 The chairman asks the brainstorming panel for their ideas.
 If no ideas are coming out, the chairman suggests a lead to encourage creativity.
 Every participant presents his or her idea, and the idea collector records them.
 If more than one participant has ideas, the chairman lets the most associated idea be
presented first. This selection can be done by looking at the body language of the
participants, or just by asking for the most associated idea.
 The participants try to elaborate on the idea, to improve the quality.
 When time is up, the chairman organizes the ideas based on the topic goal and
encourages discussion. Additional ideas may be generated.
 Ideas are categorized.
 The whole list is reviewed to ensure that everyone understands the ideas. Duplicate
ideas and obviously infeasible solutions are removed.
 The chairman thanks all participants and gives each a token of appreciation

The Process
 Participants who have an idea but no possibility to present it are encouraged to
write down their idea and present it later.
 The idea collector should number the ideas, so that the chairman can use the
number to encourage quantitative idea generation, for example: We have 44 ideas
now, let’s get it to 50!.
 The idea collector should repeat the idea in the words he or she has written it, to
confirm that it expresses the meaning intended by the originator.
 When more participants are having ideas, the one with the most associated idea
should have priority. This is to encourage elaboration on previous ideas.
 During the brainstorming session the attendance of managers and superiors is
strongly discouraged, as it may inhibit and reduce the effect of the four basic rules,
especially the generation of unusual ideas

5.3.2 Problem-Solving Method

 Problem solving is a process to choose and use the effective and benefical tool and
behaviours among the different potentialities to reach the target.

li
 It contains scientific method,critical thinking,taking decision,examining and
reflective thinking.
 This method is used in the process of solving a problem to generalize or to make
synthesis.

Steps of Problem Solving Process

1- Choosing the topic and emergence of problem.
2- Delimitation of the problem.
3- Planning the application.
4- Preparing the working guide.
5- Providing the sources.
6- Examining the problem.
7- Getting a conclusion.
8- Disputating the topics,views and findings.

Advantages of Problem Solving Method

 It provides the active participation of the students in teaching-learning activity.
 It habituates student to study regularly and organized.
 It provides students to gain scientific view and thinking.
 It makes students to be interested in learning.
 It helps to improve the sense of responsibility of students.
 It provides students to face the problems boldly and to deal with it in a scientific
approach.
 It helps students to adopt the view of benefit from others ideas and to help each other.
 It predicates the learning to a more logical and doughty foundation.
 It improves the ability of making proposes and putting forward the hypothesis.
 It helps students to adopt the idea of not to be hurry to make a decision.

Disadvantages
 It takes too much time.
 It is not possible to apply this method to all disciplines.
 It can load some worldly burdensomes to students.
 It can be diffucult for students to provide the materials and sources which is
required for solving the problem.
 Evaluating the learning can be difficult.

Techniques used in Problem Solving Method

a) Induction
It is like teaching with discovering method.Cases are observed carefully.The
similarities and dissimilarities are found.Then you can reach the general rule or law
with the techniques "generalization" or "making abstract" from the similarities.

lii
b) Deduction
It is reverse of induction technique.Some general laws and rules which are reached
before are given to the students and want them to apply this method to different
singular case.The convenience of it to the one of the case is controlled mentally.

5.3.3 Cooperative Learning Technique

 Coopeartive learning is a succesful teaching strategy in which small teams, each
with students of different levels of ability,use variety of learning activities to
improve their understanding of a subject.Each member of a team is responsible not
only for learning what is taught but also for helping teammates learning,thus
creating and atmosphere of achivement.Student work through the assignment until
all the members succesfuly understand and complete it.Cooperative efforts result in
participants striving for mutual benefit so that all group members ;
1. gain confidence from each other’s effort (your success benefits me and my
success benefits you.)
2. recognize that all group members share a commen fate
3. know that one’s performance is mutually caudes by oneself and one’s team
members(we can not do it without you.)
4. feel proud and jointly celebrate when a group member is recognized for
achievement.(we all congratulate you on your accoplishment.)
 Research has shown that cooperative learning techniques;
1. promote sts learning and academic achievement
2. increase sts retention
3. enchance sts satisfaction with learning experience
4. help sts develop skills in oral communication
5. develop sts social skills
6. promete sts self-esteem
7. help to promote positive race relations.

Elements of Cooperative Learning

1. Positive interdepence
2. Face to face interaction
3. Individual and group accountability
4. Interpersonal and small-group skills
5. Group processing

Classroom Activies That Use Cooperative Learning

1. Jigsaw
2. Three-step interview
3. Think-pair-share
4. Round robin brainstorming
5. Three-minute review
6. Numbered heads
7. Team pair solo
8. Circle the sage

liii
9. Partners
Advantages
1. The group provides each member with an oppotunity to participate and thereby
influences decision making.
2. Face to face learning situations promote an atmosphere of cooperation and empathy
seldom achieved in other learning situations.
3. Personal relationships are usually less problematic. There is also a greater chance
of different opinions and varied contributions.
4. It encourages broader skills of cooperation and nagotiation.
5. It promotes learner autonomy by allowing sts to make their own decisions in the
group without being told what to do by the teacher.
6. Although we do not wish any individuals in groups to be completely passive
neverthless some sts can choose their level of participation more readily than in a
whole-class or pairwork situation.

Disadvantages
1. It is likely to be noisy.Some teachers feel that they lose control., and the whole-
class feeling which has been painstakingly built up may dissipate when the class is
split into smaller entities.
2. Not all the students enjoy it, since they would prefer to be the focus of the teacher’s
attention rather than working with their peers.Sometimes sts find themselves in
uncongenial groups and wish the could be somewhere else.

5.3.4 Drama Technique

Dramatization: This technique contains many sub techniques as follows:

Sub Techniques
 Informal drama: no preparation, no written material for ex-traffic accident
 Role playing: students may get preparation for their role before acting
 Formal drama: completely under the teacher control. Everybody uses written
material
 Puppets: students use puppets and say what they want behind the puppets
 Pantomime: students use only mime and gestures, no oral acts, such as washing
his face, eating something
 Finger game: especially for younger students. A story is given and want students
to complete it by making their fingers talk

liv
Advantages
 It is fun
 Provides direct involvement in learning on the part of all students
 Improves language using
 Communicating/speaking and listening skills are improved
 Allows for exploration on solutions

Disadvantages
 Needs too much time
 Costumes, decors and preparation of physical environment may create difficulties
 If students are limited, it may be boring
 Students may be too self-conscious
 Not appropriate for large groups
 Students may feel threatened

5.4 New themes in teaching

Thinkers in the field of education have identified, understood, and critically evaluated the
effects of particular methods, modes, and environments of teaching and learning in
formal teaching and schooling. Thinkers of 20th century have highlighted the negative
contribution of many formal educational strategies and practices. Some thinkers of
education are of the views that schooling should be reformed, others argue that it should
be transformed and others suggest for de-schooling.

These implications have been bridged in developed countries by applying more “learner-
centered”, “knowledge centered” and “community centered” approaches.

Latest findings in the field of psychology devalue the mechanistic treatment of Reward
and punishment in schools and replaced it with a newer “cognitive perspective” which
emphasizes cognitive feedback and natural motivation of students- children are naturally
motivated to know in the same way as they feel hunger and thrust, but they feel tired
when they don’t find materials and practices according to their interests and relevance.
Teachers of modern world may opt the following themes in their teaching: “pedagogical
content knowledge”

Teacher must know “what” they are teaching to “whom” and how that material can be
made easily understandable. Actually the teachers who punish students physically or
psychologically show that they don’t possess skills to satisfy and motivate students.
“Competition vs. cooperation”

lv
This is another new theme. Most of the teachers give importance to competition and think
it the only way to motivate students. The teachers should distinguish between the healthy
and unhealthy competition. Students don’t share knowledge with each other due to
competition among them and it affects their personality development and they develop
feelings of jealousy in their lives forever. The teacher should play a role in diverting these
feeling towards healthy competition.

Individual Learning Needs

Our schools have fix and specific syllabus, time tables for different classes throughout the
year. Teachers also opt specific and routine teaching methodologies that suit to majority
of the children in their class; they never try to incorporate the individual learning needs in
teaching. However current researches suggest that there are particular learning styles;
some students learn easily through abstract ideas, some require more visually stimulated
environment to learn, some students learn easily by doing, and some can only understand
through association and body languages, all these styles of learning look for particular
teaching styles. So the teacher must know the individual learning needs of students and
should mix the methods accordingly.

Knowledge of Result
Practices and procedures in the field of assessment in the schools are debatable. The
methods of assessment give direction to the students’ emphasis in learning. Assessment
of factual information only will lead the students to give attention to facts and figures in
the material and he/she will not emphasis on conceptual understanding of the teaching
material. Most of the teachers give rewards and punishment on the basis of exams but
they do not provide cognitive feedback to students.

The Textbooks
Our educators and course developers provide surface knowledge in the text books. They
neither arrange concepts and facts around a core concept nor make material conceptually
understandable and appropriate to the age and development level of students. Our
students forget lessons within one or two years due to lake of in depth knowledge.

Level of Intelligence and Prior knowledge

Research has identified that each child has its own natural tendency towards intelligence.
Some Children have good logical and linguistic intelligence, while other have intellectual
tendency towards art and games. Teachers should use individual intelligence during their
lecture and should arrange classroom practices that help students to develop in their

lvi
particular intelligences. Similarly students also have their own levels of prior knowledge
about the topics of the subject. There may be misconceptions/wrong belief. A teacher
cannot transfer new knowledge to students until the prior knowledge is not known. The
role of teacher should be to probe and reconstruct that prior knowledge during lesson
teaching.

Career Counseling
Our educational system lacks in providing information and skills regarding to world of
work. The school curricula, educational philosophy and teaching practices do not prepare
a work force for industrial and organizational settings.

Activity:
Spend a day at school. Teach topics of your own choice to five classes by using
different method in each class.

lvii
 6. EXERCISE
Q. 1 How is classroom management helpful in achieving the learning and teaching goals?

Q. 2 What is a case method?

Q. 3 Differentiate and compare active learning and Cooperative Learning.

Q. 4 Explain the teaching technique.

7. SELF ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

Q. 1 Define “Conducive Classroom Environment”. Describe the teacher’s
responsibilities in making the Environment Conducive to learning.

Q. 2 Define effective teaching. Discuss the factors contributing towards effective

teaching.

Q. 3 Explain the approaches to effective teaching. What pathway of teaching would you
like to adopt to make your teaching more effective in the classroom?

Q. 4 A teacher’s personality traits are important to create and maintain a classroom/

learning environment. Why?

lviii
 8. REFERENCES
Alton-Lee, A. (2003). Quality teaching for diverse students in schooling: Best evidence
synthesis. Wellington: Ministry of Education.

Aitken, Dr Graeme (nd). The inquiring teacher: Clarifying the concept of teaching
effectiveness.From: TKI | First time principals | Module 2 | Elements of teaching
effectiveness.URL: http://www.tki.org.nz/r/governance/ftpp/module2/index_e.php
Anderson .L.(1991). Increasing Teacher Effectiveness. UNESCO. International Institute
for Educational Planning, Paris.

Arif, H. M. (2003). Human Development and Learning, Majeed Book Depot, Lahore, Pakistan.

Bulger S. M. and Mohr D. J. (2002) Stack the Deck in Favor of Your Students by Using
the Four Aces of Effective Teaching. Journal of Effective Teaching, Vol. 5, No. 2, 2002.

Callahan, S.G. (1996). Successful Teaching in Secondary schools, Foresman and

Company, Atlanta.

Cruickshank, D. R., Jenkins, D. B., & Metcalf, K. K. (2003). The act of teaching. New
York, NY: McGraw-Hill.

Dilworth, E.M. (1991). Diversity in Teacher Education: New Expectations. Jossey-Boss

Publishers, SanFrancisco.

Duke, L. D & K, J, Rehage (1979). Classroom Management, the University of Chicago

Press, Chicago.

Eisner, E.W. (2002). The kind of schools we need. Phi Delta Kappan, 83, 576-583.

Fisher, R. (1992). Teaching children to think. Basil Blackwell. London.

Gill, S. & Reynolds A. (1999). Educational expectations and school achievement of

urban African American children. Journal of School Psychology, 37, 403-424.

Good, T.; Brophy, J. 2000. Looking in classrooms, 8th ed. New York, Longman.
GURNEY, PHILIP (2007). Five Factors for Effective Teaching. New Zealand Journal of
Teachers’ Work, Volume 4, Issue 2, 89-98, 2007.

Hattie, J. (1999). Influences on student learning (inaugural professorial lecture).

University of Auckland. Highly Qualified for Successful Teaching: Characteristics Every
Teacher Should Possess

lix
Ilukena, A. (July 1998). Qualities and Competencies of the professional Teacher. Reform
Forum: Journal for Educational Reform in Namibia, Volume 7. pp 1-5.

LEW, WILLIAM J.F. (1977). Teaching and the Teacher's Personality. Education Journal,
No.VI, 9-20

Marchbanks, Paul Professor (2000). Personality Traits: ELEMENTARY SCHOOL

TEACHERS, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, English 12, Section 20,
Teachers 1-10, November 2, 2000.

McDermott, P., & Rothenberg, J. (2000), The characteristics of effective teachers in high
poverty schools: Triangulating our data. Paper presented at the annual meeting of the
American Educational Research Association, New Orleans. (ERIC Document
Reproduction Service No. ED442887). Educational Research Association, New Orleans.

Meichenbaum, D.; Biemiller, A. 1998. Nurturing independent learners: helping students

take charge of their learning. Cambridge, MA, Brookline.

Sadker, P. M. & D .M. Sadker (1997). Teacher school and Society, The McGraw-Hill
Company, Inc, new York, USA.

Sandra Courter, Prabhu Balaraman, Joe Lacey, and Clark Hochgraf, (edt.). (1995).
Strategies for Effective Teaching: A Handbook for Teaching Assistants. Prepared by
Teaching Assistant Fellows University of Wisconsin – Madison College of Engineering
Prepared Fall 1995.

Sean M. Bulger AND Derek J. Mohr (2002) Stack the Deck in Favor of Your Students by
Using the Four Aces of Effective Teaching. Journal of Effective Teaching, Vol. 5, No. 2, 2002.

Shah, Mujahid Hussain. (August 8, 2008). Modern methods of teaching-a solution for
ruining education system in Pakistan? Comments submitted on August 8, 2008–
10:50 am. Retrieved from http://www.pak-times.com/2008/08/08/modern-methods-of-
teaching-4027/accessed on 12.08.2011.

Tharp, Roland G., and Gallimore, Ronald, 1991. The Instructional Conversation:
Teaching and Learning in Social Activity (Module 2). NCRCDSLL Research Reports,
Center for Research on Education, Diversity and Excellence, UC, Berkeley.

Tharp, Roland G. and Gallimore, Ronald, (1991).The Instructional Conversation:

Teaching and Learning in Social Activity (Module 2). NCRCDSLL Research Reports
Series. UC Berkeley: NCRCDSLL Research Reports, Center for Research on Education,
Diversity and Excellence. Permalink: http://escholarship.org/uc/item/5th0939d

lx
Unit No. 2

LESSON PLANNING

Written by: Dr. Shaista Majid

Reviewed by: Dr. Hamid Khan Niazi
lxi
 CONTENTS

Introduction -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------51

Objectives ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------51

1. Need of Lesson Planning ---------------------------------------------------------------------52

2. Approaches to Lesson Planning -------------------------------------------------------------56

3. Course and Unit Planning --------------------------------------------------------------------59

4. Daily and Weekly Planning ------------------------------------------------------------------65

5. Steps in Lesson Planning ---------------------------------------------------------------------67

6. The Lesson Plan Format ----------------------------------------------------------------------70

7. Self-Assessment Questions ------------------------------------------------------------------71

8. References --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------72

lxii
 INTRODUCTION
A lesson plan is a detailed plan of the objectives and activities for a particular class. It is
an important part of the teaching and learning process. A lesson plan reflects what a
teacher wants to achieve in each class and how it will be achieved? Planning a lesson
helps a teacher to control class time and its effective use. A teacher’s effectiveness is
usually judged by the ability to design and implement instruction that promotes learning.

Teaching goals, objectives, teaching methods and assessment forms all come together in
a lesson plan, which ideally facilitates student learning. A good lesson plan contains the
description and application of the instructional methods being used in a particular class to
meet the needs of different learners. At the end of the lesson the teacher evaluates how
effective the plan was and makes any additions or revisions for future use.

The lesson plans vary in degree of detail. Some teachers write only few notes of the plan,
while others carefully write the details of each step of the plan. The teachers discover the
system that works best with them.

This unit deals with the elements of lesson planning. It highlights the stages involved in
lesson planning. Different approaches to lesson planning have been discussed in this unit.
The format of daily/ weekly plans and course/unit plans has been included. In the end
steps involved in planning a lesson have been discussed.

OBJECTIVES
After the successful completion of this unit you will be able to:
1. Understand the concept of lesson planning.
2. Realize the need of planning a lesson.
3. Understand the stages involved in lesson planning.
4. Describe different approaches of lesson planning.
5. Plan a course and a unit.
6. Plan weekly and daily lessons.
7. Follow steps involved in lesson planning.

lxiii
 1. NEED OF LESSON PLANNING
A lesson plan is a road map of the instructions. It shows what will be taught and how it
will be done effectively during the class time. Teachers require a lesson plan to describe
their course of instruction for one class. The lesson plan is necessary to guide the
instruction. A lesson plan is required to describe the preferences of the, subject being
covered, activities being held in the class, and to ensure the progress of the students about
the lesson being taught to them.

A well-developed lesson plan reflects the interests and needs of students. It contains the
objectives of the lesson formulated in behavioral terms (indicate the change in behavior).
The best and appropriate practices of teaching methodology and techniques to achieve the
objectives are included in the lesson plan. The content to be covered in a class is
indicated in a lesson plan. The evaluation procedures are also included in the lesson plan.

Lesson planning is beneficial for the teacher in many ways; such as:
 It helps in achieving goals and objectives, and same can be said on the part of the
students.
 It helps to get rid of problems or avoid them.
 It gives a reality check of everyday performance.
 It improves the habit and attitude of the students.
 It improves the teaching skills.
 It makes teaching ordinary and easy.
 It makes the teacher organized during teaching.
 Lesson planning determines when to include the interesting facts to attract the
students’ attention.
 It enables the teacher to impart the things the students can do at the best of their
abilities.

1.1 Process of lesson planning

First of all, a teacher need to identify the learning objectives for the class, then design
appropriate learning activities and develop strategies to obtain feedback on student
learning. A successful lesson plan addresses and integrates these three key components:
 Objectives for student learning
 Teaching/learning activities
 Strategies to check student understanding

Objectives specified for student learning help in determining the kinds of teaching and
learning activities to be used in class. These activities will define the achievements of
learning objectives. The following figure outline the planning of a lesson

lxiv
 Figure No. 1: Planning of a lesson

A detailed planning of a lesson is emphasized through following stages:

Pre-Planning Stage
Before teaching the teacher has to think about the lesson plan for a particular class. The
Center of Excellence in teaching (1999) recommends that the answers to the following
questions may help the teachers to proceed for effective planning:
- What are my objectives for this class?
Objectives are the statements of what the teacher wants students to learn. The
objectives are most likely to be the same, or close to, the goals outlined during
course planning. These are specific for a particular class.

- What are the objectives for this class?

Objectives are the specific goal statements written in behavioral terms. They state
exactly what the students should be able to do, in a class/ on a paper/ in an exam,
etc. Objectives also specify the conditions under which the students should learn
the material.

- Why is this material important?

The teacher thinks about the importance of the skills or knowledge being taught to
the students.
- What content will be covered in the particular class?
Statement of the rationale (logical reasoning) will help the teachers to decide
What content needs to be conveyed? Or
What will students need to know to meet the goals and objectives laid down in the
course? Or
What content is most essential for them to understand?

lxv
- What will the students already know?
Each learner has different knowledge, the teacher must try to assess, what it is the
students already understand or are able to do. Having the knowledge of the
students’ previous learning the teachers are in a better position to decide where to
begin the class and how to help students learn.
- What materials will be needed?
These are the equipment to accomplish the goals the teacher decides if he/she needs
equipments, overheads. Well planning in advance will allow the teachers to be
prepared.

1.2 Designing a Lesson Plan

There are three main elements to a lesson plan that most of the teachers use. There is
variation among these components. All of these may not be used in every class, because
some plans may spread out over two or more classes. The elements are as following:
i) Introduction
The introduction is a way to warm up students, to ease them into the class and to
give them a context for what they are about to learn. Any of the following will be
helpfull to take a good start:
 Provide an outline of what will be done in the class. Giving a structure helps
the students to organize their thoughts and integrate new ideas.
 Summarize the previous lesson if the ideas are similar to this class. Recall of
previous knowledge helps the students to relate new ideas too.
 Present an issue related to the topic and ask students to generate a list of
questions. Connecting the lesson with these questions will give a picture of
students’ experiences, they are familiar with and be able to relates the topic
to their lives. This shows that what you are teaching is relevant and draws
their attention.
ii) Development
Development is an important part as it describes about teaching, or “instructional
methods” such as, lectures, discussions, labs, collaborative learning, etc.
 Try to engage students as much as possible in the learning process. Active
learning is one of the ways to engage students. It not only retains students’
attention but also helps them to develop higher-level thinking skills.
 Attempt to use a variety of teaching methods in a class. Any single method
may not work for all students. A variety of methods keeps their attention
and enhances learning.
 Give students the chance to apply the taught skills by using the concepts. This
will help them learn and give a chance to the teacher to assess informally. This
assessment will provide clarification of learning and need for further practice.
iii) Conclusion

lxvi
 Planning of how to tie it all together for the students is also important. Tell them
once again what they would learn and why it is important to them. Consider the
following activities in conclusion:

iv) Ask for questions:

The last few minutes of class are an excellent time to have students raise questions
and explore the ideas on their own.

v) Summarize the main points and explain how they relate to the course:
Students do not always see how everything fits together. The teacher makes the
link between the activities of one class to the larger course. In this way a teacher
best helps the students develop a conceptual understanding.

vi) Next lesson:

Again, this shows relevance to the lessons linked to one another and helps students
develop a conceptual understanding.

vii) Recapitalize or one-minute writing about the taught lesson:

With one or two minutes remaining in class, ask students to take out a sheet of
paper and, without putting their name on it, write what they believe was the main
idea of the class and one question they have about the lesson content.

1.3 The Post-Planning Stage

The teacher’s lesson planning process should take into consideration the need to assess
whether students have learned? How effective the lesson was?

This assessment is not a complicated or difficult task. It is very simple and informal. For
instance, using part of the class to let students work on problems you have given them, or
discuss issues and apply concepts, can give you a good sense of what and how much they
have learned. The one-minute writing about the lesson or homework problems can be
similarly helpful.

Let us do an activity to ensure the learning of the read concept.

Activity
Carried out interviews and collect views of 05 – 10 teachers on ‘why they plan
lessons’? Prepare a list of reasons of lesson plan on the basis of their opinions.

Let us do the following exercise to check the knowledge.

Exercise
Q. 1 Write down the five merits of lesson planning for the teachers.
Q. 2 Why a teacher needs to go through the pre-planning stage?

lxvii
Q. 3 How does a teacher design the instructions?
Q. 4 How can a teacher assess the effectiveness of the taught lesson by him/her?

lxviii
 2. APPROACHES TO LESSON PLANNING
There are different styles of lesson planning. The common style of lesson planning
contains the following basic elements:
 3-5 lesson objectives
 Content to be covered
 Activities (lecture, group work, problem-solving, etc.)
 Resources and materials needed (including technology)
 Timing
 Out of class work and assessment

The following classic lesson planning models are most popular in lesson planning. These are:
1) Gagne’s frame work for instructional development,
2) Hunter’s seven steps of lesson planning and
3) The 5 E's lesson planning model

1) Gagne’s frame work for instructional development

A famous educational psychologist, Robert Gagne, identified nine instructional
events that support learning and that can be used in lesson planning. These points
are often used as a framework for instructional development by the teachers.
Gagne’s frame work focus on the acquisition of intellectual skills during
instruction. The nine events of instruction are:
i) Gaining attention:- Students attention is gained towards the lesson. There
are many ways to gain students’ attention; such as teacher links the lesson
with the students’ previous knowledge, start from the daily experiences of
the students related to the lesson.
ii) Informing learners of the objective:- state the objectives of the lesson. Make
the students aware of what they are going to learn.
iii) Stimulating recall of prior learning:- in order to make link with the previous
knowledge, the teacher may asks questions to recall the prior learning.
iv) Presenting the content:- the teachers present the new concepts. Define and
describe the details of the concepts before the students.
v) Providing learning guidance:- the teachers use the audio and visual aids in
order to create a best learning environment.
vi) Providing opportunities to practice:- the teachers use examples from the
daily life and provide opportunities to revise/drill the new lesson.
Sometimes the teachers give class work for the improvement in learning.
vii) Providing feedback (information about how to improve):- the work
assignments of the students are checked by the teacher and comments are
given. The students are asked to correct the work.
viii) Assessing performance (exam, tests, papers):- the evaluation methods are
used to check the students’ performance on the learned concepts. The

lxix
 assessment of students’ progress can be carried out by daily/monthly tests,
examinations, etc.
ix) Enhancing retention and transfer:- the teacher organize activities to help
students remember and retain the learned concepts. The learned behavior of
the student is confirmed when he/she applies the knowledge on to different
situations to solve other problems (transfer it to other scenarios).

2) Madeline Hunter’s Seven Steps Lesson Plan

Hunter developed a seven steps model of lesson planning. These steps are
associated with the direct instruction method and behavior change practices. The
seven steps fall under four categories as follows:
i) Getting Students Ready to Learn
1. Review:- review of prior learning is necessary to make students ready to
learn the new concept.
2. Protective Set:- focus attention, gain interest – knowledge and
experiences of the students about the new concept are assessed. The
teacher connects the previous knowledge and experience of the students to
the new topic/concept.
3. Stating the objective:- most specifically the objectives of the lesson are
stated by the teacher.

ii) Instruction
Input and modeling:- the teacher presents instructions to the class. He/she
uses different modes keeping in mind the students’ interests and abilities.
Various examples from the daily life experiences help students to grasp the
new concepts.

iii) Checking for Understanding

1. Check for understanding:- students learn the lesson according to their
own style of learning. Teachers check students understanding in the middle
and at the end of the lesson and decide whether further clarification is
required or not or which areas/points needs more clarification either
through teaching material or through different strategies. The teachers use
class assignments for this purpose
2. Guided practice (provide feedback without grading):- a teacher’s
remark on students’ work is very essential. It provides feed back to the
students about their progress, learning and weaknesses, areas where
improvement is required.

iv) Independent Practice

Independent practice (usually for a graded assignment):- students’
learning of new concepts is regularly checked through continues
assessment; i.e. monthly tests, quarterly exams. The teachers mark and
give grades to their work.
3) 5 E’s of Lesson Planning

lxx
 Learning theory of Constructivism states that learners construct new ideas or
concepts on the basis of their current/past knowledge. This model is based on the
ideas of constructive learning. Teachers design their instructions/ lessons around
the learning objective, gather resources, and provide students an opportunity to
explore, build, and demonstrate their learning. It shifts the learning environment
from teacher-centered to learner-centered.

The 5 E's Lesson Planning Model is most often associated with constructivist
learning design. It involves following 5 E’s:
 Engage - students come across the material, define their questions, do the
basic work for their class work, make connections between new and known
ideas, identify the relevant practices from their daily life.
 Explore - students directly involved with material, go through the learning
process to solve the problems. They work in a team to share the
knowledge.
 Explain – the student gets an opportunity to explain the learned concepts
such as discoveries, processes, and ideas by written/ verbal assignments or
through creative writing/ projects. The teacher supplies material, books/
resources, gives feedback, enhances vocabulary, and clarifies
misconceptions/wrong points if any.
 Elaborate – the teachers can enhance students’ knowledge with the help of
other examples and expand their knowledge by explaining similar
concepts, and asking them to apply it to other situations. The learning of
the new concepts also raises questions relating to other concepts (lead to
new inquiry).
 Evaluate – evaluation of learning is an on-going (continuous) process.
Both teacher and learner check the understanding of the concepts. Different
evaluation techniques can be used such as rubrics, checklists, teacher
interviews, portfolios, problem-based learning outputs, and assessments
results. Results are used to evaluate the students’ progress and to modify
instructional needs in future.

Activity
Prepare a lesson plan on the topic of “water” from the book of Science for class IV on
the design of 5 E’s model of lesson planning.

Let us do an exercise to check the knowledge.

Exercise
Q. 1 What is Gagne s’ frame work for instructional development?
Q. 2 Highlight the Hunter’s seven steps of lesson planning.
Q. 3 How is 5E’s model of lesson planning different from the others models?

lxxi
 3. COURSE AND UNIT PLANNING
Once you have determined the needs of learners, it is time to consider designing and
planning the course. Following are some suggested steps in this process.
- Decide a topic
- Determine objectives
- Identify learning outcomes- (the desirable results)
- Determine assessment
- Design learning experiences and organize material- the content
- Develop evaluation mechanism-evaluation
- Information marketing-course description

Deciding on a Topic
– Consult with your students
– What topics are of interest to your students?
– What is driving your students' interests?
– What worked/didn't work in the past and why?
– How might existing courses be developed or modified?
– Which exercises/problems/assessment assignments were most appropriate?

Planning Backwards
Begin with the end in mind - Steven Covey
When planning a course, the best place to start is at the end. Determine what students
might reasonably be expected to achieve from a course and then plan how material can be
organised and delivered to reach this end.

Overarching Goals
Overarching goals describe the most important understandings that students should
develop during an entire course. Ask yourself:

When my students leave my class at the end of this course, what are the essential
understandings that I want them to take away?

Where possible, students should have a role in determining the goals of a programme.
However, in instances where goals are determined by an outside body, e.g. stage agency
or funding body, it is important to ensure consultation and collaboration between all the
stakeholders.

Learning Outcomes
Once the overarching goal is determined, the next step is to break this into identifiable
and manageable units of achievement, i.e. learning outcomes. Statements of what a

lxxii
learner is expected to know, understand and/or be able to demonstrate after completion of
a process of learning.
Students may ask, what will I learn from this course? What will I be able to do when the
course is over? Sometimes the course description alone does not provide sufficient detail.
Generalised learning outcomes do not supply much additional information to prospective
students. More focused outcomes can identify key tasks in the learning process, or
observe stages in cognitive development.

Levels of Abstraction
In the 1950's Benjamin Bloom created taxonomy for categorising levels of thinking. The
taxonomy provides a useful structure in which to categorise learning outcomes and,
subsequently, assessment questions. Introductory courses, and some interest courses, may
expect to have outcomes at the initial levels of abstraction, whereas accredited and
certified courses would be expected to have more complex outcomes at higher levels of
abstraction. The system has been used widely across a variety of educational spheres
since its inception.
In the 1990's, Anderson and Krathwohl (2001) revised the taxonomy with a view to
making it more relevant to the twenty-first century. The following table is listed in the
order of the revised taxonomy with the original categories.

COMPETENCE SKILLS DEMONSTRATED QUESTION CUES

Remembering  Observation and recall of List, define, tell, describe,

(Knowledge) information identify, show, label, collect,
Can the student RECALL  Knowledge of dates, events, examine, tabulate, quote,
information? places name, who, when, where, etc.
 Knowledge of major ideas
 Mastery of subject matter

Understanding  Understanding information Summarise, describe,

(Comprehension)  Grasp meaning interpret, contrast, predict,
Can the student EXPLAIN  Translate knowledge into new associate, distinguish,
ideas or concepts? context estimate, differentiate,
 Interpret facts, compare, contrast discuss, extend
 Order, group, infer causes
 Predict consequences

Applying  Use methods, concepts, theories Apply, demonstrate, calculate,

(Application) in new situations complete, illustrate, show,
Can the student USE the new  Solve problems using required solve, examine, modify, relate,
knowledge in another familiar skills or knowledge change, classify, experiment,
situation? discover

lxxiii
Analysing  Organisation of parts Analyse, separate, order,
(Analysis)  Seeing patterns explain, connect, classify,
Can the student
 Recognition of hidden meanings arrange, divide, compare,
DIFFERENTIATE between
constituent parts?  Identification of components select, explain, infer

Evaluating  Compare and discriminate Assess, decide, rank, grade,

(Evaluation) between ideas test, measure, recommend,
Can the student JUSTIFY a  Assess value of theories, convince, select, judge,
decision or course of action? presentations explain, discriminate, support,
 Make choices based on reasoned conclude, compare, summarise
argument
 Verify value of evidence
 Recognise subjectivity

Creating  Use old ideas to create new ones Combine, integrate, modify,
(Synthesis)  Generalise from given facts rearrange, substitute, plan,
Can the student GENERATE  Relate knowledge from several create, design, invent, what
new products, ideas or ways areas if?, compose, formulate,
of viewing things?  Predict, draw conclusions prepare, generalise, rewrite

Source:
http://www.coun.uvic.ca/learn/program/hndouts/bloom.html
http://coe.sdsu.edu/eet/Articles/bloomrev/index.htm
http://rite.ed.qut.edu.au/oz-teachernet/index.php

Writing up Outcomes
Outcomes can be written up in the following format:
At the end of this course students should be able to:
Define...
Summarise...
Demonstrate...
Analyse...
Critique...
Integrate...

Discussion of Outcomes
At the beginning of a course, learning outcomes should be discussed with students. This
ensures that you are both working towards the same objectives and gives students an idea
of what they can reasonably expect to achieve over the course of a module. This also
provides an opportunity to amend learning outcomes in line with the wishes of particular
student groups. In this way students feel more involved with the programme and feel
their input influences the shape of the course. Learning outcomes should be fluid as not

lxxiv
all learning can be prescribed or predicted. Learning opportunities can arise during
courses, which were never envisaged at the planning stage, and it is important to
accommodate such diversions.

Check of Understanding
Questions that might now be asked include:
 How do I determine if objectives/outcomes have been met?
 How will I be able to distinguish between those who really understand and those
who don't?
 What would constitute sufficient and revealing evidence of understanding?
 Against what criteria do I measure achievement?
 If not formally assessing the course, how can I be sure that there is an evidence of
learning?

Ongoing and systematic consultation with students goes some way to ensuring outcomes
is being met. Student feedback should be sought to ascertain whether content is being
understood and to ensure the material is being covered at an appropriate pace for the
group. Individual/group exercises and problem based learning exercises can also be used
throughout the course to ensure that students are progressing through the material.

Formal evidence of understanding can be verified through a variety of assessment

methods.

Assessment
Assessment should be decided upon at the outset as an integral part of design and not
merely attached on at the end. For those people setting assessment exercises, assessment
should be linked to the projected learning outcomes. Assessment criteria should be
understandable so that students can see that the assignment is related to the overall aims
of the course. Questions you might address include:
 Are the learning outcomes assessable?
 What form of assignment would best assess the learning outcomes?
 Does the assessment capture the most important elements of my course?

Planning Content
Once outcomes have been established, and assessment methods (either formal or
informal) decided upon, the following questions need to be considered:

lxxv
 How can my material be organised best and presented so as to reach my
proposed learning outcomes?
 What do I need to consider about the type of learners with whom I work?
 How do adult learning styles impact on the way I present material?
 What teaching methodologies are most suitable for adult learners?
 How do I involve the learners as much as possible?
 How can I draw on the learner's own experience and knowledge

When planning and organising your course content, it is important to take into
consideration the individual nature of adult learners who come to your course. Learners
will have varied abilities and require varied levels of support. Prior experiences of
learning may differ radically with some students being enthusiastic lifelong learners and
others making a tentative move back into education. Motivations for attending may also
range from those needing a particular course for work/personal reasons to those who just
wish to take a course to get out and meet people. In between will be all degrees of
commitment, interest and enthusiasm. All of these learners may have to be
accommodated in the one group.

Important Points
Course overview - can you give students a brief overview of what material is to be
covered over the duration of the course?
 Blocks of learning - what amount of material can be covered in a class?
 Sequencing of materials - how can the materials be sequenced in an order that is
logical /rational?
 Depth of material - what level is the course pitched at? How much detail do you
need?
 Methodologies - what is the most appropriate methodology for a particular topic?
Is there a mix of methodologies planned?
 Group exercises - when and how often should group work be used?
 Worksheets/ notes -what support materials need to be developed? Would the use
of problems or case studies help with the overall understanding of the content?
 Resources - what books, tapes, etc. might be valuable for class use or as a
resource for students outside class?
 Field-trips - are there any activities that could be related to the course (visits to
museums or organizations) which would set the learning in a practical context?

Evaluation

lxxvi
Evaluation is the collection of feedback on a course to determine how the course content
and presentation has been received. Evaluation is essential in ensuring quality control.
Feedback received in this way provides information on the:
 Standards of the course
 Materials distributed
 Delivery methodologies used
 Nature of the group dynamics and tutor/learner rapport
 Ability of students to transfer/apply knowledge gained
Tutor self-evaluation and learner evaluation are both necessary to provide effective
quality control. Self-evaluation requires you to reflect on your practice throughout a
course, to critique your presentation style, to analyse your group and time management
skills, and to consider how you might alter your practice in future.

Learner evaluation allows the learner an opportunity to evaluate both the facilitator and
course content. The evaluation can provide information on whether the course met
participants' needs and supply recommendations as to how a course might be modified in
future. Time for course evaluation and review should be allocated at the design and
planning stage.

Course Descriptions
Using overarching goal(s) and learning outcomes as a basis, the next step is to write up a
course description. Course descriptions may be used by the learning provider for
information and/or marketing purposes. Dynamic creative descriptions engage
prospective students and encourage further inquiries. It is important to make as much
information as possible available to students. The language used in course brochures
should be clear and concise and free of jargon or terminology which might confuse or
intimidate the learner.

lxxvii
 4. DAILY AND WEELKY PLANNING
Daily and weekly planning are essential for the teachers. These create enough time for
meeting multiple responsibilities. The teacher can plan days and weeks carefully to
include time for teaching exercises, such as collecting and organizing material, writing
questions, preparing class assignments, and managing activities of different nature. This
process allows creating a clear path for teacher that maintains a healthy balance between
teaching and preparation.

Strategies for daily and weekly planning

The following points demonstrate why planning is so critical to success.
 Planning can greatly reduce your stress quotient. Proper planning gives you the
peace of mind of knowing that you have formulated a feasible plan of action and
that your goals are attainable.
 Planning also helps you to be prepared for obstacles because part of the planning
process is creating a emergency pan for unexpected problems.
 Planning serves as a way to evaluate your progress as you work. Planning your
daily and weekly activities will clearly illustrate whether or not you are staying on
schedule.

The following tips will provide you with strategies to implement your planning to
achieve your objectives.
 The first step to planning is to clearly define your objectives. Taking a few minutes
to put your goals into writing will be very beneficial in helping you to plan for your
success.
 Once you have defined your objectives, it is time to brainstorm on the tasks that are
required to complete your project. Ordering all of the necessary tasks into a logical
order and assigning an estimated time for completion to each objective will be
beneficial when you begin scheduling these activities.
 Next it is useful to define the roles that you will take in fulfilling your goal as well
as the roles of any others who will be assisting you. This is important because you
can use this time to determine who will handle certain tasks to avoid redundancy.
 Once you have determined your goal, the tasks required, the key players and the
tasks they will complete, it is finally time to start your daily and weekly scheduling.
The weekly schedule is important for the overall success of the project but it is the
daily planning that will help you to track your progress and determine whether or not
you are on schedule. Try using significant project milestones in your weekly
planning but for daily planning break each milestone down into the necessary
components and plan the completion of those components on a daily basis.
 As the teaching lesson progresses, continually evaluate your performance to
determine whether you are on track or need to adjust your schedule. This is where
daily planning becomes so important. Take a few minutes at the middle of the day

lxxviii
 and at the conclusion of the day to evaluate your progress and make adjustments as
necessary.
 Finally once you have successfully completed your project review your planning
process to determine how successful it was. This will help you by illustrating
whether or not you have achieved an optimal planning system or whether you need
to more carefully plan subsequent projects.
An activity on course planning will enhance the learned concept.

Activity
Select a topic/chapter from the book of English for class V and prepare
the daily and weekly plan for this topic/chapter.

lxxix
 5. STEPS IN LESSON PLANNING
The plans of class room activities to be happened each day make the teaching effective.
The teachers go through many steps for planning a lesson. Six steps are given below to
guide the teachers to create their first lesson plans. Each step is comprised by a set of
questions:

1. Outline learning objectives

The lesson objectives are usefully stated in terms of what students will achieve at
the end of the lesson. The first step is to determine as a teacher what you want
students to learn and be able to do at the end of class. To help you specify your
objectives for student learning, answer the following questions:
 What is the topic of the lesson?
 What do I want students to learn?
 What do I want them to understand and be able to do at the end of class?
 What do I want them to take away from this particular lesson?

Once you outline the learning objectives for the class meeting, rank them in terms
of their importance. This step will prepare you for managing class time and
completing the learning objectives. Consider the following questions:
 What are the most important concepts, ideas, or skills I want students to be able
to grasp and apply?
 Why are they important?
 If I ran out of time, which ones could not be omitted?
 Which ones could be skipped?

2. Develop the introduction

After determining learning objectives and specifying them in order of their
importance, the teacher has to design the specific activities for the students. They
may already be familiar with the topic; therefore it is necessary to gather
background information from the students prior to lesson. You may start with a
question or activity to assess students’ knowledge of the topic. For example you
can ask a question or take a simple poll: “How many of you have heard about this?
Raise your hand if you have” or ask them to write comments on paper. This
additional information can help you to shape the introduction and learning
activities of the new concept.

Develop a creative introduction to the topic to encourage thinking. You can use a
variety of approaches to engage students for example, personal anecdote, historical
event, real example, short video clip, practical application, probing question, etc.
following questions may help you in planning your introduction:
 How will I check whether students know anything about the topic?

lxxx
  What are some commonly held ideas (or misconceptions) about this topic
that students might be familiar with?
 What will I do to introduce the topic?
3. Plan the specific learning activities (the main body of the lesson)
Prepare several and different examples (ways) to explain the topic/concept (real-
life examples, similarities, visuals, etc.) to catch the attention of all students. After
planning examples and activities for the lesson, estimate how much time you will
spend on each. Manage the time for different applications or problems, and for the
check of learning and understanding of the students. The following questions
would help you design the learning activities you will use in the class:
 What will I do to explain the topic?
 What will I do to illustrate the topic in a different way?
 How can I engage students in the topic?
 What are some relevant real-life examples, similarities, or situations that can
help students understand the topic?
 What will students need to do to help them understand the topic better?

4. Plan to check for understanding

Up till now the topic has been explained with different examples. At this stage you
need to check for student understanding. Therefore you are required to plan for
how will you know that students are learning? Think about specific questions you
can ask students in order to check for understanding, and write them down. Try to
predict the answers to your questions. Decide on whether you want students to
respond orally or in writing. Ask yourself the following questions:
 What questions will I ask students to check for understanding?
 How will students demonstrate that they are following?
 Going back to the list of learning objectives, what activity students can do to
check whether each of those has been completed?

Decide what kinds of questions will be productive for discussion and what
questions might sidetrack the class. Think about the balance between achieving
learning objectives and ensuring that students understand.

5 Develop a conclusion and a preview

Repeat the material covered in class by summarizing the main points of the lesson.
You can do this in a number of ways: you can state the main points yourself
(“Today we talked about…”), you can ask a student to help you summarize them,
or you can even ask all students to write down on a piece of paper what they think
were the main points of the lesson. You can review the students’ answers to
estimate their understanding of the topic and then explain anything unclear the
following class.

Conclude the lesson not only by summarizing the main points, but also by making
its link to the next lesson. How does the topic relate to the one that’s coming up

lxxxi
 next? This opportunity will increase students’ interest and help them connect the
different ideas within a larger context.

6. Create a realistic timeline

A realistic timeline will reflect your flexibility and readiness to adapt to the specific
classroom environment. Here are some strategies for creating a realistic timeline:
 Estimate how much time each of the activities will take, then plan some extra
time for each
 When you prepare your lesson plan, next to each activity indicate how much
time you expect it will take
 Plan a few minutes at the end of class to answer any remaining questions and
to sum up the key points
 Plan an extra activity or discussion question in case you have time left
 Be flexible – be ready to adjust your lesson plan to students’ needs and
focus on what seems to be more productive rather than sticking to your
original plan

Activity
Reconsider the topic ‘developing instruction’ and making a timeline for it.
Discuss it with your class fellows/colleagues and give five suggestions to make
it realistic.

lxxxii
 6. THE LESSON PLAN FORMAT
There are many formats for a lesson plan. Most lesson plans contain some or all of the
following elements, in this order:
 Title of the lesson
 Time required to complete the lesson
 List of required materials
 List of objectives- the objectives may be behavioral objectives (what the student
can do at lesson completion) or knowledge objectives (what the student knows at
lesson completion)
 The set (bridge-in) that focuses students on the lesson's concept or skills. these
include pictures or models and asking leading questions or recalling the previous
lessons
 An instructional component- it describes the sequence of events included in a
lesson. It includes the teacher's instructional input and guided practice. the students
try to understand new skills/work with new ideas
 Independent practice- this practice allows students to extend knowledge and
skills by them selves
 A summary- the teacher wraps up the discussion and answers to the students’
questions
 An evaluation component- a test for mastery of the instructed skills or concepts—
such as a set of questions to answer or a set of instructions to follow
 Analysis component- the teacher reflects on the lesson—such as what has been
achieved/learned, or what needs improvement
 A continuity component – it reviews and relates to the content from the previous
lesson.
Let us do an activity of planning a lesson on the proper format.

Activity
Prepare a lesson plan by following the lesson plan format

lxxxiii
 7. SELF ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
Q. 1 It is necessary to plan the lesson before teaching, comment.
Q. 2 What is lesson planning? Explain the process of lesson planning?
Q. 3 Describe the classical models of lesson planning.
Q. 4 Describe the process of course design and planning.
Q. 5 Write down the strategies for daily and weekly planning.
Q. 6 Highlight the steps involved in lesson planning. Discuss the importance of each
step. How teachers can take more benefits in teaching through these steps?
Q. 7 Why is outlining of goals/objectives necessary before planning a lesson? How are
objectives stated in behavioral terms?
Q. 8 Highlight the steps of planning “development of instruction”.
Q. 9 What is the main body of the lesson, to which a teacher has to focus his/her
attention?
Q. 10 How teachers can plan and check the students’ understanding of the newly taught
lesson?
Q. 11 How does conclusion and a preview help a teacher in closing the instruction?
Q. 12 Discuss the elements of a lesson plan format. Are these sufficient for planning?
How?
Q. 13 i) Explain the elements of a lesson plan format.
ii) Does the elements covered in a lesson plan format make the teacher
fully/completely prepared for teaching? Give suggestions to improve the
format.

lxxxiv
 8. REFERENCES
Anderson and Krathwohl (2001). Lesson planning. Adapted by Anderson and Krathwohl
(2001) from:
http://www.coun.uvic.ca/learn/program/hndouts/bloom.html
http://coe.sdsu.edu/eet/Articles/bloomrev/index.htm
http://rite.ed.qut.edu.au/oz-teachernet/index.php
Ahrenfelt, J, & Neal, W. (2006).100 Ideas for Essential Teaching Skills (Continuum One
Hundred). New York: Continuum.
Carey, L. & Dick, W. (1978). The Systematic Design of Instruction. (1 ed.), Glenview:
Scott, Foresman, ISBN 9780673151223
Chamot, A.U. Dr., Keatley, C. Dr. & Kennedy, D. (2004). Planning a Lesson. The
National Capital Language Resource Center, Washington, DC
Gagne, R. & Briggs, L. (1974). Principles of instructional design (1 ed.), New York:
Holt, Rinehart and Winston, ISBN 9780030081712, hdl:2027/mdp.39015004151000
Serdyukov, P. & Ryan, M. (2008). Writing Effective Lesson Plans: The 5-Star Approach.
Boston: Allyn & Bacon,.
Salsbury, D.E., & Schoenfeldt, M. (2008). Lesson Planning: A Research-Based Model
for K-12 Classrooms. Alexandria, VA: Prentice Hall.
Skowron, J. (2006). Powerful Lesson Planning: Every Teachers Guide to Effective
Instruction. Thousand Oaks, CA: Corwin Press.
Thompson, J.G. (2007). First Year Teacher's Survival Guide: Ready-To-Use Strategies,
Tools & Activities For Meeting The Challenges Of Each School Day (J-B Ed:Survival
Guides). San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
Tileston, D.E.W. (2003). What Every Teacher Should Know About Instructional
Planning Thousand Oaks, CA: Corwin Press.
Wynne, R. (2001). Learner Centred Methodologies. Overview of Course Design and
Planning Process. Ireland
Wolfe, S. (2006). Your Best Year Yet! A Guide to Purposeful Planning and Effective
Classroom Organization (Teaching Strategies). New York: Teaching Strategies.

lxxxv
Unit No. 3

STUDENT MOTIVATION

Written by: Dr. Muhammad Ajmal Chaudhry

Reviewed by: Dr. Naveed Sultana

lxxxvi
 CONTENTS

Introduction------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 77

Objectives-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 78

1. Definition of Motivation -------------------------------------------------------------------- 79

2. Types of Motivation ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 80

3. Theories of Motivation --------------------------------------------------------------------- 82

4. Application of Motivation in Education ------------------------------------------------- 84

5. Student Motivation --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 86

6. Factors Influencing the Development of Student Motivation ----------------------- 88

7. Exercise ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91

8. Self Assessment Questions ----------------------------------------------------------------- 92

9. References ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 93

10. Web Reference-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 94

lxxxvii
 INTRODUCTION
In an ideal classroom, students pay attention, ask questions and want to learn. They do
their assignments without complaint and study without being persuaded and flattered.
But, teachers often have students who don’t seem motivated to work on the classroom
tasks set out for them.

“They aren’t successful with every student, but with a positive approach to motivation,
they can influence many.” (Kauchak & Eggen, 2004) Therefore, teachers contribute a
great deal to students’ desires to learn and to take responsibility for their learning.

Motivation is a crucial element to the learning process. Many researches clearly show a
positive correlation between motivation and achievement. Some students are highly
motivated to learn, and this interest continues throughout their years at school. Some
other students, particularly adolescents, see what happened at school as having no
functional relevance to their lives. They become increasingly bored, particularly with
academic task and are generally uninterested in anything that happens in the classroom.
Teachers should recognize that there is tremendous variation in the level of energy and
interest students bring to the classroom activities.

“Some students are easy to teach because they are excited about learning and responsive
to the teacher’s idea. While, the others are completely unmotivated by what happens in
the classroom and have no interest in schoolwork.” (Krause, et. al, 2003)

Therefore, it is important for a teacher to be truly effective to help their students feel
motivated to learn and to achieve. A teacher must go beyond the materials and processes
typically used to stimulate and understand the underlying elements involved in the
motivation to learn.

Teachers explain the differing motivational level among their students in ways that reflect
their own personal philosophy of learning and teaching. Some focus on the place of reward
and punishment in motivating students to learn. Other teachers are more concerned with
students’ expectation of success, or the way in which they attribute failure.

lxxxviii
“Factors that can also influence students’ motivation to learn include their observation of
peer achieving success or failure, their ability to regulate their own behavior and their
need for personal fulfillment.” (Krause, et. al, 2003)

lxxxix
 OBJECTIVES

After the completion of the unit you will be able to:

1. Define and clarify the concept of motivation.
2. Identify the types of motivation.
3. Describe difference between intrinsic and extrinsic motivation.
4. Explain different theories of motivation.
5. Explain strategies that can increase motivation

xc
 1. DEFINITION OF MOTIVATION
The word motivation is derived from a Latin word ‘movers’ which means to move. Thus;
motivation is an external force which accelerates a response or behavior. Motivation is a
cause of an organism’s behavior, or the reason that an organism carries out some activity.
In a human being, motivation involves both conscious and unconscious drives.
Psychological theories must account for a “primary” level of motivation to satisfy basic
needs, such as those for food, oxygen, and water, and for a “secondary” level of
motivation to fulfill social needs such as companionship and achievement. The primary
needs must be satisfied before an organism can attend to secondary drives.
Motivation is described by different psychologists differently as described below:-
 “The term motivation refers to the arousal of tendency to act to produce one or
more effect”Allport (1935 )
 “Motivation is constant, never ending, fluctuating and complex and it is an almost
universal characteristic of particularly every organismic state of affairs.”
Maslow(1960 )
 “The process of arousing, sustaining and regulating activity” Crow. L. D.(1953 )
 “The central factor in the effective management of the process of learning.”B.R.
Annandi (1981)
 “Motivation in school learning involves arousing, persisting, sustaining and
directing desirable behavior.” Lepper, Mark R.(1998)

The word motivation refers to getting someone moving. When we motivate ourselves or
someone else, we develop incentives or we set up conditions that start or stop behavior.

In education, motivation deals with the problem of setting up conditions so that learners
will perform to the best of their abilities in academic settings. We often motivate learners
by helping them develop an expectancy that a benefit will occur as a result of their
participation in an instructional experience.

Motivation is concerned with the factors that stimulate or inhibit the desire to engage in
behavior. It involves the processes that energize, direct and sustain behavior. It can be
thought of as an internal process that activates guides and maintains behavior overtime.

According to Krause, K.L, Bochner, S, & Duchesne, S(2003): “The concept of

motivation is linked closely to other constructs in education and psychology such as
constructs of attention, needs, goals and interests which are all contribute to stimulating
students’ interest in learning and their intention to engage in particular activities and
achieve various goals.”

Baron, and Schunk, (1992) stated that “The definition of motivation is the force that
energizes and directs a behavior towards a goal.”

Tan O.S., Parsons, R.D., Hinson, S.L, & Brown, D.S, (2003) stated that “The concept of
motivation as applied when a person is energized to satisfy some need or desire. The

xci
person will engage in, or be attracted toward activities that are perceived as having the
potential to meet this need or desire.”

xcii
 2. TYPES OF MOTIVATION
Following are the types of motivation: extrinsic motivation and intrinsic motivation:

Positive Motivation
This brings about positive response to the action that one needs to undertake in order to
achieve these goals.

Negative Motivation
It is being reinforced with fear, anxiety and such negative feelings in order to have tasks
and goals achieved.

Negative and Positive motivational forces could include coercion, desire, fear, influence
is framed, they could be either negative or positive forces that act as actuators. For
instance a fear (negative force) of bodily injury could be a motivation to implement the
use of safety equipment (positive force).

Extrinsic Motivation
Motivation is concerned with the factors that stimulate or inhibit the desire to engage in
behavior. Teachers use extrinsic motivation to stimulate learning or encourage students to
perform in a particular way. It is one of the most powerful motivations. It is operative
when an individual is motivated by an outcome that is external or somehow related to the
activity in which she or he is engaged. In other words, “Extrinsic motivation refers to
rewards that are obtained not from the activity, but as a consequence of the
activity.”(Morris &Maisto, 2002)

This motivation arises from the use of external rewards or bribes such as food, praise,
free time, money or points toward an activity. These incentives are all external, in that
they are separate from the individual and the task.

Example: a child may does chores not because he enjoys them but because doing so
earns an allowance and students who are extrinsically motivated may study hard for a test
in order to obtain a good grade in the course.

Extrinsic motivation refers to motivation that comes from outside an individual. The
motivating factors are external, or outside, rewards such as money or grades. These
rewards provide satisfaction and pleasure that the task itself may not provide.

An extrinsically motivated person will work on a task even they have little interest in it
because of the anticipated satisfaction they will get from some reward. The rewards can
be something as minor as a smiley face to something major like fame or fortune. For
example, an extrinsically motivated person who dislikes math may work hard on a math
equation because he wants the reward for completing it. In the case of a student, the
reward would be a good grade on an assignment or in the class.

xciii
Extrinsic motivation does not mean, however, that a person will not get any pleasure
from working on or completing a task. It just means that the pleasure they anticipate from
some external reward will continue to be a motivator even when the task to be done holds
little or no interest. An extrinsically motivated student, may dislikes an assignment, may
finds it boring, or has no interest in the subject, but the possibility of a good grade will be
enough to keep the student motivated in order for him or her to put forth the effort to do
well on a task.

Intrinsic motivation
The motivation arises from internal factors such as a child’s natural feeling of curiosity,
exigent, confidence and satisfaction when performing a task. People who are involved in a
task because of intrinsic motivation appear to be engaged and even consumed, since they are
motivated by the activity itself and not some goal that is achieved at the end or as a result of
the activity. Intrinsic motivation is the ultimate goal in education at every level.

Example: Children play game for no other reward than the fun they get from the game
itself or students who are intrinsically motivated may study hard for a test because he or
she enjoys the content of the course.

Intrinsic motivation refers to motivation that is driven by an interest or enjoyment in the

task itself, and exists within the individual rather than relying on any external pressure.
Intrinsic motivation has been studied by social and educational psychologists since the
early 1970s. Research has found that it is usually associated with high educational
achievement and enjoyment by students. Explanations of intrinsic motivation has been
given in the context of fritz Hieder’s attribution theory, Bandura’s work on self-
efficiency, and Deci and Ryan’s cognitive evaluation theory.

Students are likely to be intrinsically motivated if they:

 Attribute their educational results to internal factors that they can control (e.g. the
amount of effort they put in),
 Believe they can be effective agents in reaching desires goals (i.e. the results are not
determined by luck),
 Are interested in mastering a topic, rather than just rote-learning to achieve good
grades.

xciv
 3. THEORIES OF MOTIVATION
Different psychological perspectives explain motivation in four different ways. Let us
explore four of these perspectives; behavioural, humanistic, cognitive and social.
The Behavioural Perspective
According to the behaviourist view of learning, when children are rewarded with praise
and a gold star for doing their job correctly, they will look forward to the next
mathematics lesson, anticipating another rewards. At some time in the past, they must
have been rewarded for similar achievements and this experience acts as a motivator for
future learning of a similar type.
For behaviourists, motivation is simply a product of effective contingent reinforcement.
So, they emphasize the use of extrinsic reinforcement to stimulate students’ task
engagement. The reinforcement can take the form of praise, a smile, an early mark or loss
of privileges such as missing out on sport.
“Almost all teachers use extrinsic reinforcement in some form to motivate students,
although they may not realize they are doing so and may not always use such
reinforcement effectively.” (Brody, 1992 in Krause, et. al, 2003)
The Humanistic Perspective
The humanist theory of motivation is interesting because it is not only linked to
achievement and education, but also has implications for students’ welfare and well-
being through its concern with basic needs. It stresses on students’ capacity for personal
growth, freedom to choose their destiny and positive qualities.
There are two theories of motivation from humanistic perspective:
(a) Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs
Maslow (1954) perceived motivation in terms of a hierarchy of needs that can also
conceiveas ‘motives’. According to Maslow’s model, once basic physiological
needs have been satisfied, efforts are directed toward achieving needs associated
with safety, love and belonging, and self-esteem.

xcv
Figure No. 2: Maslow’s hierarchy of needs

xcvi
b) Roger’s motivation theory
Carl Roger’s ideas are also influential in discussing the nature of motivation and its
impact to human lives.

Rogers argued that: Behaviour was influenced by the individual’s perception of

both personal and environmental factors. People should listen to their ‘inner
voices’ or innate capacity to judge what was good for themselves, rather than
relying on feedback from external sources.

The Cognitive Perspective

“According to Santrock (2006) the cognitive perspective on motivation focuses on
students’ thought guide their motivation. It focuses on students’ internal motivation to
achieve, their attribution (perception about the causes of success or failure) and their
beliefs that they can effectively control their environment. It also stresses on the
importance of goal setting, planning and monitoring progress toward a goal.”

(a) Achievement Motivation

John Atkinson and David McClelland described the need for achievement as: “A
stable personality characteristic that drives some individuals to strive for success.
Students who have a high need for achievement are motivated to become
involved in an activity if they believe that they will be successful. They are
moderate risk taker and tend to be attracted to tasks where the chances of success
are fifty-fifty; since there is a good chance they will be successful. They like to
attempt a task, but not if they know there is substantial risk of failure.”

On the other hand, Krause described: “Students who have a need to avoid failure,
rather than a need to achieve success, will look for tasks that are either very easy
and have little risk of failure, or very difficult so that failure is not their fault.”

(b) Weiner Attribution Theory

Attribution theory is concerned with the way in which an individual’s explanations of
success and failure influence that individual’s subsequent motivation and behaviour.
Students may attribute success or failure to different causes, depending on their
beliefs about who or what controls their success or failure.

There are three important elements to note regarding the way in which students
interpret the cause of behavioral outcome. The three important elements are lotus
of control, controllability and stability.

xcvii
 4. APPLICATIONS OF MOTIVATION IN EDUCATION
Motivation is of particular interest to educational psychologists because of the
crucial role it plays in student learning. However, the specific kind of motivation that is
studied in the specialized setting of educations differs qualitatively from the more general
forms of motivation studied by psychologists in other fields.

Motivation in education can have several effects on how students learn and how they
behave towards subject matter. It can:
 Direct behavior towards particular goals
 Lead to increased effort and energy
 Increase initiation of, and persistence in, activities
 Enhance cognitive processing
 Determine what consequences are reinforcing
 Lead to improved performance.

Because students are not always internally motivated, they sometimes need situated
motivation, which is found in environmental conditions that the teachers create.

Implication for Educators

Based on four perspectives discussed earlier, we can apply the theories of motivation in
classrooms to promote students’ motivation to learn and to achieve. There are several
things that teachers should emphasize in order to apply those approaches:

Behavioral Approaches
 Remember that reinforcement to increase desired behavior motivates further
learning of this types.
 Recognize that student motivation is shaped by previous reinforcing experiences.
 Know that students’ maladaptive attribution of success and failure, including
learned helplessness, can be modified.

Cognitive Approaches
 Understand the underlying factors in students’ behavior, studying students’
carefully and using a variety of information sources to discover why students
behave as they do.
 Accept that students are not always motivated to be successful, and that the risk of
attempting to succeed may be overwhelmed by the need to avoid failure.
 Realize that motivating students by focusing on increasing mastery in more
effective than emphasizing performance goals.
 Be aware of their own biases and how these might affect the way they attribute
success and failure in individual students.

xcviii
Social Learning Approaches
 Ensure that students experience success, not just failure.
 Remember that self-evaluation is influenced by observing others’ achievements,
and by encouragement and high arousal in challenging situations.
 Recognize that motivation is affected by learners’ judgments about their own
efficacy.

Humanist Approaches
 Become more concerned with the wider implication of student welfare, not just
with student’s education.
 Be aware that some students are more concerned with feelings of safety, belonging
and self-esteem than with the demands of the school curriculum.
 Understand that students who feel a strong need for group belonging will
experience difficulties and lack motivation to learn if teacher acts in ways that
conflict with group mores.
 Acknowledge that teachers’ own beliefs and values can have a major impact on
students’ motivation.

xcix
 5. STUDENT MOTIVATION
Make it Real
In order to foster intrinsic motivation, try to create learning activities that are based on the
topics that are relevant to your student’s lives. Strategies include using local examples,
teaching with events in the news, using pop culture technology (iPods, cell phones, you
tube videos) to teach, or connecting the subject with your students’ culture, outside
interests or social lives.

Provide Choices
Students can have increased motivation when they feel some sense of autonomy in the
learning process, and that motivation declines when students have no voice in the class
structure. Giving your students options can be as simple as letting them pick their lab
partners or select from alternative assignments, or as complex as “contract teaching”
wherein students can determine their own grading scale, due dates and assignments.

Balance the Challenge

Students perform best when the level of difficulty is slightly above their current level. If
the task is too easy, it promotes boredom and may communicate a message of low
expectations or a sense that the teacher believes the student is not capable of better work.
A task that is too difficult may be seen as unattainable, may undermine self-efficacy, and
may create anxiety. Scaffolding is one instructional technique where the challenge level
is gradually raised as students are capable of more complex tasks.

Seek Role Models

If students can identify with role models they may be more likely to see the relevance in
the subject matter. For example, Weins et al (2003) found that female students were more
likely to cite a positive influence with a teacher as a factor becoming interested in
science. In some cases, you can be a role model but it’s unlikely that you will connect on
that level with everyone in the class due to differences in gender, age and social circles.
However there can be many sources of role models, such as invited guest speakers,
fellow students or other peers.

Use Peer Models

Students can learn by watching a peer succeed at a task. In this context, a peer means
someone who the student identities with, not necessarily any other student. Peers may be
drawn from groups as defined by gender, ethnicity, social circles, interests, achievement
level, clothing, or age.

Establish a Sense of Belonging

People have a fundamental need to feel connected or related to other people. In an
academic environment, research shows that students who feel they ‘belong’ have a higher

c
degree of intrinsic motivation and academic confidence. According to students, their
sense of belonging is fostered by an instructor that demonstrates warmth and openness,
encourages student participation, is enthusiastic, friendly and helpful, and is organized
and prepared for class.

Adopt a Supportive Style

A supportive teaching style that allows for student autonomy can foster increased student
interest, enjoyment, engagement and performance. Supportive teacher behaviors include
listening, giving hints and encouragement, being responsive to student questions and
showing empathy for students.

Example of supportive-style teacher behaviors

 Listening- carefully and fully attended to the student’s speech, as evidenced by verbal
or non-verbal signals of active, contingent, and responsive information processing.
 Asking what students want; such as, “which problem do you want to start with?”
 Allowing students to work in their own way
 Allowing students to talk
 Using explanatory statements as to why a particular course of action might be
useful, such as “How about we try the cube, because it is the easiest one.”
 Using praise as informational feedback, such as “Good Job” and “That’s great.”
 Offering encouragements to boost or sustain the student’s engagement, such as
“almost” “you’re close,” and “you can do it.”
 Offering hints, such as “Laying the map on the table seems to work better than holding
it in your lap” and “It might be easier to work on the bottom of the map first.”
 Being responsive to student-generated questions, such as “yes, you have a good
point” and “yes, right, that was the second one.”
 Communicating with empathic statements to acknowledge the student’s
perspective or experience, such as “yes, this one is difficult” and”I know its sort
hard to tell.”
 Talking
 Holding or monopolizing learning materials
 Giving the solutions or answers before the students had the opportunity to discover
the solution themselves.
 Uttering directive or commands, such as “Do it like this,” “Start this way,” or “Use
pencil.”
 Making statements that the student should, must, has to, got to, or ought to do
something, such as “you should keep doing that” and “you ought to….”
 Asking controlling questions, such as “can you move it like I showed you?” and
“Why don’t you go ahead and show me?”
 Making statements communicating a shortage of time, such as “We only have a
few minutes left.”
 Using praise as contingent reward to show approval of the student or the student’s
compliance with the teacher’s directions, such as “you’re smart” or” you are really
good at playing with blocks.”
 Criticizing the students or the student’s lack of Compliance with the teacher’s
directions, such as “No, no, no, you shouldn’t do that.”

ci
 6. FACTORS INFLUENCING THE DEVELOPMENT
OF STUDENT’S MOTIVATION
According to JereBrophy (1987), motivation to learn is a competence acquired “through
general experience but stimulated most directly through modeling, communication of
expectations, and direct instruction or socialization by significant others (especially
parents and teachers)”.

Children’s home environment shapes the initial constellation of attitudes they develop
toward learning. When parents nurture their children’s natural curiosity about the world
by welcoming their questions, encouraging exploration, and familiarizing them with
resources that can enlarge their world, they are giving their children the message that
learning is worthwhile and frequently fun and satisfying.

When children are raised in a home that nurtures a sense of self-worth, competence,
autonomy, and self-efficacy, they will be more apt to accept the risks inherent in learning.
Conversely, when children do not view themselves as basically competent and able, their
freedom to engage in academically challenging pursuits and capacity to tolerate and cope
with failure are greatly diminished.

Once children start school, they are being forming beliefs about their school-related
successes and failures. The sources to which children attribute their successes (commonly
effort, ability, luck, or level of task difficulty) and failures (often lack of ability or lack of
effort) have important implications for how they approach and cope with learning
situations.

The beliefs teachers themselves have about teaching and learning and the nature of the
expectations they hold for students also exert a powerful influence (Raffini). As Deborah
Stipek (1998) notes, “To a very large degree, students expect to learn if their teachers
expect them to learn”.

School’s wide goals, policies, and procedures also interact with classroom climate and
practices to affirm or alter students’ increasingly complex learning-related attitudes and
beliefs.

Developmental changes comprise one more strand of the motivational web. For
example, although young children tend to maintain high expectations for success
even in the face of repeated failure, older students do not. And although younger
children tend to see effort as uniformly positive, older children view it as a “double -
edged sword” (Ames). To them, failure following high effort appears to carry more
negative implication—especially for their self-concept of ability--than failure that
results from minimal or no effort.

cii
ciii
How to help motivating learners
According to Carol Ames (1990, 1992), there are six areas that can influence students’
motivation to learn:

Task students are asked to do.

The strength of our motivation in a particular situation is determined by our expectation
that we can get success and the value of that success. To understand how an academic
task can affect student’s motivation, we need to analyze them. Tasks can be interesting or
boring for students. And tasks have different value for students.

The autonomy students are allowed in working.

Give students a range of options that set valuable tasks for them, but also allow them to
follow personal interest. The balance must be just right. Too much autonomy is
bewildering and too little is boring.

How students are recognized for their accomplishments.

Students should be recognized for improving on their own personal best, for tackling
difficult tasks, for persistence, and for creativity.

Grouping Practices.
Motivation can greatly influenced by the ways we relate to the other people who are also
involved in accomplishing a particular goal. When the task involves complex learning
and problem skills, cooperation leads to higher achievement than competition, especially
for students with low abilities. The interaction with peers that the students enjoy so much
becomes a part of learning process. The need for belonging described by Maslow is more
likely to be met and motivation is increased.

Evaluation Procedures.
The greater the emphasis on competitive evaluation and grading, the more students will
focus on performance goals rather than mastery. Low-achieving students who have little
hope of either performing well or mastery the task may simply want to get it over with.
How can teachers prevent students from simply focusing on the grade or doing the work
“just to get finished”? The answer is to de-emphasize grades and emphasize learning in
the class. Students need to understand the value of the work or how the information will
be useful in solving problems they want to solve. One way to emphasize learning rather
than grades is to use self-evaluation.

Scheduling of time in the classroom.

Most teachers know that there is too much work and not enough time in the school day.
Even if they become engrossed in a project, students must stop and turn their attention to
another subject when the bell rings or the schedules demands. Furthermore, students must
progress as a group. So, scheduling often interferes with motivation by making students
move faster or slower and interrupting their involvement. Therefore, teacher should be

civ
able to give extended period when everyone, even the teachers engage in activity or to
have some sort of block scheduling in which teachers work in teams to plan larger blocks
of time.

Strategize with Struggling Students

When students are struggling with poor academic performance, low self-efficiency or low
motivation, one strategy that may help is to teach them how to learn. That is, to outline
specific strategies for completing an assignment, note-taking or reviewing for an exam.

Examples of learning strategies

Specific Learning Strategies:
 Pre-action phase (preparing for task)- take a reasonable risk, work toward goals
that are challenging but attainable, work in manageable, bite-size pieces, take
responsibility for your actions, believe In your own effort and capability, set a plan
and work from it.
 Action phase- search the environment, ask questions, visualize it (?)
 Reaction phase (after one task, preparing for the next one) - use feedback from
prior tasks; monitor your own actions, giving yourself instructions.

cv
 7. EXERCISE
Read the statements carefully and encircle the correct option.
1. The word “motivation” refers to the definitions below except:
a. The factors that establish the activities engaged by students.
b. The force that energizes directs and sustains behavior towards a goal.
c. The internal process that activates guides and maintains behavior overtime.
d. The constructs of attention, needs, goals and interests that stimulating
students.’
e. Interest in learning and their intention to engage in activities.

2. For behaviorists, motivation is simply a product of effective contingent

____________. According to Humanistic views of motivation, effective teachers
handle their problem students by:
a. First, building a personal relationship with them
b. Warning them before punishing any infractions of rules.
c. Establishing rules for the class at the beginning of the school year.
d. Trying to understand their need for achievement.

3. Almost all teachers use ______________reinforcement to stimulate students’ task

engagement that take the form of praise, a smile, an early mark or loss of privileges
such as missing out on sport.
a. reinforcement – internal
b. incentive – internal
c. reinforcement – external
d. incentive - external

4. Which of the following are considered to be activities that are intrinsically

motivating?
a. Activities perceived as challenging.
b. Activities in which learners feel like they have a sense of control.
c. Activities in which learners feel like they’re likely to be reinforced
d. Activities that have novel or surprising results.

5. According to Humanistic views of motivation, effective teachers handle their

problem students by:
a. First, building a personal relationship with them
b. Warning them before punishing any infractions of rules.
c. Establishing rules for the class at the beginning of the school year.
d. Trying to understand their need for achievement.

cvi
 8. SELF ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
Q. 1 Define and describe the term motivation.
Q. 2 What are different types of motivation? Discuss in detail.
Q. 3 What are the different factors that influence student motivation?
Q. 4 Write a brief note on the theories of motivation.
Q. 5 Review the key concepts in motivation such as extrinsic and intrinsic motivation
and consider how these apply to you.
Q. 6 Compare the behavioral and humanistic perspectives on motivation.
Q. 7 How can teacher’s expectations affect students’ motivation?
Q. 8 What strategies a teacher can use in the classroom to motivate students?

cvii
 9. REFERENCES
Ames, Carole A.(1990). “Motivation: What Teachers Need to know.” Teachers College
Record 91,3 (Spring 1990): 409-21..
Condry, J., and J. Chambers. (1978). “Intrinsic Motivation and the Process of Learning.In
The Hidden Costs of Reward, edited by M.R. Lepper and D. Greene. 61-84. Hillsdale,
New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Inc.
Eggen, P. &Kauchack, D. 2004. Educational psychology:windows on classrooms. 6th ed.
New Jersey:Pearson.
F. Tuzzolino and B.R. Annandi,(1981). “A need Hierarchy Framework for Assessing
Corporate Social Responsibility,” Academy of Management Review, pp. 21-28.
Krause, K. L., Bochner, S., & Duchesne, S.( 2003). Educational psychology for learning
and teaching. Australia:Thomson.
Lepper, Mark R.(1998) “Motivational Considerations in the Study of Instruction.”
Cognition and Instruction .289-309.
Maehr, Martin L., and Carol Midgley. (1991). “Enhancing Student Motivation: A School
wide Approach.”.
Maslow, A.H. (1960). “A Theory of Human Motivation,” in Robert A. Sutermeister,
people and productivity, New York: McGraw Hill Book Co,. 2nd edition, 1960
Morris, C.G. & Maisto, A.A. 2002.Psychology: An introduction. 11th ed. New Jersey:
Prentice Hall.
Plotnik, R,. 1999. Introduction to psychology. 5th ed. Belmont:Brooks/Cole-Wadsworth.
Santrock, J.W. 2006. Educational psychology: Classroom update: Preparing for
PRAXIS TM and practice. 2nd ed. New York: McGraw Hill.
Stipek, Deborah.(1988) Motivation To Learn: From Theory To Practice. Englewood
Cliffs, New Jersey: Prentice Hall.
Tan O.S., Parsons, R.D., Hinson, S.L., & Sardo-Brown, D. 2003. Educational

psychology: A practitioner-researcher approach. Australia: Thomson.

Woolfolk, A. 2004.Educational psychology. 9th ed. Boston:Pearson.

cviii
 10. WEB REFERENCES

www.googlescholar.com
www.google.com
www.motivation-tools.com
www.motivation-for-dreams.com
www.wikipedia.org
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Motivation
http://www.ehow.com/list_7223299_benefits-extrinsic-motivation_.html#ixzz17og6zjlj

cix
Unit No. 4

INQUIRY METHOD

Written by: Muhammad Tanveer Afzal

Reviewed by: Dr. Qudsia Riffat
cx
 CONTENTS
Introduction------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 95

Objectives-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 96

1. Inductive Method----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 97

2. Deduction Method --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 98

3. Induction and Deduction Methods of Teaching --------------------------------------100

4. Scientific Method ---------------------------------------------------------------------------101

5. The Problem Solving Approach ----------------------------------------------------------105

6. Advantages and Limitation of Inquiry Method -----------------------------------------110

7. Summary ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------111

8. Self Assessment Questions ----------------------------------------------------------------113

9. Suggested Readings-------------------------------------------------------------------------113

10. References ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------114

cxi
 INTRODUCTION

Students have diverse nature of learning environments and also diverse styles of learning.
They come from different backgrounds and have different study habits; moreover the
learning of the individual depends upon the intellectual abilities, attitude and motivation
for the learning. It is teachers’ responsibility to adjust the instruction as per context and
the level of the students’ to enhance the learning by providing appropriate teaching
learning environment. The most important factor is to understand the level of the
students’ abilities and then use the appropriate technique, but the problem is that in our
teaching learning environment we have less recourse and our classes are overcrowded. In
this context the need arise that we should prepare our teachers to combat the situation and
adjust the teaching methods to promote authentic learning.

This course of teaching methods is an attempt to meet the objective that after completing
this course the prospective teachers will be capable to select and apply the appropriate
method to facilitate the learners. This unit of inquiry approach is to empower the
prospective teachers with the knowledge, and skills to use inquiry approach in the
classroom also this will develop more positive attitude towards the use of this approach.
According to Kahn and O’Rourke, (2005) inquiry based learning is student centered
learning and is a paradigm shift from passive to active learning process. Therefore
inquiry based learning can be perceived as broader term that involves:
 Range of teaching learning approaches
 Process of guidance by supportive inquiry
 Active involvement of the learner to foster critical thinking.

In this particular unit we will focus on inductive and deductive methods of teaching,
application of scientific method, and problem solving approach in teaching learning
process.

In Prince and Felder (2006) views the term inquiry learning refers to method of
instruction that imposes questions and problems to provide contexts for learning whereas
deductive instructional process is based on the elaboration of facts and principles with the
help of examples and explanations, and then deducing the results.

This unit includes the scientific method and its application in the teaching learning
process. The unit ends with the insight to the problem based learning. It is based on the
assumption that learning is an active, integrated, and constructive process influenced by
social and contextual factors.

cxii
Apart from this advantages and disadvantages of the inquiry approach are also discussed
in the later part of this unit.

OBJECTIVES

After completion of this unit you will be able to:

1. Use the inductive and deductive methods of teaching in the actual classroom
setting.
2. Use scientific method to enhance learning of their students.
3. Use problem solving approach to leaning for authentic learning of their students.
4. Select appropriate teaching technique as per context and content of the lesson.
5. Develop appropriate AV aids to foster inquiry.
6. Make informed decisions as to when the use of inquiry method will be most
conducive.

cxiii
 1. INDUCTIVE METHOD
In any class students come from different backgrounds and contexts, they have different
capabilities and different styles of learning. This situation demands different teaching
techniques, strategies and methodologies, which teacher adjusts according to the situation and
requirement. There are variety of techniques and methods which teachers use under the
umbrella term inquiry approach. Inquiry is an approach that roots in the Socrates logical
thinking. Teachers often use logic to foster the thinking of their students. During this process
the teachers impose questions to their students after judging the level and ability. If the
student answers the question correctly the question of higher order is asked. On the other
hand if he/she could not the follow up questions are imposed to create the link between the
known and the unknown. There is variety of techniques but many teachers prefer inductive
method according to Prince and Felder (2006) in inductive teaching learning process the
instruction begins with specifics for example a set of observations or experimental data to
interpret, a case study to analyze, or a complex real-world problem to solve. As the students
attempt to analyze the data or scenario or solve the problem, they generate a need for facts,
rules, procedures, and guiding principles, at which point they are either presented with the
needed information or helped to discover it for themselves.

The inductive reasoning method moves from specific to general. These examples will
help us to understand the concept of inductive reasoning. Consider this “Previous car
accidents of this sort were caused by brakes failure, and therefore, this accident was also
caused by brakes failure.” Similarly while doing exercises of mathematics children use
induction method “as previous question was solved by adding the numbers, therefore, this
question may also be solved by same method”, and most of the time it comes true.
Some important aspects of the inductive teaching method are given as below.
1. It gives new knowledge as student are supposed to involve in the process of
knowledge construction.
2. It is a method of discovery, where students discover the fact by their own
involvement.
3. It is a method of teaching; teachers used this by starting from the known facts and
using different inquiry techniques to discover the hidden ones.
4. Child acquires firsthand knowledge and information by actual observation.
5. It is a slow process, as all the steps are interlinked and the students cannot move
forward without the mastery of the previous one.
6. It trains the mind and gives self confidence and initiative to the students after being
exposed to inductive method the students has more positive attitude towards taking
initiatives in their studies.
7. It is full of activity, many activities lead towards the generation of new knowledge.
8. It is an upward process of thought and leads to principles, the students understand
the philosophy behind that principle.

Activity

cxiv
 Select any lesson from the English Textbook of class six and
develop five questions to use in inductive method of teaching.

2. DEDUCTIVE METHOD
In deductive reasoning we argue from the general to a specific instance. The basic idea is
that if something is true of a sample of things/objects in general, this truth applies to all
things/objects of that group. The important point to be considered, then, is to be able to
properly identify things/objects of the sample. Improper selection may result in invalid
conclusions. Application of deductive reasoning may help the teachers in the classroom
and saves time also.

For example, we often say that “Be careful of that wasp: it might sting.” is based on the
logic that wasps have stings; therefore each individual wasp will have a sting. So, it can
be concluded that, we should not examine each and every wasp. Because of the validity
of deductive reasoning, we may make an assumption that is both useful and efficient.
Let’s have another example of deductive reasoning.

Every day, I leave my home for office at, at eight o’clock. Every day, the journey takes
30 minutes, and I arrive at work on time. If I leave my home at eight o’clock today, I will
be on time and not late.

Deductive reasoning works from the more general to the more specific. Sometimes this is
informally called a "top-down" approach. We might begin with thinking up a theory
about our topic of interest. We then narrow that down into more specific hypotheses that
we can test. We narrow down even further when we collect observations to address the
hypotheses. This ultimately leads us to be able to test the hypotheses with specific data --
a confirmation (or not) of our original theories.

Consider this statement “Students must be in either the Committee Room or in the
Library.” They are not in the Library; therefore they must be in the Committee Room.
This is deductive reasoning.

One of the most common and useful forms of deductive reasoning is the syllogism. The
syllogism is a specific form of argument that has three easy steps.
 Every X has the characteristic Y.
 This thing is X.
 Therefore, this thing has the characteristic Y.

This is same like as we say that:

All human beings are mortal; Aslam is a human being, so he is mortal.
At the end some important aspects of deductive method are as under:
1. It does not give any new knowledge, but helps to explore the existing knowledge.

cxv
2. This method is to verify the existing theories and laws and is called a method of
verification.
3. This method helps to impart instructions to the students and considered as valid
method of instruction.
4. During the process of deductive method of instruction students get ready made
information and make use of it.
5. It is quick and time saving process and truth of the conclusion depends upon the
sample selection.
6. It encourages dependence on other sources therefore the accuracy of the sources
used makes the conclusions valid and reliable.
7. There is less scope of activity in it, teachers used the already planned lesson and
not deviate from the plan.
8. It is a downward process of thought and leads to useful results, which are
embedded in the specific environment.

cxvi
3. INDUCTIVE AND DEDUCTIVE METHODS OF TEACHING
Educational institutions are interested in improving the teaching methods and many
researchers’ recommends that teaching methods can either be inductive or deductive
or some combination of the two. We have already discussed the inductive and
deductive methods, now we discuss the use of combination of both methods for
instructional purposes.

According to Marwaha (2009) there are two major parts of the process of learning of a
topic: establishment of formula or principles and application of that formula or those
principles. The former is the work of induction and the latter is the work of deduction.
Therefore, people, “always understand inductively and apply deductively” and a good
and effective teacher is he who understands this slight balance between the two. Thus:
“his teaching should begin with induction and end in deduction.”

It may be concluded that inductive method is an ancestor of deductive method. Deduction

is a process particularly suitable for a final statement and induction is most suitable for
exploration of new fields. Probability in induction is raised to certainty in deduction. The
suitable combination of the two is most appropriate and desirable.

Activity

Dear students: Observe the number of cars and motorcycle

passing from a certain point on the road for one hour and predict
the total number of cars and motorcycle passing from that point
in day, to what extent your guess is valid? Identify the factors
that affect the answer.

cxvii
 4. SCIENTIFIC METHOD
Every problem could be solved through a specific procedure. Scientists have also adopted
some specific procedures and thereby contributed to scientific inventions. The procedure
adopted by the scientists to find out the facts and scientific truths is called 'Scientific
Method'. It is evident that if the scientific method is followed by the teachers and students
in the classroom, the teaching-learning process would be effective.

Better understanding of the scientific method is a common component for increased

awareness towards the knowledge acquisition. However, McPherson (2001) believes that
lack of understanding of the scientific method is more out of control than is commonly
believed, at least in part because many scientists and science educators do not understand
all the components of the scientific method up to the level of application. Different
scientists and researchers enlist different number of steps involved in the process of
scientific method. The steps are explained in this unit with the purpose that students will
be able to apply the method to solve science and social science problems with exercising
command over the procedure.

4.1 Definition of Scientific Method

Many researchers have defined scientific method with slight difference but the main
theme is the rigorous approach adopted to resolve the science and social science
problems.

According to Keyes (2010) definitions of the scientific method can be found in textbooks
in both the social and natural sciences and, while some variations exist, all have certain
common features. Students collected a number of definitions of scientific method from
textbooks in the natural (“hard”) sciences and then were asked to compare these to the
one provided in their sociology textbook.

Some definitions list the steps or process involved while others provide a general
overview of the method.

Consider the following definitions in the light of different disciplines.

In their geology book, Wicander & Monroe as cited in Keyes (2010) defined scientific
method – a logical, orderly approach that involves gathering data, formulating and testing
hypotheses, and proposing theories. McMurry & Fay, (2008) in their chemistry book
defined it as “Scientific method – Scientific questions must be asked, and experiments
must be carried out to find their answers”. In the context of biology “The classic vision of
the scientific method is that observations lead to hypotheses that in turn make
experimentally testable predictions” (Raven, Losos, Mason, Singer, & Johnson, 2008).
In the psychological point of view “The scientific method refers to a set of assumptions,

cxviii
attitudes, and procedures that guide researchers in creating questions to investigate, in
generating evidence, and drawing conclusions” (Hockenbury & Hockenbury, 2000).
Whereas in the context of sociology “The scientific method is an approach to data
collection that relies on two assumptions: (1) Knowledge about the world is acquired
through observation, and (2) the truth of the knowledge is confirmed by verification--that
is, by others making the same observations” (Ferrante, 2008).

From the above definitions of the scientific method we can conclude that: The procedure
adopted by the scientists to find out the facts and scientific truths is called Scientific
Method. The following are the compulsory steps involved in the scientific method. The
elaboration of these steps as:
1. Realizing the problem
2. Defining the problem
3. Analyzing the problem
4. Collecting data / information
5. Analyzing the information
6. Framing hypothesis
7. Verifying the hypothesis
8. Finding the solution
9. Applying the solutions in the life situations.

1. Realizing the problem

The urge to find out the truth for any scientific happening, is the first step which
helps to solve the problem in scientific method. Each and every happening of
nature catches the students’ attention and they wonder about the basic cause and its
effects upon the nature. The students plunge in wonder. While using scientific
method the prime duty of the teacher is to introduce a concept in the form of
problem and motivate the students to find out solutions for the same.

2. Defining the problem

After sensing the problem clearly, it should be defined clearly so that the problem
could be solved. This is the next step in Scientific Method. Only after defining the
problem clearly, it is possible to plan methods and strategies to solve the problem.
Students themselves can find out and write clear definitions using relevant words
with the help of the teacher. Suitable definition can be selected from them.

3. Analyzing the problem

This is the third step in Scientific method which classifies and arranges the problem
and its components. The learner should analyze the problem in parts to find out the
details of each part to understand the actual dimensions of the problem.

4. Collecting data / information

Designing the Methods using available resources and techniques to solve the
problem and collecting data accordingly is the important step in the scientific
method. Data related to the problem can be collected under the following ways:
1. Collection of data through observation

cxix
 2. Collection of data through experiments
3. Collection of data by surveying literature
4. Discussion with experts
5. Analyzing the information
Analysis of Information collected develops the scientific attitude among the
learners. The collecting of information can reveal the uniqueness and the diversity
of the problem and its dimensions. Only on the basis of analysis of information
formulating the hypothesis can be done. The irrelevant data and information can be
discarded by this method. The teacher should support the learner for analysis of
information. By this skills of classification and comparison can be developed
among the learners.

6. Framing hypothesis
Formulation of hypothesis or tentative solutions (Framing hypothesis) is the
important step in the scientific method. Tentative solutions are derived from
analyzing various data on the basis of organizing and grouping the data according
to their similarities and dissimilarities. In this way, many tentative solutions can be
obtained to the given problem. They are called hypotheses. All hypotheses cannot
be the solutions to a problem. One among them will be the suitable solution to the
problem. Students can be encouraged to formulate hypothesis on the basis of
collected data by observation or by experiments.

7. Verifying the hypothesis

Evaluation of hypothesis or verification of hypothesis is essential to find out the
appropriate one which is most likely to be correct. On the basis of hypotheses,
further data collected through the repeated experiments are analyzed and the most
appropriate hypothesis need be selected. The tentative solutions may be discarded
when there is lack of validity and experimental proof.

8. Finding the solution

A hypothesis must be tested in variety of environments and from the results of the
tests and experiments a valid hypothesis is selected. Selected and confirmed
hypothesis is tested again and again. According to its consistency it becomes final
solution to the problem and it can be announced as the result.

9. Applying the solutions in the life situations

The derived results must be generalized. The generalized result can be utilized
whenever the situations happened alike. The learner can apply the same or similar
type of methods for problem solving.

4.2 Role of the Teacher

The scientific method can be used by the learner to understand the objects, activities and
acquire the skills decision making and problem solving. The solutions or results derived

cxx
through this method can be applied to the living environment. In order to apply the
solutions in life solutions the teacher should:
 Arrange a necessary environment to understand the problem.
 Guide the learner to collect the data or information.
 Help in classification and arrangement of data or information in a desired order.
 Formulate the hypothesis and test the same.
 Help to prepare a report on tested hypothesis.
 Give a life situation and enable the student to utilize the solution to find the result.

4.3 Characteristics of Good Teacher

 He / she should be open minded
 Interested in seeking accurate knowledge and searching for the truth
 Objective in nature (analyze all the happenings without any prejudice or bias)
 Not superstitious (free from superstition).
 Solve the problems based on upon the evidence and following scientific method
 Opinion and conclusions would be based on the adequate evidences only.
 Identify the measures to develop scientific attitude among the students.

4.4 Merits of Scientific Method

 Learners always try to solve their problem themselves
 Learning process is independent
 Highly motivated learning by experience is also felt
 Learning by doing enhances the motivation and self confidence in learning.
 Learner solves the problems scientifically and arrive new valid solutions too.
 Learner receives good skills and training from the scientific method
 Learners can develop their skills in data collection and analysis.

4.5 Limitations of Scientific Method:

 Time consuming
 Learners need to work hard for a longer duration
 There will be no facilities available for some problems
 If teacher is not competent in this method entire teaching-learning process will be
collapsed.

Activity

Identify topics for the use of scientific method for any class;
develop a lesson plan by using this method

cxxi
 5. THE PROBLEM SOLVING APPROACH
Basically, Problem Based Learning (PBL) is a comprehensive approach where students
are kept in a challenging situation, whereby they are put to some simple and unstructured
problem, and they are required to find the solution of that problem by working in groups
(normally of 5 each). The role of teacher is minimized as a guide and facilitator only. It
is both a curriculum and a process which increases students’ acquisition of critical
knowledge, problem solving proficiency, self directed learning strategies and team
participation skill (Rattanavich, 2008). Due to its nature this approach is addressed by
many educators under the heading of inquiry methods.

The history of this concept goes back to 1950s and 1960, when it was originated in
Canada in response to dissatisfaction with common practices in medical education there
(Barrows, 1996 as cited in Gijbels, Dochy, Segers, & Bossche, 2005). It was
conceived and adapted at Canada’s medical schools in 1970s for teaching subjects in
Medicine and Natural Science (Rhem, 1998; Ross & Hurlbert, 2004). The case study
teaching technique was adopted at Hamilton, Ontario, McMaster University Medical
School in Canada. The experiment was a great success and other medical schools in USA
and in many other countries also followed this example. They were encouraged and
inspired to take this technique to apply by modifying their syllabuses that should include
real problems faced by the patients (Herreid, 2003). Gijbels et al (2005) present a brief
list of disciplines where PBL has been applied by various researchers as; it has been
applied to the study of architecture, business administration, economics, engineering
studies, geology, law, nursing, social work, psychology and other domains of post-
secondary education.

But the concept has intellectual roots back in far history, like question-and-answer
dialectical approach associated with Socrates as well as the Hegelian thesis-antithesis-
synthesis dialectic. Janet, and Cheryl (2002) mention Plato (360 B.C.E./1960) that
Socrates guided his students through inquiry to answer their own questions, search out
answers to problems, and relate their knowledge to life applications. He also applied
apprenticeship training method where the students worked as apprentices under the
guidance of experts through hands-on problem solving in which knowledge and skills
were taught and practiced as needed. PBL is also similar to John Dewey’s concept of
learning by doing or discovery based of learning with the difference that he talked about
‘engagement’ on abstract level whereas in problem based learning the details can be
carried out easily because of advances in cognitive science and in technology.

cxxii
The classical approach defined PBL as small permanent groups of students working with
a teacher on a new case every three class meetings. On the first day, the group receives a
new case and begins to analyze the preliminary data. With teacher’s assistance, the group
decides on the issues to be addressed and distributes the research workload. When the
students return the next day, they share their analysis, receive additional information, and
continue their search. The third class meeting brings closure to the case when groups pull
together their knowledge and prepare a final report. This classical definition of PBL has
been redefined and modified in various ways for different courses (Herreid, 2003).
Sonmez and Lee (2003) offer a functional definition of PBL more applicable to
secondary education as:

PBL is an instructional approach that challenges students to seek solutions to real world
(open-ended) problems by themselves or in groups, rather than learn primarily through
lectures or textbooks…. PBL engages students in developing skills as self-directed
learners.

5.1 Process of PBL

As mentioned above, Problem-based learning (PBL) is generally applied by organizing
the class into small groups, the teacher being the facilitator provides a number of
comparatively easy problems to the students and guides them how to tackle these. As the
students gain confidence with some experience with PBL, the element of guidance is
lessened (Merrill, 2002). The process can be stream-lined by providing the students with
worked examples in the beginning, at later stages they can be challenged with some less
complex problems and so on, till they reach maturity and could face more realistic
problems (Merrill, 2002, 2007). The following figure shows the process of guidance and
it’s fading in PBL situation:-
Figure 3: Guidance is Progressively Faded

Source: Merrill, M.D. (2002)

Figure above shows that guidance to the students is gradually minimized with the passage
of time and they are made more independent in their learning in PBL. But many
designers of PBL do not agree with Merrill and suggest that the students should be given

cxxiii
realistic problems from the very beginning, however the facilitator should provide them
sufficient scaffolding at earlier stages, gradually it may be faded as the students grow
competent in handling these (Silver, 2006 as cited in Silver, 2009). Silver suggested the
use of white boards to help students scaffolding their problem solving by drawing four
columns- facts columns, the ideas columns, the learning issues column, and action plan
columns-on it to record their progress. The students should discuss the problems, define
them in the light of their prior knowledge, form hypotheses, set their learning goals and
organize further learning. After sorting out the solutions, they may present their findings
to the whole class or larger groups. The students should also reflect on what has been
learnt through the process. Savoie and Hughes cited in Anonymous (2009) wrote about a
process that they used to design a problem-based learning experience for their students.
They describe certain actions for creating such a process like identifying a problem
suitable for the students, connecting the problem with the context of the students' world
so that it presents authentic opportunities, organizing the subject matter around the
problem, not the discipline, giving the students responsibility for defining their learning
experience and planning to solve the problem, encouraging collaboration by creating
learning teams and expecting all students to demonstrate the results of their learning
through a product or performance.

5.2 Procedures of Applying PBL

Peter (2001) presents a very interesting procedure to apply PBL in the class and named it,
"How to make a DENT in a problem: Define, Explore, Narrow, And Test." PBL can only
be applied successfully if it is handled systematically and in some orderly manner. This
orderly procedure can be explained as; First of all, when the problem is presented before
the class, the students should define it precisely and quite carefully covering its various
components and aspects. If it has more than one aspect, these should be stated separately
agreed by all the members of the group. The statements can be spoken aloud to make
them more clear and free of any errors. Second, then comes the next stage whereby the
students discuss the possible answers using their prior knowledge through brainstorming,
each one justifying his own arguments and listening to the others’ and jotting down these
in the form of a list. Various tasks may be assigned within the group to be tackled
accordingly. This is called exploring the possible solutions. The third stage is narrowing
down the choices (or delimitation in research) and selecting appropriate one only as per
requirement of the problem. And, four, the sorted out solutions, and then be tested to
verify the solutions and presenting the outcomes to the whole class. Silver (2009) has
given the procedure of PBL in the form of a cycle as shown below:

cxxiv
Figure No.4: PBL Cycle:

Source: Hmelo-Silver, C, E. (2009, June, 10-12).

The above figure can be explained in these words: First of all the problem is presented
before the students in an unstructured form, who identify facts using their prior
knowledge and by discussing its various aspects at the second step. The third step covers
their efforts to formulate hypotheses regarding the problem. They then endeavor to
identify knowledge gaps between their prior knowledge and the possible solutions/
verification of hypotheses at the fourth step. This leads them to the fifth step where they
engage themselves in self-directed learning and construction of new knowledge and
experiences, so that they can apply this new set of knowledge to solve the target problem
at the sixth step. Finally, evaluation of the acquired knowledge and the solutions are
carried out in social context (it may be done with the whole class or in larger groups).
Though the cycle completes here but it does not stop forthwith and the evaluation results
are again applied for new set of problems that might be presented in the same class or in
the next ones. Since the procedure is a continuous one, the PBL cycle remains a
continuous process, each cycle leading the students to more maturity in this regard.

5.3 The Role of Teachers in PBL

The success of any PBL program depends on teacher’s role and its effectiveness. It
requires changes in the way teachers plan instruction, direct learning, transmit
knowledge, oversee instruction, and assess student achievements (Gordon et al., 2001).
The teachers facilitate the development of projects and act as expert consultants. They

cxxv
ensure that projects create a need for seeking disciplinary knowledge and skill. The
disciplines are taught as a response to a need created by ill-structured problems.

Successful implementation is not easy. It calls for a major change that must occur in the
teacher's perspective. Teachers will need self-knowledge, commitment, determination,
teamwork skills, and considerable understanding of the learning process to make PBL
successful. The lack of training programs, curriculum materials, and rigid scheduling in
the high school environment can create hurdles in successful implementation of PBL.

Having seen the background, goals, processes, and procedures of Problem Based
Learning, its concepts on philosophical basis, its relationship with other similar
techniques, the role teachers are expected to adopt this method as per resources and the
environment or learning context.

Activity

Select any problem for the students of 9th class, Apply DENT
model to solve the problem

cxxvi
6. ADVANTAGES AND LIMITATIONS OF INQUIRY METHOD
There is a certain consensus and also some evidence that inquiry as a pedagogical
approach is a motivating, meaningful and pedagogically rich scenario for the learning.

It brings authenticity to the traditional classroom by involving students in reasoning and

investigative tasks. In addition, inquiry as a teaching and learning approach is related
often with constructivist ideas, thus involving student-centered learning, students’ active
involvement and crucial teacher guidance. The following are the major advantages of the
inquiry approach.
 Be interested and enthusiastic
 Get students talking to each other and learning from the peers
 Promote the use of accurate current information resources as students research their
learning issues
 Establish a good learning environment for the group Students develop skills in:
 Critical and creative thinking
 Communication
 Self-directed learning
 Team-work
 Project management
 Problem-solving and
 Students get to know one another better and make friends

The problem lies with the assessment of inquiry instruction and major problem with
inquiry programs is that valid acceptable measures of the outcomes of inquiry based
learning are hard to find or difficult to interpret. Inquiry learning is also difficult to
quickly access and analyze through testing. Multiple-choice questions, the preferred
mode for standardized testing, are not readily adapted to measuring the process skills
needed for critical thinking. Structured short-answer questions have the ability to measure
problem-solving abilities as well as knowledge recall, but are more time consuming to
develop and score. Time spent in study outside of class is a factor of concern to both
instructors and students alike, it is too much time consuming.

The scope of the inquiry method is limited in terms of contents also the effective
applications of this approach requires motivated and mature students. The teachers also
need to be well competent in planning, designing, conducting and monitoring the inquiry
based learning.

cxxvii
 7. SUMMARY
"Inquiry" is defined as "a seeking for truth, information, or knowledge -- seeking
information by questioning." Individuals carry on the process of inquiry from the time
they are born until they die. This is true even though they might not reflect upon the
process. Infants begin to make sense of the world by inquiring. From birth, babies
observe faces that come near, they grasp objects, they put things in their mouths, and they
turn toward voices. The process of inquiring begins with gathering information and data
through applying the human senses -- seeing, hearing, touching, tasting, and smelling.
Unfortunately, our traditional educational system has worked in a way that discourages
the natural process of inquiry. Students become less prone to ask questions as they move
through the grade levels. In traditional schools, students learn not to ask too many
questions, instead to listen and repeat the expected answers.

Some of the discouragement of our natural inquiry process may come from a lack of
understanding about the deeper nature of inquiry-based learning. Effective inquiry is
more than just asking questions. A complex process is involved when individuals attempt
to convert information and data into useful knowledge. Useful application of inquiry
learning involves several factors: a context for questions, a framework for questions, a
focus for questions, and different levels of questions. Well-designed inquiry learning
produces knowledge formation that can be widely applied.

The inquiry approach is more focused on using and learning content as a means to
develop information-processing and problem-solving skills. The system is more students
centered, with the teacher as a facilitator of learning. There is more emphasis on "how we
come to know" and less on "what we know." Students are more involved in the
construction of knowledge through active involvement. The more interested and engaged
students are by a subject or project, the easier it will be for them to construct in-depth
knowledge of it. Learning becomes almost unproblematic when something fascinates
students and reflects their interests and goals.

Inquiry classrooms are open systems where students are encouraged to search and make
use of resources beyond the classroom and the school. Teachers who use inquiry can use
technology to connect students properly with local and world communities which are rich
sources of learning and learning materials. They replace lesson plans with facilitated
learning plans that account for slight deviations while still keeping an important learning
outcome in focus. They meet on-target questions with, "How do you suggest we
investigate that question?"

Most of our schools focus on teaching a set of basic skills, which do not serve the needs
of modern society. Traditionally, schools stressed the accumulation of information, and
did not emphasize skill development or promote inquiry-based habits of mind. Our
modern society is faster paced, globally networked, technologically oriented, and requires

cxxviii
workers who can problem solve and think critically. Today, much learning, if not most,
occurs after formal schooling. Our schools must change their approach to education to
produce students who can thrive in the modern world.

Inquiry learning can turn information into useful knowledge. It stresses skill development
and nurtures the development of good habits of mind. Information, lacking a useful
context, often has limited applications beyond passing a test. Learning plans and teaching
materials need to include a relevant context for new information to lead to broader
understandings. It is often hard for students to understand the connections between
activities within a particular subject. This confusion is heightened when students struggle
to understand the connections between different subjects within traditional schools.
Questions, whether self-initiated or "owned," are at the heart of inquiry learning. While
questions are also a part of the traditional classroom, the sources, purposes, and levels of
questioning are quite different. In the traditional classroom, the teacher is frequently the
questioner. Questions are usually intended to provoke feedback about a reading or
activity assignment. In an inquiry classroom, the teacher asks questions that are more
open and reflective in nature. Appropriate questioning techniques are important in an
inquiry-based classroom, especially in the lower grades where they become a foundation
for self-initiated questioning.

An inquiry classroom is quite different from a traditional classroom. These differences

become increasingly obvious as the teacher and students become more comfortable and
experienced with inquiry learning. It can often be difficult to locate the teacher in an
inquiry classroom, because she is rarely found in the traditional spot: behind the teacher's
desk. Students also move around the classroom as they interact with others and locate the
appropriate materials and resources for their work.

Ultimately, the importance of inquiry learning is that students learn how to continue
learning. This is something they can take with them throughout life -- beyond parental
help and security, beyond a textbook, beyond the time of a master teacher, beyond school
-- to a time when they will often be alone in their learning.
Within a conceptual framework, inquiry learning and active learner involvement can lead
to important outcomes in the classroom. Students who actively make observations,
collect, analyze, and synthesize information, and draw conclusions are developing useful
problem-solving skills. These skills can be applied to future "need to know" situations
that students will encounter both at school and at work.

Another benefit that inquiry-based learning offers is the development of habits of mind
that can last a lifetime and guide learning and creative thinking.

cxxix
 8. SELF ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

1. Define the term inquiry approach; list the methods that come under the umbrella of
this approach.
2. What is meant by inductive reasoning, provide examples regarding application of
this method in classroom setting?
3. Differentiate between inductive and deductive reasoning, develop a lesson plan
using combination of inductive and deductive methods.
4. Comment the statement “Problem solving Approach is student centered approach
to teaching”.
5. Specify the role of teacher in problem solving learning.

9. SUGGESTED READINGS

Powner, L. C. (2006). Teaching the Scientific Method in the Active Learning Classroom.
University of Michigan. PSOnline www.apsanet.org
McPherson, G. R., (2001). Teaching & Learning the Scientific Method. The American
biology teacher, volume 63, no. 4.
Keyes, G. (2010). Teaching the Scientific Method in the Social Sciences. The Journal of
Effective Teaching, Vol. 10, No. 2, pp. 18-28.

cxxx
 10. REFERENCES
Anonymous. (2009). Learner-centered classrooms, problem-based learning, and the
construction of understanding and meaning by students. Retrieved on 01-03-2012 form
http://www.ncrel.org/sdrs/areas/issues/content/cntareas/science/sc3learn.htm
Ferrante, J. (2008). Sociology: A Global Perspective. Thomonson Learning, Inc.
Gallagher, S. A., Sher, B. T., Stepien, W. J., and Workman, D. (1995). Implementing
problem-based learning in the science classroom. Sch. Sci. Math., 95, 136–146.
Gordon, P., Rogers, A., & Comfort, M. (2001). A taste of problem-based learning
increases achievement of urban minority middle-school students. Educational Horizons,
79(4), 171-175.
Herreid, C.F. (2003). The death of problem-based learning? Journal of College Science
Teaching. 32 (6), 364-366.
Hmelo-Silver, C, E. (2009, June, 10-12). What do we know about problem based
learning? Current status and future prospects. What are we learning about learning: 2nd
International PBL Symposium, 2-19. Singapore: Republic Polytechnic
Kahn, P & O’Rourke, K. (2005) Understanding Enquiry Based Learning. In, Handbook
of Enquiry & Problem Based Learning. Barrett, T., Mac Labhrainn, I., Fallon, H. (Eds).
Galway: CELT
Keyes, G. (2010). Teaching the Scientific Method in the Social Sciences. The Journal of
Effective Teaching, Vol. 10, No. 2, pp. 18-28
Marwaha, P. (2009). Inductive and Deductive Methods of Teaching. Retrieved from
"http://www.articlesbase.com/writing-articles/inductive-and-deductive-methods-of-
teaching-1059831.html" on 18/07/2011
McPherson, G. R., (2001). Teaching & Learning the Scientific Method. The American
biology teacher, volume 63, no. 4.
Merrill, M.D. (2002). A pebble-in-the-pond model for instructional design. Performance
Improvement 41(7),39–44. Retrieved August 21, 2009, from http://www.spi.rg/df/errill.
pdf.]
Norman, G. R. and Schmidt, H. G. (1992). The psychological basis of problem-based
learning: a review of the evidence. Acad. Med., 67(9), 557–565.
Prince, M. J. & Felder, R. M. (2006). Inductive Teaching and Learning Methods:
Definitions, Comparisons, and Research Bases. J. Engr. Education, 95(2), 123–138
Sonmez, D., & Lee, H. (2003). Problem-Based Learning in Science. ERIC Clearing
House for Science, Mathematics, and Environmental Education, Columbus, OH.

cxxxi
Unit No. 5

ACTIVITY METHOD

Written by: Dr. Naveed Sultana

Reviewed by: Dr. Javeed Iqbal

cxxxii
 CONTENTS

Introduction ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------117

Objectives ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------117

1. Nature, Meaning and Need of Activity Method -----------------------------------------118

2. Individual Project ------------------------------------------------------------------------------123

3. Group Projects ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------124

4. Research Projects ------------------------------------------------------------------------------127

5. Activity/Exercise-------------------------------------------------------------------------------129

6. Self Assessment Questions ------------------------------------------------------------------129

7. References ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------130

cxxxiii
 INTRODUCTION

The primary obligation of the teaching profession is to guide children, youth and adults in
the pursuit of knowledge and skills to prepare them in the ways of democracy and to help
them to become happy, useful, self-supporting citizens. For obtaining these goals teachers
have to use different teaching methods and teaching techniques some of the methods are
teacher centered such as lecture method, bookish method while others are student centered,
i.e. problem solving, discussion or activity methods. The main focus of the student centered
methods is to make the teaching learning process more effective, interactive,
communicative and attractive. It is said that the best gift we can give to each succeeding
generation is effective education. This can only be possible if the existing practices
regarding different components of education are renovated from time to time in the light of
new developments and changing requirements. Particularly teacher’s responsibility
becomes more significant as an implementer. So teacher has to practice dynamic methods
and techniques of teaching, as to give “effective education” to the succeeding generation.
For this purpose different experts or educationists suggest that learning is more effective
when a student is actively engaged in the learning process rather than attempting to receive
knowledge. Regarding this most of the methods rely on some form of guided discovery
where the teacher avoids most direct instruction and attempts to lead the student through
questions and activities to discover, discuss, appreciate and verbalize the new knowledge.
So the purpose of this unit is utilitarian, which answers the following questions. How
activity method revolves around the developmental approach of student-cantered methods.
What are the different kinds of projects in the context of activity methods? And what are
the advantages and limitations of activity method?

OBJECTIVES

While focusing above questions following are objectives of this unit:

1. To describe the nature, meaning and need of activity method.
2. To examine the different kinds of activities and their utility in the learning of
students.
3. To explore the advantages of activity method with the contrast of traditional
method.
4. To enlist the limitations of activity method which oppose to frequent use of this
method in teaching learning process.

cxxxiv
cxxxv
1. NATURE MEANING AND NEED OF ACTIVITY METHOD
It is said that children learn best when they are allowed to construct a personal
understanding based on experiencing things and reflecting on those experiences.
According to Confucius:
– What I hear, I forget
– What I see, I remember
– What I do, I know

This saying advocates the activity based learning of the students. Through which schools
have to reshape as activity schools which emphasize the creative aspect of experience.
Now a days it is considered that directed activities focus on reality of learning. For this
purpose all available resources are being used for making the teaching effective.
Activates are meant to provide varied experience to the student to facilitate the
acquisition of knowledge, experience, skills and attitudes. Through these activities,
students are prepared to know well, to do well and to behave well. Overall this method
allows the student working individually or in small groups and develop real-life problem,
simply in this method student’ work independently and with the division of tasks clearly
defined.

What is Activity Method?

Before explaining the activity method, it seems better to answer this question, what is an
activity? Anything which is carried out with a purpose in a social environment involving
physical and mental action. Such activities help in the establishment of stimulating
environment for creative expression.

Types of Activities:

Activities can be of three types:

1. Exploratory – Knowledge getting
2. Constructive – Experience getting
3. Expressional – Presentation

Activities will vary according to the age group of the students. At elementary level of
education pupils may involve in different activities such as listening observing, planning,
collecting, talking, singing, dramatizing, experimenting and constructing. The variety of
activities grows as children progress in elementary programme. This may include,
painting, drawing, designing, wood carving, writing, composing, interviewing, acting,
reading, map-making and graph making, field trips, gardening and camping. It is not
always necessary that activity should only be motor or manipulative. It can also be
mental. Knowledge-getting activities occupy a prominent place.

a) Knowledge – Getting Activities

(i) Here a group of pupils may be asked to make a study of the various sources
of food articles consumed at home by questioning parents, merchants etc; by

cxxxvi
 consulting labels on the foods. The data may be compiled and interpreted by
the group.
(ii) A committee of pupils may undertake to find out in a rural area, how many
families have members who work also in the city or town for a part of the
time. In a city, it may be enquired how many people in the local community
have come from rural areas and why they have come. With the teachers help,
rough estimate of probable experience can be made.

b) Experience – Getting Activities

For selection of activities and giving firsthand knowledge to the students teacher
may arrange some field trips of any area such as industrial or agricultural. But for
arranging the visit of any area, the provision of the available local resources must
be focused, otherwise school will never allow for having this experience. Overall
focused must be laid on no cost field visits.

c) Presentation
A debate can be arranged on the topic “In the opinion of the house, mechanized
agriculture is the only way of economic uplift in the Punjab. Maps showing the
distribution of (1) agriculture crops, (2) major industries, (3) outstanding and localized
cottage industries in the Punjab can be drawn. Charts showing (a) The classification of
industries on the basis of nature of goods produced, (b) flow of raw materials, labour
and power to few major industries can be made. Graphs showing the member of
industrial laborers in the Punjab from 1947 to 2010 etc can be prepared.

Practical and productive work can help in the better understanding of almost every subject.
In geography, it may take the form of drawing maps, making models, illustrations,
organizing excursions, keeping weather records, constructing in appropriate materials
scenes from the life of different region is of the world etc. In history, in addition to the
preparation of suitable illustrations, they may prepare and stage historical plays making the
costumes, the stage effects, fixing the lights etc, themselves or co-operatively study local
history or set up a small history museum and in fact, take up any projects that will bring
history to life, in connection with the study of languages – particularly the mother tongue –
they may undertake to write small booklets on subjects of special interest to them. The
collection of material from relevant sources, its writing, editing, the binding of the booklets
attractively will all form parts of a joyous project. Illustrated charts about great writers may
be prepared-containing their pictures, short notes on their lives and works and brief
appropriate question in prose or poetry from their writings or they may possibly attempt
translations of some easy books and articles in English with the object of providing rich
reading material for their fellow students in the library. Taking in view these three types of
activities, some of the activities are suggested as under:
1. Local survey and excursions.
2. Debates, discussions, dialogues and symposiums.
3. Hobbies
4. Dramatization
5. Clubs and societies

cxxxvii
6. Projects
7. Competitions
8. Re-creational and cultural programmes
9. Social Service squads
10. Students-self Government
11. Camping
12. Writing of community books in games etc.

In modern education, creative activities are occupying a prominent place in the school
programme. Creative experiences and social activities are breaking away from the other
approaches and exploring the new avenues of learning. This emerging pattern for
teaching requires that teachers play a more vital role. The creation of a stimulating
atmosphere for the learner, both in the learning laboratory and in the community is
essential for an experience approach to function. Education for children should be rich
enough to meet all needs in a way that will contribute to society.

Examples of Classroom Activities

Furthermore, in the classroom, students work primarily in group and learning and
knowledge are interactive and dynamic. There is a great focus and emphasis on social
and communication skills, as well as collaboration and exchange of ideas. This is
contrary to the traditional classroom in which students work primarily alone, learning is
achieved through repetition, and the subjects are strictly adhard to and guided by a text
book. Some activities encouraged in the classroom:
 Experimentation: Students individually perform an experiment and then come
together as a class to discuss the results.
 Research Project: Students research a topic and can present their findings to the
class.
 Field Trips: This allows students to put the concepts and ideas discussed in class
in a real-world context.
 Films: These provide visual context and thus bring another sense into learning
experience.
 Classroom Discussions: This technique is used in all of the methods described above. It
is one of the most important distinctions of student centered teaching methods.

Activity method is more applicable in computer assisted teaching and online learning.

Role of Teacher
The teacher occupies very important position in the activity method. While it is really a
sound practice that pupils should involve practically in different learning activities but, in
all this accomplishment, the teacher and has to play a vital role. The teacher has got
mature experience, deeper and broader knowledge than the pupils. For this very reason,
his guidance and prompting is not only desirable but also indispensable. The pupils are
out on a venture; they need suggestions and guidance at every step. The teacher has to
save the pupils from faltering and floundering. So the teacher has skilfully guided in the
selection of activities. The teacher is supposed to give help when help is required. So, let

cxxxviii
the teacher be a good prompter, just behind the curtain and not make his appearance on
the stage itself, for stage is meant and reserved for the actors and actresses, the pupils.

The relations of the teacher to the pupils are to be much closer and informal than it is in
an ordinary classroom teaching. He is there like a friend or elder brother with rich and
mature experience. He is a director and not a dictator. His psychological knowledge must
be thorough and scientific.

The teacher must be a keen observer and a true sympathizer. He should be able to win the
good will of the pupils so that they would not feel discouraged. He should be a
storehouse of information and knowledge so that he may anticipate the difficulties
before-hand and suggest remedies as and when necessary. He should command respect of
the pupils so that the pupils might look to him for help, guidance, support and affection.
No method, however good, is ever superior to its teachers. So the need is for devoted
educational leaders.

The teacher has still another role to play. He has to see that all the pupil’s work co-
operatively. The activity method is based on correlated teaching. This presupposes that
the teacher should have knowledge of many subjects. He has to guide the selection and
execution of the activities in such a way that the maximum number of subjects concerned
is learnt by the pupils; gaps are properly filled. He should see that not only practical
knowledge is to be imparted but complete and integrated knowledge is given.
Experiences and contributions of the group should provide increased knowledge in the
particular context.

Lastly, the teacher should be able to spare enough time for the success of this method.
Only a devoted and enthusiastic teacher can make a success of this method, not the
discouraged, time-serving, bell-watchers.

Overall in the activity based teaching learning classroom, the teacher’s role is to prompt
and facilitate students. Thus, the teacher’s main focus should be on guiding students by
asking questions that will lead them to develop their own conclusions on the subjects.

Benefits of Activity Based Learning Approach

- The learners are actively involved as the environment is democratic.
- The activities are interactive and student-centered.
- The teacher facilitates a process of learning in which students are encouraged to be
responsible and autonomous.
- Children learn on their own pace.
- Provision of more time for self-directed learning and teacher directed learning is
reduced considerably.
- Group learning, mutual learning and self learning are promoted.
- Teachers teaching time is judiciously distributed among children. Only needy
children are addressed by teachers.
- Children participation in every step is ensured in the process of learning.
- Evaluation is inbuilt in the system it is done without the child knowing it.

cxxxix
- Role learning is discouraged and almost no scope for rote learning.
- Periodical absence of child from school is properly addressed.
- Classroom transaction is based on child’s need and interests.
- Freedom to child in learning as he chooses his activity.
- Multigame and multilevel in learning is effectively addressed.
- No child can move to the next higher step of learning unless attains the previous
one.
- Sense of event boosts child’s confidence and morale.
- Attractive cards and activity create interest among children.
- Scope for child’s development in creative and communicative skills.
- Children will have a feel of security as they sit in rounds in the groups.
- Children are allowed to move in the classroom as they choose their activity.
- Moreover the distance between teacher and the child is largely reduced and the
teacher acts as a facilitator rather than teacher.

Limitations of Activity Method

- Careful consideration of emotionalized controls may be overlooked during
classroom activities. Apparently some teachers forget that all classroom activities
contribute directly or indirectly to the formation of attitudes, favorable or
unfavorable.
- Some classroom activities become contradictory with values of and culture of the
students.
- This method is time consuming and does not cover the course/subject matter
timely.
- Our teachers are over burden. So they feel difficulty to plan relevant and
appropriate activities all the time.
- Our classes are overcrowded so there is problem to arrange, organize and manage
classroom activities properly.
- Lack of professional training of teachers affects to plan and process the innovative
classroom activities such as computer based activities.
- Lack of physical, financial and instructional facilities become hurdles in the
application of activity method.

Activity

Select a topic in mathematics which might be used for a unit in a

grade in which you have special interest. Indicate suitable
expressional activities to be included in the unit.

cxl
 2. INDIVIDUAL PROJECT
The individual project is by far the most important single piece of work in activity method. It
provides the opportunity for individual or student to demonstrate independence and originality,
to plan and organize a project for prescribed period, and to put in to practice some of the
techniques to be taught. During individual project student can show his/her individuality and
inspiration in this project. Overall an individual project is an economically indivisible series of
works fulfilling a precise technical function and with clearly identifiable aims. An individual
project may include one or more sub-projects. An individual project generally addresses a single
activity or issue of economic, environmental or social need within any one of the priority sectors
of any programme.
Steps Involved in Individual Project
Following steps are focused during individual project:
1. Project Outline
2. Preliminary Assessment
3. Application / Implementation
4. Appraisal
5. Decision

1. Project Outline
Keeping in view the purpose of given task or activity student will prepare project
outline. This outline comprises on propose targets, resources, methodology and
time schedule.

2. Preliminary Assessment
Before execution of project student will assess the requirements of task or activity
which are prerequisite, for it. For example to analyze the physical, human and
financial resources which are required for the fulfillment of given task.

3. Application/Implementation
On this stage project will be implemented or executed practically for the
accomplishment of given task or assigned activity.

4. Appraisal
At this stage student will organize the appraisal of project through which it will be
analyzed to what extent given task or assigned activity has been achieved.

5. Decision
Finally the success or failure of the task or activity will be determined.
In all steps teacher’s role will be a guide and facilitator to assist the student regarding the
accomplishment of project.

cxli
 3. GROUP PROJECTS
Learning and working in groups involves shared and learned values, resources and ways
of doing things. Effective groups learn to succeed by combining these factors. Your
group, and each individual within it will only be as effective as they are willing to respect
differences within the group. The aim of group work is to produce better (more effective,
more detailed, more comprehensive) presentations reports. This achieved through the
combined talents of group members, contributing knowledge and ideas.

One difficulty with group work is that you can’t work as quickly as you can by yourself.
Patience, communication skills and commitment are all required to make the most of the
contributions of all group members. Thus effective group work requires each member to
focus on the process rather than just the product.

Why Group Project?

Few of us act alone in the real world. Most things are done with the help or ideas of other
people. Group projects are great practice for high school, college, and real life, when you
will probably have a job that requires working with others. Right now, group projects can
be fun and they often allow you to do a bigger, more interesting project than you could
alone. With group work, you can actually learn more in less time.

Group projects also give you a chance to get to know kids you might not otherwise know or talk
with. Group projects are also a way to practice skills you’re not so sure of. For example:
working on a deadline, staying organized, or being patient. And if you’re a little nervous talking
in front of a group, a joint project can help you become more comfortable with it.

Getting Started
One of the most important things about group work is talking and meeting together. It’s a
good idea to continually check with everybody on their progress and to see if anyone
needs help. Here are some other tips for making group work really work.

You might think the first step is figuring out who will do what, but actually it’s getting to
know one another a little. Take a few minutes to chat. Even if you know each other well,
it can help to take a minute to think about your skills and share your strengths and
weaknesses. For instance, you might say, “I ‘am a good artist, if you want me to make the
poster. “Or, “I ‘am not the greatest artist, but I ‘would like to get better at it – would
anyone like to be my partner on the poster?”

The second step is to go over ground rules from your teacher and any that you want to
create together as a group (for example, how the group will help people who are behind
on their work). Will all of your meetings be in class? Do you need to plan time to work
together outside of school?

cxlii
Focusing on Fairness
Figuring out individual jobs within the group is a really important part of the process.
One of the most common pitfalls of group work is that someone may end up doing all the
work if the rest of the team can’t quite get it together.

From the beginning, it’s important to divide the work fairly and evenly. If you feel like
you or another kid is doing too much, gently bring it up with the group. If nothing
changes, you might want to talk with your teacher.

Holding Good Meetings

One key to a good meeting is having a leader, who should help the group to stay focused.
It doesn’t have to be the same person.

Group Projects for School

In fact, it’s better if it’s not. It’s a good idea to talk about how the work is going, and if anyone
needs help. What if you’re not the leader? Important roles to play during a meeting include:
 The starter makes suggestions and offers ideas.
 The asker asks members to share information or ideas on a topic.
 The peacemaker looks at opposing views and finds something useful in each of
them, helping people work out differences.

And try not to play any of these negative roles:

 The non-participant does not contribute and/or discourages the others.
 “Captain Critical” responds to other people’s ideas with criticism.
 The dominator interrupts and talks more than listens.
 The clown distracts the group and keeps it from focusing on the work.

More on Group Projects

 Interaction with the Group is based upon mutual respect and encouragement.
 Often creativity is vague
Ideas are important to the success of the project, not personalities.
A group’s strength lies in its ability to develop ideas individuals bring.

 Conflict can be an extension of Creativity

The group should be aware of this eventuality. Resolution on conflict balances the
end goals with mutual respect. In other a group project is a cooperative, rather than
a competitive, learning experience.

The two major objectives of a group project are:

 What is learned: factual material as well as the process
 What is produced: written paper, presentation, and/or media project

cxliii
Role of instructors/teachers/professors:
 Out comes depend on the clarity of the objective (s) given by teachers.
The group’s challenge is to interpret these objectives, and then determine how to meet them.
 Group work is only as effective as teachers or instructors manage and guide the process.
 Group projects promote the cooperative and collaborative attitude among the students.
 Students must be aware of, and should be prepared for this group process.
 Cooperative group projects should be structured so that no individual can coast on
the efforts of his/her team-mates.

Scoring:
 Rewards ideally should be intrinsic to the process, with group members deriving
their reward from their contributions to the group and project.
 External reinforcement (Grades, etc) for individuals can be based upon improvement, as
opposed to comparative, scoring. Traditional, comparative scoring works to the detriment
of teams with low-achieving members. Evaluation based upon improvement rewards the
group for an individual’s progress. Peer, comparative evaluations can have a negative
effect on teams: low scoring members are considered “undesirable” and drag upon
performance.
High achievers versus low achievers
We assume high achievers mentor or teach low achievers.
In the process of teaching others, we can learn more about the topic.
As we tutor, even simple questions from the tutee make us look at our subject matter
freshly. As we explain, we gain a deeper understanding of the topic. Low achievers then
tutor or teach high achievers!
 High achievers profit in cooperative learning in other ways:
Leadership skills, self-esteem gains, conflict resolution skills, and role-talking
abilities which become part of the learning process, and betterment of the student.

cxliv
 4. RESEARCH PROJECTS
Generally, a research is a quest for knowledge through experimentation, investigation and
thorough search. It is aimed at discovery and interpretation of new knowledge or at
resolving debatable existing knowledge. There are systematic procedures and methods
for explorations, targeted at obtaining new knowledge. The starting point of a research is
to think of a good idea. Your research is good as your idea.

Before starting any long term or complicated task, it is wise that we make a rough plan or
a map which will guide us throughout the course of the job. In the same way, before the
commencement of our research, we need to devote time and think logically on the area of
our research and how we are going to about it.

Typically, a research project revolves around following three questions.

(i) What do you plan to accomplish?
(ii) Why do you want to do it?
(iii) How are you going to do it?

Types & kinds of research projects

Research projects can be broadly categorized into the following types:
a) Academic Research Projects
– Social research project
– Scientific research project

b) Commercial Research Projects

– Sales Project
– Grant Project
– Business Project
– Funding Project
– Marketing Research Project

c) Basic Steps in the research process

Selection of the problem
A researcher may be concerned with conditions or relationships that exists,
practices that prevail , beliefs, points of view or attitudes that are held, processes
that are going on, effects that are being felt or trends that are developing, and may
select the problem accordingly from the area or field in which he is interested.

Statement of the problem

The researcher must state the problem clearly as it is done in case of other types
of research. The statement must identify the variables involved in the study. It
should specify clearly whether the study is merely seeking to determine the

cxlv
present status of these variables or whether it will also explore relationships between the
variables.
Identification of data
After stating and defining the problem, the next step for the researcher is to list the data to
be collected for the study. He has to specify whether the data are of qualitative or a
quantitative nature and whether the data will be collected in the form of counts, test
scores, responses to questionnaires, interviews, and so on.

Selection or Development of Tools

The nature of the data to be collected helps the researcher to select the appropriate tools
for the study. If the readymade tools are not available, the researcher has to develop his
own tools. Questionnaires, interviews, psychological tests, rating scales, schedules and
attitudes scales are the most frequently used tools for descriptive research. If the
researcher uses readymade tools, he should satisfy himself about their reliability, validity,
and suitability for sample chosen for the study. If the researcher develops his own tools,
he should try them out with a small group in order to evaluate them and make
modifications if necessary.

Selection of the Sample

The researcher must select the sample about which he wishes to seek information using
appropriate sampling techniques. The sample selected should adequately represent the
population.

Collection of Data
The researcher should specify the practical schedule for gathering the data from the
sample selected for the study with the help of appropriate tools.

Analysis and Interpretation of Data

The data collected is quantified in the form of counts, test scores, responses the
questionnaires, etc. These are analyzed and interpreted with the help of appropriate
parametric or non-parametric statistical tests.

Writing of the Research Report

It is the last stage in the research and the researcher should exercise extreme caution in
generalizing conclusions and reporting them with all the limitations of the study. For
writing the research report university approved format will be focused which is followed
by APA style.

cxlvi
 5. ACTIVITY/EXERCISE

Discuss with IV grade teachers about the problems faced by them during the teaching.
And design a outline for research project on one of the most common problem of primary
school teachers.

6. SELF ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

1. What is an activity? Discuss the importance of activity method. Name the different
types of activities you would use in English.
2. List some of social activities and illustrate their importance for promoting the
social skills among students.
3. Why should both individual and group projects be considered by a teacher?
Illustrative the function and importance of each.
4. Summarize the main points bearing on the role of research project. What does your
answer suggest regarding the problems faced by researchers in Pakistan?
5. Elaborate the teacher role in activity method. Also highlight the problems faced by
our teacher for using activity method in classroom.

cxlvii
 7. REFERENCES
Bain, Ken. (2004). What Best College Teachers do Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Benson, Jarlah. (2000) Working more creatively with groups. London: Rutledge.
Cottrell, S (1999). The Study Skills Hand Book, Palgrave, Besingstoke.
Individual Projects: The EEA Financial Mechanism and the Norwegian Financial
Mechanism, 2004-2009.
Kirschner, P.A; Sweller, S. and Clark, R.E. (2006). Why Minimal Guidance during
Instruction does not work: an analysis of the failure of constructivist, discovery, problem-
based, experiential, and inquiry-based teaching”. Educational Psychologist 41 (2): 75-86.
Kochar, S.K. (1988) Methods and Techniques of Teaching. Sterling Publishers private
Limited, Delhi.
Mayer, R. (2004). Should there be a Three Strikes Rule Against Pure Discovery Learning?
The Cases for Guided Methods of Instruction”. American Psychologist 59(1). 14-19.
Risk. T.M. (1979). Principles and Practices of Teaching in Secondary Schools. Eurasia
Publishing House. New Delhi.
Walker, Metal. (2008). “A Bright Spark: Open Teaching of Science Using Faraday’s
Lectures on Candles”. Journal of Chemical Education 85 (1): 59-63.
Westegaard, Jane (2009) Effective Group Work young people. Maiden head: Open
University Press.
Yalom, I.D. and Lescz (2005). The Theory and Practice of Group Psychotherapy 5e. New
York: Basic Books.
Zander, Alvin (1985). The Purposes of Groups and Organizations. Sam Francisco:
Jossey-Bass.

cxlviii
Unit No. 6

DISCUSSION METHOD

Written by: Naila Naseer

Reviewed by: Dr. Amt ul Hfeez

cxlix
 CONTENTS
Introduction ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------133

Objectives-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------134

1. Classroom Discussion ----------------------------------------------------------------------135

2. Planning the Discussion--------------------------------------------------------------------149

3. Organizing the Discussion-----------------------------------------------------------------154

4. Practicing in Asking Questions -----------------------------------------------------------159

5. Practicing in Answering Questions ------------------------------------------------------164

6. Assessing the Discussion ------------------------------------------------------------------165

7. Rules for Discussion ------------------------------------------------------------------------166

8. Advantages and Disadvantages of Discussion Method ----------------------------167

9. Guidelines for Maximum Utilization ----------------------------------------------------168

10. Exercise ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------170

11. Self Assessment Questions ----------------------------------------------------------------170

12. References ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------171

cl
 INTRODUCTION

Most of the time human beings are in one way or other interacting with each other. They
are discussing on different ideas. Discussion is simply exchange of ideas and opinions. In
classroom settings, teachers use different teaching methodologies. Discussion method is
of great worth. What teachers are doing when they engage in classroom discussion is
quite different from what is typically considered discussion. The modern theoretical and
pedagogical developments in instruction have fostered effective classroom discussion a
crucial teaching skill. The purpose of classroom discussion is to enable the teacher to pull
the content dictated by the curriculum out of the class by imposing a limited discussion-
like format.

The discussion method employs two-way communication and open-dialogue technique

between the teacher and the learner. The method starts with a discussion between teacher
and learner; and among the learners. Verbal and non-verbal feedback from teacher is the
key element in this method, which permits the learner to determine if the desired learning
outcomes have achieved. If not, the learner may be directed to work more and present the
information again, but in a different manner.

Discussion method is vital not only for students as well as teachers. From the learners’
side, it gives them a chance to express their views clearly, to rationalize judgments, and
to endure different visions. It not only allows active engagement of students but also
stimulates thinking about key learning points. It changes and develops learners’ attitudes
by providing understanding and insights into new ideas. It also offers students’ an
opportunity to request for explanation; to observe their own thoughts; to appraise ideas;
and to create their own perspectives. Many students may be afraid or feel shyness to
discuss in class, but open dialog gives superb learning experience. Students who have
different opinion from teacher should move and describe it. To participate in classroom
discussion, students have to follow certain steps. First step is to follow what everyone is
saying. Second step is to write down the important points during discussion. Third step
requires students to feel free to ask questions, and also make an effort to give answers of
the questions because it enhances learning by giving clarification of the material. Next
step motivates students to make an effort to summarize important points during
discussion. Restating the idea is another strategy to start talking and to strengthen the
statement and to provide clarification of the discussed idea.

cli
Classroom discussions occur on different basis. Perhaps teacher wants to arrange a
discussion to launch a fresh idea or project. May be discussion is needed to critique on a
sample essay etc. Whatever the condition, teacher should take care of his/her role, as well
as the goals of teaching learning process. Taken together, these provide a starting point to
give shape to classroom discussions. Classroom discussion is fruitful if it is planned well.
When preparing a discussion, a teacher has to consider his/her every day goals and should
know the expected outcomes from the students after discussion. A teacher should also
know whether the planned discussion will add to the overall goal for the lesson or not.

OBJECTIVES

After studying the unit, it is hoped that you will be able to:
1. Explain the structure of classroom discussion.
2. Discuss characteristics and different types of classroom discussion.
3. Understand the procedure of planning an effective classroom discussion.
4. Develop rules to organize classroom discussion.
5. Discuss rationale and different types of questions in classroom discussion.
6. Evaluate the tips for asking and answering questions during classroom discussion.
7. Identify advantages and disadvantages of discussion method.
8. Specify the rules for improvement of classroom discussion.

clii
 1. CLASSROOM DISCUSSION

Discussion is an expression and exchange of verbal or written ideas based to achieve

certain objectives and goals. Classroom discussion is an important teaching strategy
because of its relation to the development of participatory citizenship, critical thinking,
and classroom community. Class discussion facilitates learners to observe, assess and
share knowledge about specific subject matter. It also gives a feeling for students to sight
from multiple angles, to make fresh thoughts, ideas, and improve their communication
and expression talents (Larson and Keiper, 2000).

There are several definitions of classroom discussion. The Dictionary of Education as

cited in Jones et al (1994, p.1) describes discussion as:

"An activity in which people talk together in order to share information

about a topic or problem or to seek possible available evidence or a
solution. It is used more and more in student-centered learning venues as
a means of engaging students in the “active” construction of learning
through collaboration and the exchange of perspectives”.

The above definition highlights that discussion method promotes student-centered

learning by creating active learning environments. Nystrand, Gamoran, Kachur, and
Prendergast (1996, p.16) state that high quality discussion occurs when every student is
an active participant.

“By discussion we mean turn-taking among students and teachers which

departs from the normal structure of classroom discourse and does not
obligate students to wait for teacher's evaluation before responding
themselves to another student's response, and where their teacher, rather
than evaluating a student's response, joins in and becomes a conversant”.

They discussed that important ingredient of classroom discussion is dialogue, the

exchange and expression of ideas, and transmission of knowledge between students and
teacher. Discussion might take place in a variety of ways from structured and planned
activity to unplanned opportunity to exchange ideas and thoughts. Peter (2008, p.127)
states discussion method as:

“Discussion is an excellent way of developing thinking skills and higher-

order learning. Discussions are important when exploring opinions,
beliefs and attitudes and encouraging learners to appreciate other points
of view”.

cliii
He has extended the concept of classroom discussion in the above definition and
highlighted that it promotes higher order thinking skills. Moreover, classroom discussion
serves several learning objectives because it is not only an exclusive classroom talk but
also a very particular group dynamic. It involves teachers and students to talk backward
and forward at a lofty affective and cognitive levels to discuss on the subject matter being
taught. Dillon (1994) stated that during discussion, teacher and students talk about an
issue, some topic which is in question for them. Their talk results in variety of opinions
and proposals over the issue.

Larson and Keiper (2000, p2.) have conceived discussion as an effective teaching
strategy to foster active participation of learners.

“Discussion is thought to be a useful teaching technique for developing

higher order thinking skills that enable students to interpret, analyze, and
manipulate information. Students explain their ideas and thoughts, rather
than merely recount, or recite, memorized facts and details. During
discussion learners are not passive recipients of information that is
transmitted from a teacher. Rather, learners are active participants.
Discussion, when combined with probing, open-ended questions,
requires students to organize available information for the purpose of
arriving at their own defensible answers.”

They have highlighted that discussion method enhances students’ vision and motivates
them for learning. Moreover the above definition reveals the importance of questions to
make classroom discussion an effective instructional strategy.

1.1 Structure of Classroom Discussion

Marilla and Svinicki (2011, Pp.133-134) have elaborated the structure of classroom
discussion. The discussion class is necessarily a tiny crowd trying to complete an assignment.
As such, the class can perform its tasks more effectively if each student in the group is
conscious of the different types of activities and responsibilities he/she can perform to make
discussion smoother. Every individual has his own specific style of acting in classroom
discussion. Some students prefer to lead, some students work to keep the group focused on
the discussion task, and some act to keep the group from taking itself too seriously. Here are
some different tasks students usually perform in discussion group:

1.1.1 Task Functions

These functions are related to the completion of a given discussion topic. Students
usually act in the following manners:
1. Information and opinion giver: Offers facts, opinions, ideas, suggestions, and
relevant information to help group discussion.
2. Information and opinion seeker: Asks for facts, opinions, ideas, suggestions, and
relevant information to help group discussion.
3. Starter: Proposes goals and tasks to initiate action within the group.

cliv
4. Direction giver: Develops plans on how to proceed and focuses attention on the
task to be done.
5. Summarizer: Pulls together related ideas or suggestions and restates and
summarizes main point discussed.
6. Coordinator: Shows relationships among various ideas by pulling them together
and harmonizes activities of various subgroups and members.
7. Diagnoser: Figures out sources of difficulties the group has in working effectively
and the blocks to progress in accomplishing the group’s goals.
8. Energizer: Stimulates a higher quality of work from the group.
9. Reality tester: Examines the practicality and workability of ideas, evaluates
alternative solutions, and applies them to real situations to see how they will work.
10. Evaluator: Compares group decisions and accomplishments with group standards
and goals.

1.1.2 Social Functions

These functions are related to the interpersonal and intrapersonal communication,
negotiation and socialization process. These tasks are done in the following manner:
1. Encourager of participation: Warmly encourages everyone to participate, gives
recognition for contributions, demonstrates acceptance and openness to ideas of
others, is friendly and responsive to group members.
2. Harmonizer and compromiser: Persuades members to analyze constructively their
differences in opinion, searches for common elements in conflicts, and tries to
reconcile differences.
3. Tension reliever: Eases tensions and increases the enjoyment of group members by
joking, suggesting breaks, and proposing fun approaches to group work.
4. Communication helper: Shows good communication skills and makes sure that
each member understands what other members are saying.
5. Evaluator of emotional climate: Asks members how they feel about the way in
which the group is working and how they feel about each other, and shares own
feelings about both.
6. Process observer: Watches the process by which the group is working and uses the
observations to help examine group effectiveness.
7. Standard setter: Expresses group standards and goals to make members aware of
the direction of the work and the progress being made toward the goal, and to get
open acceptance of the groups' norms and procedures.
8. Active listener: Listens and serves as an interested audience for other members, is
receptive to others’ ideas, and goes along with the group when not in disagreement.
9. Trust builder: Accepts and supports openness of other group members, which
reinforces risk taking and encourages individuality.
10. Interpersonal problem solver: Promotes open discussion of conflicts between
group members in order to resolve conflicts and increase group togetherness.

Tkfinley (2011) has suggested different ways to create classroom discussion where
students enjoy more freedom and safety to express them. These are as followings:

clv
1. Classroom arrangement: Chairs and desks arranged in a circle is a preferred
classroom arrangement for a discussion group. Students do not feel comfort in
sitting in rows because it covers too much space and classroom looks confined.
With a circle, the room will also feel less cluttered and students are likely to have
more conversations because they can see each other's faces.
2. Respect of opinions: Teacher should establish rules before generating classroom
discussion. An environment where every one’s ideas are given respect is highly
appreciated.
3. Tackle the opinions: Teacher should tackle the wrong answers very carefully.
Students with wrong answers should not be openly disagreed in front of the class. It
may create unrest and fear among students of giving wrong answers. If a student
gives an incorrect answer or doesn't understand the material, he/she may be asked
questions to get him to reconsider. These questions can also be directed at the
group. This process of asking questions will help him to rethink his position, help
other students who are confused and give their peers the opportunity to answer
correctly.
4. Memorization of students’ names: It is important for a teacher to motivate students
to learn each other’s names. The first few days of class, if students have learnt their
names and shared something interesting among the class, it would give them an
opportunity to develop some rapport for onward classroom discussions. Teacher
can play his role to help students to memorize their names by playing a game
where students try to match names with personal information. When students are
given permission to speak, call names. Identifying everyone by name will make the
class more personable.
5. Grouping: grouping is another important thing to create a smooth discussion. Small
groups are more preferable. In these smaller groups, each student may be given a
mini-assignment. Now everyone in the small group has a responsibility and
something to share. This encourages students who are shy or less comfortable with
speaking in front of larger groups.
6. Students’ involvement: Keep students involved in the discussion. Some students are
very open and feel comfortable to share their opinions but some students are very
shy to share their views with others. Teacher should ask follow-up questions to
encourage students to get involved.
7. Flexible schedule: flexible class schedule is also very important. Local, national,
and international events can grab students' attention. Take some time to discuss
these events. It will show to students that they are being valued what they're
thinking about.

clvi
 Activity No. 1
Fill in the blanks with suitable words:
1. Discussion is a/an ___________ and exchange of verbal or written ideas.
2. An important ingredient in classroom discussion is ___________
3. The discussion class is necessarily a ____________ crowd trying to complete an
assignment.
4. In discussion group, the functions of students related to interpersonal and
intrapersonal communication are called _____________ functions.
5. Chairs and desks arranged in a ________ is preferred in classroom arrangement.

clvii
1.2 Characteristics of the Discussion Method
Cooper and Simonds (1995, p. 256) have highlighted some characteristics of discussion
method:

1. Experiential Learning
Students learn best when they are actively involved in the learning process. Using
the discussion method, a student’s concrete, personal experiences are followed by
observation, reflection, and analysis of these experiences. This process leads to
formulation of abstract concepts and generalizations, which, in turn, leads to
hypotheses to be discussed and tested in future experiences.

2. Emphasis on Students
Students’ experiences serve as the basis for the discussion. Although the teacher
must have a specific goal in mind and a general framework for reaching the goal,
student input determines the specific direction the discussion takes. In this way
students’ feel that they are given worth and value.

3. Focus on Critical Thinking

Discussion method develops and enhances students’ critical thinking skills.
Developing critical thinking skills involves consideration of three areas:
instructional design, a focus on learning by doing, and strategic teaching. There are
three phases of developing critical thinking among students. These include
identification phase; focusing phase; and application phase.
 Identification phase
It includes identification of students’ existing ideas. This could be done
through a series of questions or a diagnostic test.
 Focusing Phase
Once students’ existing ideas have been identified, students and the teacher
focus on the students’ initial ideas. This could be done through an activity or
situation that challenges the students’ initial ideas. Teacher can use “What
if…” questions to stimulate students’ thinking about the consequences of the
criteria used.
 Application Phase
In this phase, students have the opportunity to practice using the new
material in a variety of contexts. At this point in the critique unit, students
could view videotaped speeches, critique them, and then discuss their
critiques. This phase requires strategic teaching. “Strategic Teaching” calls
attention to the role of the teacher as a strategist, making decisions about the
what, when, and how of teaching and learning:
What: decisions involve the material of instruction which includes the
content, skills, and strategies.
When: decisions involve the conditions under which it is appropriate to apply
a given strategy or skills and about teaching students this information.

clviii
 How: refers to making decisions about the particular procedures needed to
implement a given strategy or skills about teaching those procedures to
students.

In the application phase, the teacher plays an important role and he is considered
“The strategic teacher”. A strategic teacher is a model and mediator who
demonstrates how to think through a given task, how to apply the strategies, and
“what to do when you don’t know what to do”. Intercedes between the students and
the learning environment to help students learn and grow. Anticipates problems in
learning and plans solutions to solve them. Guides and coaches students through
the initial phases of learning to independent learning.

4. Use of Questions
Discussion method encourages use of questions. Questioning technique stimulates
students’ active participation and critical thinking skills. Varied question levels i.e.
probe, rephrase, prompt, wait for student responses, ask process questions (“How
did you get that answer?”) not only enhance students’ understanding of meaning
but also promote critical thinking.

Activity No. 2
Read article 6.3.2 and give short answers to the following questions:
1. Enlist salient characteristics of discussion method.
2. Discuss application phase of students’ critical thinking.
3. Explain importance of use of questions in classroom discussion.

1.3 Types of Classroom Discussion

There are different types of classroom discussion which can be effectively used by the
teacher. Kinne (2000) has suggested the following types of classroom discussion:

1.3.1 Small Groups

Small groups have fewer than 20 members, making it easier for people to actively
participate. They meet as small gatherings or as break-outs of large meetings and offer
many opportunities for creative, flexible interchange of ideas and lively, meaningful
participation. Small group discussion in usually preferred for classroom discussion. Size
will depend on time and the sensitivity or complexity of the subject. In most cases each
group selects a reporter to summarize its discussion. Haugen (1998) has given some
suggestions for small group discussion:
1. Make a safe place. Students don’t contribute to a discussion if they are afraid that
they will be ridiculed for what they say.
2. Small group discussion is useful when there are clear learning objectives. Teacher
should have clear objectives for the discussions and communicate them clearly. It's
helpful for the teachers and students if the objectives are stated in "action" terms.
Useful objectives relate to what students should know, understand, be able to
apply, or use effectively. The memorization of a list of facts or dates is not in itself

clix
 a very useful objective but being able to identify how current events both resemble
and differ from an historic event, for example, would be a workable objective.
3. Teacher should formulate and communicate his/her expectations of the students.
Will they be graded on participation? So, there should be clear expectations for
what is expected from the students and how they will be tested. Students also need
to understand what they will have to know, how well they need to know it, and
how they will have to demonstrate what they know.
4. Avoid yes/no questions. Ask "why" or "how" questions that lead to discussion and
when students give only short answers, ask them to elaborate. Also, avoid
questions that have only one answer.
5. Don't fear silence. This may be the most difficult thing to do but it's absolutely
essential. When small group discussion is facilitated, teacher tends to feel that a
lack of response within one or two beats is stretching into an eternity. But even if
teacher has posed a very interesting question or situation, the students will need
some time to think and formulate a response.
6. When possible, set up the room for discussion. A circle works best, especially if the
group can sit around a table. If it’s difficult to re-arrange the furniture; then teacher
should move around the room, sit among the students; become a discussion
participant rather than a teacher.
7. Get to know the students' names and who they are. Students are more likely to be
engaged with the group if addressed by name rather than by being pointed at. If a
teacher knows the interests, majors, experiences, etc. of the students, it becomes
much easier to think of ways to involve them.
8. Participants should be provided positive feedback. Feedback can be a good means
of getting through a lull in the discussion also. A recap of what has been discussed
so far helps to reinforce main points, and often stimulates further discussion.
9. Show enthusiasm for the subject. Students can’t become interested in a discussion
topic for which the instructor shows no enthusiasm. If teacher is interested in the
subject, then it will help him to discover what students think and feel about it.
10. Teach students how to participate. Many of them may have had little or no
experience with small group discussion, and most of those who have experience
have never been taught how to do it well. Teacher could prepare a handout for his
students or assign a project that involves their preparing information for the rest of
the group about small-group communications.
11. Ease students into discussion. One tactic is to arrive at the classroom early and
engage the first students to arrive in "chit chat" about the weather, a recent sports
event, something in the news, etc. The point is to get students comfortable and
talking so that to make them at ease into the subject for the day. This will also help
teacher to establish the idea that discussion is a natural process, not cruel and
inhuman punishment, or something with which they have no experience.
12. Teacher should also clarify his role as a discussion facilitator. If a teacher is
uncomfortable, his students will also be uncomfortable.
13. Provide opportunities for students to talk to each other in smaller, unsupervised
groups so that they get to know each other and become comfortable with sharing

clx
 ideas. Instructor can do this with small "break-out" groups which are assigned a
specific task about which they will report to the larger group. Students can also be
assigned group projects, encouraged to form small study groups, or have the class
form interest groups which are responsible for contributing something related to
their particular interest periodically. The point is to encourage interaction that is not
under the watchful eye of the instructor and helps students to become comfortable
with each other.
14. Manage both process and content. This is often rather difficult at first but becomes
much easier with practice. Good discussion is as much about process as it is about
content and if teacher concentrates on one but neglects the other, he is likely to
have problems. To a great extent, teacher will need to take his cues from the
students. While instructor is part of the discussion, he has the added responsibility
of monitoring it as well.
15. Listen, learn, and adapt. There is no single prescription for all groups. Much like
individual people, groups have individual characters and teacher will need to adapt
his style to them as much as is comfortable for him. If instructor can be open to
those differences, they will become part of what makes teaching an interesting
challenge year after year after year.

1.3.2 Buzz Groups

In buzz group every member of a larger group is directly involved in a discussion
process. Participants discuss in pairs for a limited period. This method is especially
effective for articulating ideas in preparation for a general discussion or to give
expression to personal response to a film, presentation, or experience. After talking in
pairs, couples might be asked to combine in groups of four and compare their opinions.
(Lesmeister, 2011).

In buzz groups the learners are divided into small groups, usually two or three. These
small groups meet for a short period to consider a simple question or problem. The ideas,
thus exchanged, may then be presented to the other participants by each of the small
groups in turn, so promoting further discussion. Buzz groups are devised to enable every
person in a group to seek advice from other members of a group, to produce fresh ideas
on a topic and to resolve a clashes within a group. There is a discussion leader who poses
a simple question or problem. This is discussed by the small groups for a limited period
(up to three minutes) without any time for preparation or reflection. A representative of
each small group then reports briefly to the other participants. This method is equally
effective for small and large groups. For small groups, it can be used to consult all the
members of a group on a precise question. It can be applied to settle a conflict between
members of a group. Or it can be used to produce fresh ideas on a topic or a problem. In
all these cases, it can be used within a group which is already discussing a topic, or is
about to discuss a topic. On the other hand, it can be used with a much larger group at the
beginning, or during a talk. In such a case, the participants simply turn to face one
another, making small groups of two or three people, without too much disturbance, or
rearrangement of the chairs. After the discussion, they turn to face the speaker and report

clxi
their findings. It is worth noting that a similar method (known in French as 'Six Six')
involves larger groups of up to six people, discussing a topic for up to six minutes (hence
the title). This can also be used at the beginning of, or during a talk (The Scout
Association, 1999).

Lesmeister (2011) has given the role of facilitator in buzz group. He has indicated that
the facilitator should split the large group into smaller groups (3-5). Then he should
present a problem or pose a question for the brainstorming of the groups. Every group
should be given 5-10 minutes. To discuss simple topics, each group should be given 5
minutes, and 10 minutes for difficult or complex topics. Afterwards, each group should
be encouraged to report (1-2) key thoughts from their discussion.

1.3.3 Talking Circle / Word Wheels

The whole class is divided into two groups; these groups sit together in one circle;
one group sits in a circle facing outward and the other facing inward so that each
person faces someone else. The participants of these groups then share their views
on a given problem/topic. The facilitator sets a time for discussion session and
then asks questions from everyone on the inside to move one seat to the right and
discuss with the new person sitting opposite. This process continues until each
person has changed views with several others (Kinne, 2000).

1.3.4 Talking Tickets

Talking tickets provide every student an equal opportunity to speak. Each participant is
given three talking tickets, each representing a certain amount of "air time." Once
someone has used all her or his tickets, that person has no further opportunities to speak.
This technique not only encourages students for critical thinking, time management and
confidence, but also gives every student an equal opportunity to speak. Whole class is
involved in discussion and more talkative and less talkative students are given equal
chances to speak (Kinne, 2000).

1.3.5 Think-Pair-Share
This technique was introduced in 1981 by Professor Frank Lyman. This strategy is based
on the idea of co-operative learning and peer interaction. It is considered as a foundation
stone for the development of cooperative classroom with a basic purpose to develop
thinking skills, increase information and develop communication skills among students.
The core of this method is ‘wait or think’ time, which improves students’ responses to
questions. It is an effective and simple strategy, useful from early childhood through all
consequent stages of education. It has a very flexible structure, which has been utilized in
variety of ways for various learning purposes. It helps students to share information,
develops effective listening ability, questioning skills, summarizing others’ ideas,
reinforces positive interdependence, enhances individual accountability, promotes equal
participation, increases simultaneous interaction and develops paraphrasing ability. There
are four steps in think-pair-share technique:

clxii
 Problem: Teacher asks students an open-ended question or poses a problem to
which there may be a variety of answers.
 Think: Students are given ‘think time’ and are directed by the teacher to think
about the problem or question.
 Pair: Students utilize the ‘think time’ and turn their faces to their learning partner
and work together to share ideas, discuss, clarify, challenge and arrive at possible
solutions.
 Share: The pair then shares their ideas with another pair, or with the whole class. It
is important that students need to be able to share their partner’s ideas as well as
their own (Ledlow, 2001).

The above discussion indicates that in the think-pair-share technique, participants have
time to write or simply think on their own about a critical question; they then link with
one other person to discuss and then bring their reflections to the entire group.

1.3.6 Write Around

In this method, the discussion is carried out in written form. It is also called silent
discussion. Teacher poses a key question and asks students to write a response at the top
of a page. Each paper is then passed to the person on the right, who reads the first
statement and responds to it by writing something below. This process is repeated until
three or four people have had an opportunity to respond. Then students pass the papers
back to the left so that everyone can see what has been written on the pages. Because the
facilitator does not see what participants write, this method can enable them to express
views they might desire to keep from the facilitator (Kinne, 2000).

1.3.7 Guided Discussion Method

Guided discussion method helps the instructor to query the student on a certain topic to
assess the knowledge and learning of student that what the student knows, and what he
does not know. In this method, teacher “draws out” information and encourages students’
questions. There are different types of questions in guided discussion method:
1. Overhead/How/Why: This category of questions is directed to the whole group.
2. Rhetorical: Rhetorical questions prompt group thought and thinking.
3. Direct: direct questions are asked of a particular student.
4. Reverse: In response to a question, another question is asked.
5. Relay: Relay the question to the group if asked by a student.

An effective question is that which is suitable for the subject, contains an objective,
organizes main and subordinate points logically, and guides students in their preparation.
Guided discussion is effective when it is planned and followed by a logical sequence.
Below is the structure of guided discussion:
 Objectives: Before starting guided discussion, the instructor should have clear
objectives.
 Introduction: The instructor should introduce the discussion simply by posing a
question or telling of a story to help get the discussion off the ground.

clxiii
 Discussion: The instructor should try to keep students focused on topic. It
demands attention from the instructor and continual evaluation of students’
knowledge.
 Summary: Before moving to the next section, the instructor should summarize
previous section.
 Conclusion: Review and recap is indispensable in guided discussion to have an
idea what was covered in the discussion. This will help the student grasp the
“larger picture.” The instructor should clarify any questions (Kinne, 2000).

It indicates that the guided discussion method has a clear meaning and is designed for
specific purpose to stimulate thought of students by relating new information with
previous knowledge.

1.3.8 Reflective Discussion Method

Weeks (2011) highlighted that in reflective discussion method, the teacher generates a
structuring device or key question. The students are provided with a series of points by
the teacher which they have to bring up during the discussion. Students are then
encouraged to prepare potential questions around those points. The teacher uses
questioning technique to encourage students to deeply investigate the topic. It may be a
topic which allows students to defend their own values; however, they should be
observed so that the values of other students will not be threatened. In addition, the
teacher should refrain from allowing his/her values to dominate the discussion. The
teacher also shares the control and direction of the lesson with the students. This fosters
student to student interaction. For the conclusion, the teacher re-asks the main question
and lets students respond by summarizing their opinion as an answer to the question. The
students then defend their opinion with reasons and information obtained from the
discussion, as well as with their prior knowledge of the subject. A teacher summary and
reiteration of the lesson's significance concludes the discussion.

Example
1. Teacher presents the structuring question, for example the teacher may ask; “What
measures should we adopt to overcome poverty in Pakistan”.
2. The teacher allows the students to answer the question together. The students are
allowed to question one another, ask for clarification and justification as necessary,
in order to challenge each other to be precise and accurate with suggestions they
introduce.
3. The teacher's role becomes one of facilitator. He/she asks clarification and
justification questions, encourages all to participate, and points out their
contradictions in logic as the students interact.
4. In conclusion, the teacher gets students to respond to the main question, and the
discussion concludes with a statement of what was learned and why the discussion
is useful and important to them (Kinne, 2000).

Green (2000) has also suggested following types of discussion:

clxiv
1.3.9 Turn to Your Neighbor
This is used when there are easy answers to questions and teacher wants quick response.
It contains simple structure in which a question is asked; students turn to a classmate
sitting next to them to discuss their answer. Usually, students are given 30 seconds to
discuss an answer.

1.3.10 Round Robin

This technique is useful when students are divided into groups (3-5 students per group).
Teacher poses a question and students quickly go around in the circle and share their
answers. This technique is also useful to elicit quick responses from pupils. Students are
allowed to offer answers until teacher tell them to stop. Students are also given one
opportunity to pass on answering. At the end, group members share their ideas with the
class. Teacher can randomly call on individuals to share and allow the others in the group
to clarify what was said.

1.3.11 Line-Ups
In this technique, students are lined up to some standard, such as height, weight,
birthdays or alphabetical order. The teacher poses a question. At this point, the line is
folded in a way that the member at the ends move together to form two lines facing each
other. Students then discuss with the person in front of them. Teacher can then have
volunteers share with the entire class or students can be randomly called. This technique
fosters great discussions by allowing students to move out of their seats and to talk with a
diversity of students.

1.3.12 Value Lines

This technique requires the longest to carry out. It is used when teacher wants pupils to
acquire a stance on a problem. When teacher posits a questions or an issue, then students
stand on one side or the other of an imaginary line. One side of the line is for those who
agree with the statement, and the other side is for those who disagree with it. Then
students on the either side of the line turn to each other and discuss why they agreed or
disagreed with the statement. Then each pair turns to another pair across the line and
discusses their agreement and disagreement. Students can be randomly called to share
what they heard from individuals with different opinions from theirs. This technique also
allows students to move out of their seats and expose a variety of different opinions. In
this technique, monitoring of students is a challenging task for teacher.

1.3.13 Jigsaw
In this technique, material or work is divided among each member of the group. Every
individual has a portion of the required task and no one has everything that is needed to
complete the task. Teacher usually uses this method to divide an assignment so that each
group member takes a part. Students share their information within the group members.
Group members need each other to obtain the full experience.

clxv
1.3.14 Sharing Limited Resources
Sharing limited resources is another way to create positive interdependence. Giving one
paper/book/quiz/poster/markers/assignment/ to a group helps draw group members
together to complete an assignment. Limiting resources is important not only in light of
budget constraints but is also the best way to increase the chances that cooperation will
occur within the group.

1.3.15 Question and Answer Pairs

Teacher seats the class in circle and divides students into question and answer pairs. These
pairs ask and answer questions on assigned reading or as a great review activity before a
test. These pairs are assigned numbers 1 and 2. The "1’s" are told that they will not be
moving. The "2’s" are told that they will be moving throughout the activity. Teacher then
asks questions and students in 1s and 2s pair up, and sort out the best answer for the
question. Teacher needs to check the amount of time before the "2’s" are told to move to
their left, and meet the next 1. They then answer the next question on the review sheet. This
continues as the 2’s circle around the room until they are back at their own original seat.
Students should be encouraged to place a check/asterisk by any questions that they are sure
of. Those that they do not feel confident on, they can revisit on their own studies. The
students receive the benefit of being able to talk to each other one on one.

1.3.16 Advanced Preparation Pairs

Students are to write a short analysis paper summarizing the vents/relevancy/opinion of
an assigned reading for class. Students bring copies of the paper to the class. The
members of their base group or discussion pair will listen to the team member read the
paper, then edit, and evaluate the paper. Criteria for review can be predetermined by
instructor, class, or peer group. Each group can select the "outstanding" paper as they
deem it, then in large group it can be discussed as to why it stood out from the others.

Above discussed different types of classroom discussion not only provide an opportunity
for the teacher to improve teaching learning process, but also motivate students to
develop critical thinking skills and develop interest in learning.

Activity No.3
Identify below statements as true/false (T/F):
1. Small groups have more than 20 members. T F
2. In buzz groups, only the group leader is involved in T F
discussion.
3. Discussion method in which class is divided into two groups T F
which sits together in one circle is called Talking
circle/Word Wheels.
4. In Talking Tickets, every student is provided three talking T F
tickets.

clxvi
5. In 1981, Professor Frank Lyman introduced Write Around T F
technique.
6. The method in which discussion is carried out in written T F
form is called Write Around method.
7. Reverse questions are asked in Guided discussion method. T F
8. Teacher generates a structuring device or key questions in T F
Round Robin technique.
9. In Jigsaw method, material is divided among each member T F
of the group.
10. In Advanced Preparation Pairs method, teacher seats the class in T F
circles and divides students into question and answer pairs

clxvii
 2. PLANNING THE DISCUSSION
There are two misconceptions about planning a discussion. First misconception is that
most of the teachers think planning a discussion does not require much effort; second
misconception is that discussion cannot really be planned because of its spontaneous
nature. Both ideas are wrong. Effective classroom discussion requires much effort and
proper planning before conducting discussion. Beforehand planning by the teacher leads
fruitful discussion. Kern (2006, p.127) has suggested following principles for planning a
classroom discussion:
1. Determine the goals of discussion.
2. Assess prior knowledge and experiences of students.
3. Assess and build your background knowledge on the topic.
4. Provide a supportive environment for discussion.
5. Offer your viewpoint, when necessary, to build knowledge or correct
misinformation.
6. Allow for alternative viewpoints to agree or disagree.
7. Plan meaningful connections between the discussion, over the content, and real-life
experience.

Arends (2004, Pp 431-437) has also suggested following steps for planning effective
classroom discussion:
 Consider Purpose
“Deciding that discussion is appropriate for a given lesson is the first planning step.
Preparing the lessons and making decisions about what type of discussion to hold
and specific strategies to employ are of great importance.

 Consider Students
Knowing about students’ prior knowledge is just as important in planning
discussion as it is in planning other kinds of lessons. Experienced teachers know
that they must also take into consideration their students’ communication and
discussion skills. They consider for instance, how particular students in the class
will respond differently to various kinds of questions; they predict how some will
want to talk all the time whereas others will be reluctant to say anything. When
planning discussions, it is important to devise ways to encourage participation by
as many students as possible, not just the bright ones, and to be prepared with
questions and ideas that will sparkle the interest of a diverse student group.

 Choose an Approach

clxviii
 There are several different kinds of discussions, and the approach chosen should
reflect the teacher’s purposes and the nature of the students’ involved. There are
three most common approaches.
Recitations: Although recitation is often overused, it nonetheless has its place. One important
use is when teachers ask students to listen to or read information on a particular topic.
Recitation can cover variety of topics. Teachers generally ask students to read or listen with a
definite purpose in mind. Sometimes it is to glean important information about a topic,
whereas at the other times it is to become familiar with a particular author, a specific type of
literature, or a point of view or particular interpretation. Brief question-and-answer session
(recitation discussions) about assigned reading materials or a lecture can provide teachers
with a means of checking student understanding. They also motivate students to complete
their reading assignments or listen carefully when the teacher is talking.

Inquiry or Problem-Based Discussion: Discussions are sometimes used to engage

students in higher-order thinking and, thereby, to encourage their own intellectual
investigation. Normally, such discussion is part of some type of problem-based teaching.
Although a number of specific approaches have been developed, they all have a common
syntax in which the teacher opens the lesson by presenting students with what Suchman
(1962) labeled as discrepant event what Palinscar and Brown (1989) called mystery spots.
Both refer to puzzling situations that are not immediately explainable, such as water
appearing to run uphill, metal changing shape when heated, and social data that confront
conventional wisdom. Because these situations are puzzling to students and create
cognitive dissonance, they provide a natural motivation to think. When using this
approach, teachers encourage students to ask questions, to generate empirical data, and to
formulate theories and hypotheses to explain the puzzling situation. In this type of
discussion, teacher helps students to become conscious of their own reasoning processes
and teach them to monitor and evaluate their own learning strategies.

Sharing-Based Discussion: Often teachers hold discussion for the purpose of helping
students develop their sharing of meaning from common experiences or to confront one
another with differences of opinions. Younger children may be asked to talk about what
they learned from their visit to the zoo or the apple farm. Older students may be asked
about what they have learned from a science experiment they performed or from a novel
they read. Important current events are often discussed in the classrooms so that different
point of view may be explored. Unlike recitations, during which teachers ask students to
recall specific information, sharing-based discussions help students to form and express
thoughts and opinions independently. Through dialogue about shared experiences and
what these experiences mean, ideas are refined or expanded and questions are raised for
future study.

 Make a Plan

clxix
A lesson plan for a discussion consists of a set of objectives and a content outline.
The plan should include not only the targeted content but also a well-conceived
focus statement, the description of a puzzling event, and / or a list of questions. If
the discussion is to follow a lecture, it is likely that the teacher already has the
content firmly in mind and has explored the important conceptual relationships.
When the discussion follows assigned readings, experienced teachers know that
they must have extensive notes not only about specific facts but, more important,
about the main ideas, and point of view.

Sometimes a teacher finds using the conceptual web technique a useful planning
device. A web provides a visual image of the characteristics and relationships
around a central idea. To make a conceptual web, a teacher identifies the key ideas
associated with a particular topic and arranges them in some logical pattern.
Teachers will find that careful attention to preparation will help immensely as they
strive to keep details straight for students and as they facilitate students
understanding and higher-order thinking. For some types of discussions, asking
students questions become a key feature. In preparing their questioning strategy,
teachers need to consider both the cognitive level of questions and their level of
difficulty.

During the past three decades, many systems have been developed for classifying the
cognitive level of teacher questions. Most of the classification systems are similar but
all consider questions in terms of the cognitive processing they require of students.
Teachers can also use Bloom’s Revised Taxonomy of Educational Objectives, to
design questions for classroom discussions. These include six categories of questions
i.e. Remember, Understand, Apply, Analyze, Evaluate, and Create. Questions in the
“remember” and “understand categories require students to recall information (facts,
events, principles) that they have learned and to explain what it means. “Apply” and
“Analyze questions require more of students and ask them to focus on the “why” of
some situation and / or apply particular kinds of knowledge. These questions are
sometimes called convergent questions because they ask students to focus on a
single, best answer or conclusion and to explain known relationships. “Evaluate” and
“create” questions, on the other hand, require students to make judgments based on
criteria or answer “what if” questions. These are called divergent questions.
Divergent questions allow multiple answers, conclusions, and creativity on the part
of students.

In preparing the lesson plan and questioning strategies, teacher should remember to
think through the issues associated with question difficulty. Experience helps
teachers to know their students and to devise questions of appropriate difficulty.
Decisions about question type and difficulty can be better made during the quiet of
advanced planning than during discussion itself.

clxx
 Use Physical Space Appropriately
Another planning task involves making arrangements for appropriate use of
physical space. The best seating arrangements for discussion are the U-shape and
circle formations illustrated in the figures 6.1 and 6.2. Both seating patterns allow
students to see each other, an important condition for verbal interaction. Both can
be accommodated in most classrooms. Each, however, has some advantages and
disadvantages that should be considered.

Teacher Teacher

Figure 5 U-shaped seating Arrangement Figure 6 circle seating

Arrangement

The U-shape seating arrangement, with the teacher situated in front at the open end of the
U, gives a bit more authority to the teacher, an important feature when working with
groups of students who lack discussion skills or where behavior management is a
problem. The U-shape also allows freedom of movement of teachers. They have ready
access to the chalkboard or flip charts, which may be important during the course of a
discussion, and they can move into the U to make closer contact with particular students
when necessary. The disadvantage of the U is that it establishes some emotional distance
between the teacher, as discussion leader, and students. It also puts considerable physical
distance between students who are sitting at the head of the U and those sitting at the end.

clxxi
The circle seating pattern, on the other hand, minimizes both emotional and physical
distance among participants and maximizes opportunities for students to talk freely with
one another. The disadvantage of the circle is that it inhibits the teacher from moving
freely to the chalkboard or among students.

Most elementary and secondary schools today have furniture and other features that make
movement from one seating arrangement to another possible. In some instances,
however, teachers will be confronted with situations that severely limit this possibility.
For example, some science laboratories have fixed tables that make moving tables
impossible. This situation requires special problem solving on the part of teachers. Some
experienced teachers have students stand in a U-shape during discussion sessions; some
elementary teachers have their students sit on the floor. The specifics of the classroom
space and the teacher’s own personal preferences certainly are strong considerations
when making planning decisions about the use of space prior to discussion”.

Activity No. 4
 If you are given a task to arrange classroom discussion for 5th
class, how will you plan your discussion? Make a chart of your
plan by following the guidelines mentioned in the unit.
 Find someone you don’t know, introduce yourself, and share
your ideas about the benefits of classroom discussion.

clxxii
 3. ORGANIZING THE DISCUSSION
For a successful classroom discussion, teacher needs to organize it in a way to foster on
students’ active involvement and interaction. It also requires rules that support mutual
respect and open exchange. Eglin and Connor (2011) have suggested some rules to
organize an effective classroom discussion:

1. Teacher as a Facilitator:
Depending on the type of discussion, role of teacher will also vary. The role teacher
assumes will form his/her facilitation plan as well. The teacher should follow the
following steps:
 Creating Classroom Community:
Teacher should decide what type of classroom community he is willing to
create. Would he like to conduct a discussion in which participation from all
students is mandatory? Is there any objection if three or four talkative
students dominate discussions? Would he like discussion in which students
sit in circles or rows? Mostly it depends on the nature of the class. If there is
a quiet class, then participation of all students is obligatory then letting two or
three students to participate and answer every question. The decisions teacher
make about classroom community reflects his/her style and needs of students.
 Accommodate Multiple Learning Styles:
There are various learning styles. When building classroom community,
teacher should think about different ways in which students’ learn. Some
learners can retain information for longer period, while others require visuals
to strengthen concepts. Some learners learn better through lectures, while
others like learning by doing. During discussion, class teacher should try
different approaches and see how well students respond.
 Remain Objective: Focus on Student Contributions:
During discussion, teacher should stay objective on thematic problems. If
learners pick up teacher’s ideas, they might only participate with what they
“think” teacher desires to listen. This blocks critical thinking and hinders
them to express their own ideas. Also, if teacher shares too many views,
students may disprove these in class. This places teacher in a situation to
defend his opinions. That’s why teacher should encourage students to come
up with their own ideas.
 Be Honest: Criticize Constructively:
Students' comments should be honestly validated. Teacher should provide
constructive criticism when students give incorrect answers. Although it isn’t
an easy job, but criticism should not be embarrassing and awful. There are
careful approaches to be honest while still rewarding a student for
participating in the discussion. When a student gets off track teacher could
ask him tactful comments and questions to explain his answer or make
corrections in his response.

clxxiii
2. Stay on Track
In spite of of the type of discussion, one of the teacher’s most imperative
facilitation targets is to keep it on track. Its teacher’s skill how he keeps students’
focused. It largely depends upon a teacher’s personal teaching style because there
is no single way that is suitable for every student. It depends on teacher’s efficiency
how he structure’s classroom community. If student‐centered environment is
created, it requires considerable contribution to make discussion creative and
productive. There are some suggestions to help teacher to start thinking about ways
to keep classroom discussions on track:
 Plan “Goal‐Oriented” Discussions
Before starting a discussion, teacher must have a goal and to determine what
is expected to achieve. The plan should be goal‐oriented because it will help
teacher to keep students on track when they start drifting astray. It will also
assist teacher to focus on the attention of students when they start to go
off‐topic.
 Ask “Goal‐Oriented” Questions
Teacher should kick-start discussion with such questions which are designed
to focus students’ attention on the pre-planned objectives. Discussion
initiated with goal‐oriented questions will move students in a specific
direction. Before starting discussion, it is preferable if objectives are written
down on board. Objectives written on board will help teacher and students to
not veer off-topic and focus attention on the topic being discussed.
 Avoid Being Derailed
Unrelated questions bump teacher off target. Teacher should not tackle off
course issues during discussion. Students who raise concerns and questions
that threaten to disrupt the discussion; should be asked to meet with teacher
after the class. Dealing with off‐topic matters during class can cause lesson
plans and objectives to suffer, if not go unmet altogether.
 Deal Irrelevant Questions and Comments
Questions and comments directly related to the discussion topic should be
solicited. Undue attention to the irrelevant comments wastes time. Students
who ask irrelevant questions interject concentration. Teacher should take
instant steps to stay on track.
 Refocus Attention: Write to Learn
When a discussion twists into an intense debate, or jumps so far off target and
students start to lose their attention from the topic, teacher should refocus their
attention by assigning them Writing‐to‐Learn (W.T.L.) activity. In this activity,
students take out a sheet of paper and write down their personal views on
whatever has gotten everybody off target. In this way, teacher can redirect
students’ attention back to the original discussion thread.

3. Thinking on Your Feet

clxxiv
 Thinking on your feet can be the most challenging part to organize a discussion. In
this step, teacher deals with variety of activities which are going on all at once. He
is reflecting what is accomplished and what is left to accomplish. He is also dealing
with students’ queries, concerns, views and ideas at the same time. Here are a few
tips to help teacher to improve this step:
 Be Well Prepared
Teacher should be well prepared. Discussion topics, introduction of these
topics, transition activities, and conclusions should be planned in advance.
Discussion questions should also be prepared ahead of time to keep students
focused on the topic. Examples to demonstrate or clarify a new concept
should be ready before time.
 Learn to Stall
If teacher doesn’t hear the questions, or think that he was unable to hear the
question properly, or doesn’t have an answer fight there on the tip of the
tongue, then he should have the ability to stall and take thinking time. For
instance, teacher should ask for the question to be rephrased or repeated. This
will give teacher a few minutes in which to consider the question further, and
to shape the response.
 Be Honest
If teacher don’t know answer, the perfect way is to say that he didn’t know.
Because being a breathing living human being; no one knows all the answers.
Students usually know when teacher don’t have an answer. Rather than giving
wrong answer, teacher should explain them clearly that he is unsure. But teacher
should follow up with a promise that he will look in to it and get back to them as
early as feasible. Then it should be done. Honesty is rarely disregarded, because
students appreciate the courteousness teacher shows them.
 Don’t Fear the Silence: Respect and Use It
Get comfortable in the presence of silence. Teacher should give at least
fifteen seconds to give himself time before responding to the questions.
Students usually respect once they’ve seen that teacher has taken the time to
consider their question carefully before responding. Similarly, when teacher
asks a question, students should also be given some time to think. If students
cannot understand question and take too much time to think then teacher
should rephrase the question.

4. Gauging Comprehension
For a teacher, it’s imperative to understand how well students are grabbing main
concepts and ideas. Here are some suggestions for getting the feedback teacher
needs to gauge whether they are “getting it” or not and what they are missing.
 Avoid Yes or No Questions
Students’ critical thinking should be enhanced. Teacher should shun posing
yes or no questions. To help students comprehend key ideas and concepts,
pointed questions should be asked because these entail students to utilize
their previous knowledge. Open‐ended questions may also be asked because
these require some critical thinking.

clxxv
  Summarizing and Paraphrasing
After teacher has clarified an imperative idea or a complex set of instructions,
then students should be asked to give their own reflection by paraphrasing or
summarizing it in their own words. Whenever appropriate, students should be
asked to include examples. If teacher likes to determine the amount of all
students' knowledge, they should be asked to write their summaries or they
might be given a homework assignment.
 Using Quizzes
To gauge the comprehension of students, teacher should give short quizzes on
important concepts or ideas covered either in class or in an assigned reading.

5. Suggestions to Organize Classroom Discussion

Svinicki (2010) elaborated that for effective classroom discussion, teacher must
have goal to encourage students’ participation. When the students are actively
involved in manipulating ideas and information, they have a much greater chance
of learning them and remembering them. He has also given some suggestions to
organize effective classroom discussion:
 Give the students a chance to be prepared for discussion
Students should be encouraged for discussion only for those topics on which they
have been briefed well in advance of the class period. Discussion will be more
effective if students are provided with reading materials, thought questions and
objectives of the topic under discussion. This practice enables students to be more
at ease about what will go on during discussion.
 Give yourself plenty of preparation time before class
Teacher should take time to analyze what the main objectives for the class period
are. If a list of questions is prepared in advance, then it will be helpful during class
to decide what to say next. Such advance preparation will also let teacher to cover
all the levels of questioning appropriate to the instructional goals.

 Ask questions at a variety of taxonomic levels during class

Teacher should be well prepared in asking questions according to a variety of
taxonomic levels during class. A list of questions prepared before the discussion
should contain questions regarding knowledge, comprehension, application,
analysis, synthesis, and evaluation. This will make it easier for students to respond
to the questions and contribute in discussion.

 Provide encouragement and praise for correct answers

Teacher should use varied response styles for correct answers. A word of praise or
a restatement of the student’s answer or an elaboration of it can encourage other
students to participate. Students should also be encouraged to ask questions from
each other and from teacher.

 Occasionally the use of a blind quiz will help to encourage class review
In this process teacher gives a short quiz at the start of the period. Students are
asked to answer the questions but forbade writing their names on the papers. These

clxxvi
 “blind” quizzes are jumbled and passed out again to serve as a basis for discussion.
Since the student is giving someone else’s answer during the period, he or she will
be more likely to answer because the situation is less frightening. Also, such
quizzes provide the students an idea of how well they know what’s going on in the
material without it disturbing their grades.

 Maintain a warm, outgoing, friendly atmosphere in class

Teacher should not be defensive or feel threatened by the students. Rather he
should be more confident, friendly and warm, because he is the role model in front
of the students and they will follow the behavior showed by the teacher. Teacher
should learn the students’ names and some background by having them fill out a
3x5 card on the first day.

 Summarizing the main points

At the end of class teacher should spend a few minutes summarizing the main
points of the discussion.

Exercise
1. Define the term “classroom discussion”.
2. Discuss structure of classroom discussion.
3. Distinguish among different types of discussion. Which type do you think suitable
for elementary classes?
4. Specify the role of teacher in planning classroom discussion.
5. How would you organize effective discussion in your classroom? Discuss with
examples.

clxxvii
 4. PRACTICING IN ASKING QUESTIONS
In classroom discussion, questions are starting points. A question is any sentence which
has an interrogative form or function. In classroom settings, teacher questions are defined
as instructional cues or stimuli that convey to students the content elements to be learned
and directions for what they are to do and how they are to do it. Discussion, when
combined with probing, open-ended questions, requires students to organize available
information for the purpose of arriving at their own defensible answers. The type of the
questions depends upon the discussion goals. Perhaps teacher is using some writer's ideas
to produce ideas for students' writing, or extracting major concepts from a text and
organizing them into an academic summary. Teacher might wish to determine whether or
not an author’s choices are useful. All these choices will depend upon the planning of
discussion goals. If teacher is wishing to teach students summary skills, then the
discussion questions should be planned to achieve this goal. Teacher might form
questions which motivate students to describe an author’s purpose and find out the major
ideas. Mostly, discussions will be dynamic, focusing on numerous rationales and goals.

Classroom discussion is different from what is typically considered discussion. The

purpose of classroom discussion is to enable the teacher to pull the content dictated by
the curriculum out of the class by imposing a limited discussion-like format. For effective
discussions, teacher should use questions as a guide. Teacher should also practice to
develop his own questions. If discussion goal is to teach pupils essay writing skills, a list
of questions should be prepared relevant with an essay. Flexible questions, that are
planned in a logical order work better. Before starting a discussion, preparation of a list
of things that must be covered helps to focus on hierarchy of questions. Care must be
taken to not insist on a particular order. Rather, questions connected with one another
assist teacher to adapt during discussions.

Teacher may ask variety of questions to stimulate students’ thinking and guide
discussion. There may be definitional questions like “what does it mean?” there may be
evidential questions i.e. “what reasons can you give to defend your point of view?” or
there may be policy questions i.e. “what should be done?” (Larson and Keiper, 2010).
The type of the questions should depend upon the educational objectives and the students.
Kinne (2000) has suggested that teachers should develop the skills of asking questions by
keeping the goal of discussion clearly in mind to encourage active participation and
analysis. There are some typical types of open questions:
 Hypothetical: "What you will do if...?"
 Speculating: "How can we resolve this issue?"
 Defining: "Can anyone give additional elaboration about the feasibility of that
idea?"
 Probing: "Why do you feel that?"
 Clarifying/Summarizing: "Am I exactly saying what you think that...?"

clxxviii
clxxix
4.1 Questions According to Bloom’s Taxonomy
Cooper and Simonds (1995) have elaborated that questions based on Bloom’s taxonomy
are more effective to obtain the best results from discussion. They have given the
following thoughts:
 Knowledge: In this domain, questions entail students to simple recall previously
learned material. If teacher’s purpose is to stimulate this domain, questions should
be based accordingly.
 Comprehension: In this domain, questions entail students to restructure or restate
material in a way to demonstrate their understanding of important meaning.
 Application: In this domain, such questions are asked which entail students to
apply previously learned material to solve problems in new situations.
 Analysis: Questions that demand students to split a concept into its constituent
parts for logical analysis.
 Synthesis: Questions that require students to combine their ideas into a statement,
plan, product, and so forth, that is new for them
 Evaluation: Questions that require students to judge something based on some
criteria

4.1.1 Probing Questions

Teacher should ask probing questions to stimulate students’ mental processes. These
questions also help to start a discussion, modify the subject, or change the direction.
There are different types of probing questions:
 Exploratory questions:
These questions are asked to explore facts and probe basic knowledge of students.

 Challenge questions
These questions are solicited to check assumptions, conclusions, and analysis.

 Relational questions
These questions check students’ ability to compare different themes, thoughts, or
problems.

 Diagnostic questions
These questions probe students’ motives or causes.

 Action questions
These questions call for a conclusion or action.

 Cause-and-effect questions
These questions are solicited to ask students to develop causal relationships
between events, ideas or actions.

clxxx
 Extension questions
These questions are asked to expand the discussion.
 Hypothetical questions
These questions asked to examine students’ ability to pose a change in the facts or
issues.

 Priority questions
Through these questions, teacher tries to recognize the most important issue.

 Summary questions
Mostly these questions bring forth synthesis.

4.1.2 Tips to Ask Effective Questions

One of the teacher’s prime tasks is to facilitate discussion. In order to have energetic and
substantive discussions, teacher needs to be acquainted with the skill to ask effective
questions. Following are some handy tips for teacher to ask questions:
 Discuss the Elements of a Successful Discussion
From television talk shows, students usually gain the perception that discussion is a
heated debate. In fact, successful discussion isn’t essentially adversarial. Certainly,
pupils might challenge a concept that has been discussed, but they might also
examine the concept or discuss questions or present examples given by another
student’s remarks.

 Brainstorm
Brainstorming about a topic helps teacher to get students’ involvement and
participation. Role of teacher is to record their views, ideas and concepts on the
blackboard.

 Rearrange Your Classroom

Students’ seated in a square or a horseshoe gives them confidences to speak to one
another and not to focus their attention entirely on teacher.

 Pause
Considerable amount of pause to give students’ time to think and generate their
answers is necessary. Teacher shouldn’t feel forced to call on the students who
raise their hands first. If students are not provided with a pause or thinking time,
then class will resemble a game show in which those who raise their hand first are
the winners.

 Avoid unproductive questions

Certain types of questions are unproductive.

 Recall questions
Teacher shouldn’t ask questions to which the answer is clear.

clxxxi
 Rhetorical questions
Teacher should avoid asking questions exclusively for dramatic effect.
 Yes or no questions
Yes or No questions should not be asked because these slow down discussion.

 Leading questions
Open-ended questions are preferred.

 Guess What I’m Thinking questions

Don’t ask questions where teacher has already devised the answer students’ desire.

 Ask the kinds of questions that stimulate discussion

Recall or simple agreement or disagreement questions are ineffective. In contrast,
open-ended questions are effective because these engage higher-order thinking
skills i.e. analysis, interpretation, application, prediction, generalization, and
evaluation.
 Questions for students’ input: Keeping in view the remedial measures to stop
pollution, what steps you will take?
 “How” and “why” questions: How might this argument be made more
persuasive? Why do you think that____ made this argument?
 Evaluative questions: How convincing is the Iqbal’s poetry?
 Prediction questions: If ozone layer will destroy, what will happen next?
 Justification questions: What confirmation compelled you to wrap up that…?
 Rationale questions: Can you give the reason for your point of view?
 Generalization questions: How you will generalize your opinions?

 Facilitate, don’t orchestrate:

Resist the temptation to react to student comments yourself. Utilize multiple
strategies that get discussions going:
 Ask other students if they agree or disagree with the previous student’s comments.
 Collect multiple responses to the same question.
 Ask students to comment on a previous student’s comments.
 Redirect a student’s question to the other students.

 Encourage students to respond to one another:

Generate an atmosphere where students are encouraged to respond to the preceding
student’s remarks before affixing their own observations. For example, the pupils
might question the comment given by a student or elaborate on it.

 Give students the opportunity to lead a discussion.

Teacher’s role might be to sum up the discussion before presenting his own ideas.

 Build in reflection.

clxxxii
 Students should be asked to reflect on the discussion. They might be asked to give
their own reflection on the discussion.
Activity No. 5
Write the correct word in the blank spaces in the below statements.

1. In classroom discussion, questions are -----------------------points.

(starting, ending, mid, final)
2. Hypothetical questions are ------------------- questions.
(open, close, probing, multiple choice)
3. In the knowledge domain, questions entail students to ------------------ previously
learned material.
(recall, restructure, judge, logically analyze)
4. Relational question check students’ ability to ---------------------- different themes,
thoughts, or problems.
(compare, explore, develop, recognize)
5. Cause and effect questions are -----------------.
(open questions, close questions, probing questions, multiple choice questions)

clxxxiii
 5. PRACTICING IN ANSWERING QUESTIONS

When discussion goes on, unfortunately, pupils won't always give the intuitive replies
teacher dreams of. In such circumstances, teacher needs anticipation where his questions
may receive trivial answers and plan to involve students with questions like, "Can anyone
give me an example of that? Or, can anyone relate it with your life experiences?"
sometimes students are not catching up with what teacher expects in his question.
Teacher should try alternative ways to phrase questions differently, or next to each
question, list a few alternative ways to ask it. This helps to facilitate a smooth discussion
session. Cooper and Simonds (1995, p. 256) have given some guidelines to help teacher
to encourage students to give answers.
1. Keep all students on-task.
2. Teacher should avoid answering his own questions because it hinders students’ to
answer.
3. Seat students in a semicircle.
4. Get a student to take the initiative if the group is experiencing a momentary lull.
5. Respond to student answers positively and constructively.
6. Some students don’t like criticism, this hinders them to answer. Praise rather than
criticize.
7. Use active listening.
8. Encourage students’ input.
9. Student may not give answers due to fear of mistakes, so teacher should accept
students’ mistakes.
10. Encourage students to use variety of responses.
11. Encourage quiet students.
12. Sometimes students may not response due to shortage of time, teacher should
provide wait time.

Discussion provides the student with the opportunity to develop questioning skills and
responses. It offers an opportunity to develop organization and formulation of answers. In
essence, the student begins to think and organize on his/her feet.

clxxxiv
 6. ASSESSING THE DISCUSSION
As with the other tasks teacher has to perform assessment task during discussion. One
consideration is the sequence and follow-up of discussion and other is grading. Arends
(2004) has given following thoughts on follow-up and grading of classroom discussion:

1. Follow-Up Discussions:
To follow-up discussion, teacher should make formal and mental notes. These
notes help to focus on the discussion content and decide subsequent lessons. For
example, it might be possible that teacher identifies some serious gaps in students’
learning and knowledge about a topic. He/she can then arrange a presentation on
that particular topic and assign some reading tasks to students. This will also help
students to identify the topics of their interest. The information gained through
discussion will also aid teachers to plan lessons and identify strengths and
weaknesses of students’ thinking processes as well as group’s capability to involve
in productive discourse. Teacher can also find assistance to plan lessons to strength
areas targeted for improvement. For this purpose, rating scale can be used by the
teacher to sought information from pupils to judge what they thought regarding
discussion and their role in it.
2. Grading Classroom Discussion:
Grading classroom discussion is an important and challenging task for teachers
because it is difficult to quantify students’ contribution in any satisfactory way. If
students are not graded, they might think it as less necessary then the task on which
they are graded. Before grading discussion, teacher has to confront the issue
whether to reward quantity or quality. There are two methods which teacher can
use in the grading dilemma.
One method is to give bonus points to students who consistently come up with
valid ideas. Before using this method, teacher should tell it to students. Care should
be taken that students who want to contribute should be given chance to participate.
Second method is to use discussion as a springboard for a reflective writing
assignment. In this method, students are given a post-discussion writing essay in
which they reflect in words what the discussion meant to them. Teacher should tell
students about this method before leading discussion. This method is very effective
but its one serious drawback is that it requires much time to read and assign grades
to each essay.

clxxxv
 7. RULES FOR DISCUSSION
If discussion rules are developed in advance, it helps students to make an environment of
trust and mutual respect. Kinne (2000) suggested the following rules for discussion:
 Explain the ground rules for participation.
 Ask students what makes an excellent class discussion.
 Give pointers on how to participate in class discussion.
 Ask students to think of some principles for discussion, which they think everyone
should follow.
 Teacher should write all of these suggested principles where every student can see
them. If suggestions are not obtained from students, teacher can suggest some of
the following principles for the students:
 Pay attention to the participant who is speaking;
 Only one participant speaks at a time;
 Before saying something, raise hand;
 When someone is speaking, don’t interrupt;
 In case of disagreement with a response, be careful that there should be criticism on
the response, not on the person;
 Don't mock on the person who is responding during discussion;
 Give confidence to every student to participate.
 Copy the list of rules neatly and hang it where participants can refer, add, or make
changes to it as necessary.
 Set the norms for discussion in the first week of class.
 Conduct think-pair-shares on specific issues.
 Use small group assignments and have a group scribe or reporter from each group
share with whole class.
 Divide class into teams for informal “debates” (teams prepare outside of class or
one class period prior to the debate).
 Use concentric circles to stimulate discussion.
 Have students share their individual concept maps in groups and write a group
concept map.
 Give students a complex question to consider. Have each write on this question for
5-15 minutes. Then discuss in small groups or with the whole class.
 Divide the material among students or groups of students. Require each group to
teach their peers the material they have studied.

Activity No. 6

Write short notes on the following:

1. Write down five tips of practicing in answering questions.
2. Enlist the criteria to assess the discussion.
3. What do you perceive by follow-up discussion?
4. Explain two methods of grading classroom discussion.

clxxxvi
5. Highlight the rules for discussion.

clxxxvii
 8. ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF
DISCUSSION METHOD
Jones et al (1994) has given the following advantages and disadvantages of discussion
method:
Advantages:
1. The information acquired through discussion method is meaningful and helps
students to develop critical thinking and problem solving skills.
2. Discussion technique leads students towards attitudinal change through self-
awareness.
3. Discussion technique can help the student to develop a positive self-concept.
4. During discussion, student maintains high degree of mental alertness. Thus,
discussion puts positive effect upon students’ mental activity. This alertness is one
reason why discussion is often praised as being a motivator.
5. Discussion gives the teacher information about the student which can help in a
better understanding of students, individually and collectively.
6. If teacher is carefully observing the discussion session, it can provide him information
about the social, psychological, emotional, and skill development of the student.

Disadvantages:
1. Discussion requires much time. That’s why this technique is usually time-
consuming.
2. Discussion often becomes a confused, meaningless activity because of some boring
topics or lack of students’ interests.
3. In discussion, some students may never participate while a few may tend to
dominate.
4. Long and/or frequent periods of silence can occur in a discussion. Such silence
often leads the teacher to take over the class in pursuit of the topic.
5. During discussion, there is always a risk of controversial ideas which disturbs the
purpose of discussion.
6. Teachers often become irritated because discussion may fail to lead to a suitable
conclusion or a desirable conclusion.
7. Students usually don’t have sufficient informational background about the topic or
maturity to contribute to a meaningful discussion.
8. Finally, there is the problem of evaluation. Teacher always face problem to device
measures to accurately measure the contribution of students during discussion.

clxxxviii
 9. GUIDELINES FOR MAXIMUM UTILIZATION

 Jones et al (1994) has given some suggestions for classroom teachers to improve
classroom discussion:
 There should be an atmosphere of acceptance between teacher-student and student-
student relationship. Students must feel free from threat in order to speak openly.
 The teacher must be fully familiar with the discussion topic. So preparation of
teacher is necessary.
 Preparation of students is also important for higher level of participation. In this
regard, the teacher must plan sufficient learning activities prior to the discussion
and encourage students to participate.
 Discussion should be used when learning objectives are considered worth the extra
time required. Generally, the objectives appropriate to the discussion process
would involve higher- level cognitive, affective, and skill learning related to
discussion.
 The topics for discussion should be properly stated.
 Teacher should introduce the discussion topic by writing it on the board.
 When introducing the topic, teacher should take time to clarify terms, establish the
relevance of the topic, and create a sense of psychological safety in the classroom.
 Variety of discussion types may be employed i.e. panels, forums, debates, or buzz-
sessions.
 When discussion is in progress, the teacher plays his role as moderator by
clarifying concepts, making tentative summaries, stating conclusions, and keeping
the discussion on track. Teacher should realize his role with responsibility.
 Dominance of the overly eager students may be handled by discouraging them
privately.
 When discussion is over, a summary of the discussion by the teacher is desirable,
but it is better if it is presented by students.
 Follow-up activities should be planned to enhance students’ learning.
 Metts (2011) and Green (2000) have also given the following suggestions to
facilitate effective classroom discussion:
 Teacher should use words with the vocabulary range of the students.

clxxxix
 After asking a question there should be wait time. Five seconds pause gives
students to think over the question and suitable answers.
 Teacher should not answer his own question. Once students realize that the teacher
will answer his or her own questions, they don’t take interest.
 Question should be given to the whole class first. If teacher decides to call on a
specific student, he should say the student's name, repeat the question, and then
wait for the response.
 Strategies should be developed to handle the over-enthusiastic student and the quiet
student.
 Lengthy responses and fully developed answers should be encouraged.
 Teacher should not interrupt a student who is answering a question and other
students should also be stopped to interrupt.
 Teacher should make the class responsible for their discussion. Teacher should
facilitate, not dictate the discussion.
 Encourage students to comment on the responses of classmates before
summarizing or moving to another question.
 Care must be taken to repeat an answer.
 When a student asks a good question, turn it back to the class to answer. If the class
answers the question, then let the answer stand and move on.
 Students’ non-verbal signals should also be attended.
 Teacher should know his own nonverbal behavior when students are asking or
answering questions.

cxc
 10. EXERCISE
1. Offer a working definition of classroom discussion in the light of different
definitions elaborated in this unit.
2. “Discussion is an excellent way of developing thinking skills and higher-order
learning”. Discuss in detail.
3. Elaborate different types of classroom discussion.
4. Critically analyze different tasks students usually perform in a discussion group.
5. Elaborate three phases of developing critical thinking among students during
classroom discussion.
6. Compare and contrast among identification phase, focusing phase and application
phase of critical thinking.
7. Write short notes on:
 Small groups
 Buzz groups
 Talking Tickets
 Think-Pair-Share

11. SELF ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

Q. 1 Analyze the effectiveness of guided discussion method.
Q. 2 Explain the structure of guided discussion method.
Q. 3 Make a comparison between “Line-ups” and “Value Lines” techniques of
discussion method.
Q. 4 Critically evaluate the discussion method techniques highlighted by Green (2000).
Q. 5 What are the steps to plan discussion? Discuss.
Q. 6 Discuss the importance of appropriate use of physical space in discussion
method.
Q. 7 Analyze the rules to organize classroom discussion.
Q. 8 Elaborate the suggestions to organize classroom discussion.
Q. 9 Discuss in detail the importance of asking questions in classroom discussion.
Q. 10 State tips to ask effective questions.
Q. 11 Briefly discuss the assessment procedure of classroom discussion.
Q. 12 Explain advantages and disadvantages of classroom discussion.
Q. 13 What are the suggestions to improve classroom discussion? Discuss in detail.

cxci
 12. REFERENCES

Arends, R. I. (2004). Learning to Teach (6th Ed). USA: Library of Congress Cataloging-
in-Publication Data. Pp 431-437.

Cooper, P.J., & Simonds, C. (1995). Communication for the Classroom Teacher (6th
Ed.). Massachusetts: Allyn & Bacon.

Davis, B. G. (2009). Tools for Teaching. USA: John Wiley & Sons.
Eglin, K., & Connor. (2011). Planning Classroom Discussion. Retrieved from
mhtml:file://D:\discussion%20method\Planning%20Classroom%20Discussions.mht!http:
//writing.colostate.edu/guides/teaching/planning/discussions.cfm, Accessed on September
2, 2011.

Green, T. (2000). Ten Techniques for Energizing Your Classroom Discussions. Retrieved
from, http://web.grcc.edu/CTL/faculty%20resources/ten_techniques_for_energizing.htm,
Accessed on August 7, 2011.

Haugen, L. (1998). Suggestions for Leading Small-group Discussions. Retrieved from,

http://www.celt.iastate.edu/teaching/small_group.html, Accessed on August 5, 2011.

Jones, et al (1994) Discussion Retrieved from

http://www.neiu.edu/~sdundis/hrd321/discssn.doc.pdf. Accessed on September 12, 2011.

Kern, D. E. (2006). Praxis II: Principles of Learning and Teaching. Canada: Willey
Publishing Inc. p.127

Kinne. (2000). The Human Rights Education Handbook: Effective Practices for
Learning, Action, and Change. Human Rights Resource Center: University of Minnesota.

Larson, B. E., & Keiper, T. A. (2009). Classroom Discussion and Threaded Electronic
Discussion: Learning In Two Arenas. Washington: Western Washington University.

Ledlow, S. (2001). Using Think-Pair-Share in the College Classroom. USA: Arizona

State University.
Lesmeister, M. (2011). Teaching and Learning Methods. Retrieved from,
http://florida4h.org/staff/inservice/methods.htm#Buzz%20Group, Accessed on August 5, 2011.
Marilla. & Svinicki. (2011). The Discussion Class: Interaction Functions. Austin: The
University of Texas. pp 133-134.

Metts, S. (2011). Suggestions for Classroom Discussion. Retrieved from:

http://www.teachtech.ilstu.edu/resources/teachTopics/tips/cDisc.php. Accessed on May 11,
2011.

cxcii
Nystrand, M., Gamoran, A., Kachur, R., & Prendergast. (1996). Opening dialogue:
Understanding the dynamics of language and learning in the English classroom. New
York: Teachers College Press.

Peter, K. (2008). Ideas for Generating Discussions on Readings or Other Class Material.
Retrieved from,
http://www.teachtech.ilstu.edu/resources/teachTopics/tips/genDisc.php, Accessed on
August 3, 2011.

Svinicki, M. D. (2010). Organizing and Conducting a Class Discussion. Austin: The

University of Texas.

Skyhorse. (2009). Aviation instructor’s handbook: federal aviation administration.

Retrieved from, http://books.google.com.pk/books?id=-jsWy04BE50C&pg=SA4-
PA13&lpg=SA4-
PA13&dq=questions+in+discussion+method&source=bl&ots=pkxB4GNn7g&sig=Ik1_e
pikPD72wh4T3ihPl4-
e9Gw&hl=en&ei=uq6aTZmhGofNrQejkO33Bg&sa=X&oi=book_result&ct=result&resn
um=9&ved=0CDYQ6AEwCDgK#v=onepage&q=questions%20in%20discussion%20me
thod&f=false. Accessed on May 11, 2011

The Scout Association. (1999). Buzz Groups. Retrieved from,

http://www.scoutbase.org.uk/library/hqdocs/facts/pdfs/fs310506.pdf, Accessed on August
5, 2011.

Kfinley.
(2011). How to Encourage Classroom Discussion. Retrieved from,
http://www.ehow.com/how_2128561_encourage-classroom-
discussion.html#ixzz1MaiX7YzX, Accessed on August 10, 2011.

Weeks, M (2011).Teaching Techniques: Reflective Discussion Method, retrieved from

www. Ed.uiuc.edu/Students/m-weeks/technks.html, Accessed on August 22, 2011.

cxciii
Unit No. 7

COOPERATIVE LEARNING

Written by: Dr. Fazal-ur-Rahman

Reviewed by: Prof. Dr. Muhammad Javed Iqbal

cxciv
 CONTENTS

Introduction ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------175

Objectives --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------175

1 Cooperative Learning ------------------------------------------------------------------------176

2 Cooperative Learning Principles -----------------------------------------------------------179
3 Strategies of Cooperative Learning -------------------------------------------------------181
4 Cooperative Learning Techniques ---------------------------------------------------------183
5 Interactiveness in Cooperative Learning --------------------------------------------------188
6 Advantages of Cooperative Learning ------------------------------------------------------190
7 Summary ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------190
8 Activities ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------191
9 Self Assessment Questions ------------------------------------------------------------------191
10 References ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------192

cxcv
 INTRODUCTION
Cooperative learning is an educational approach to teaching and learning that involves
groups of learners working together to solve a problem, complete a task, or create a
product. Cooperative learning is based on the idea that learning is a naturally social act in
which the participants talk among themselves.

Cooperative Learning (CL) is a philosophy. In all situations where people come together
in groups, it suggests a way of dealing with people which respects and highlights
individual group members’ abilities and contributions. There is a sharing of authority and
acceptance of responsibility among group members for the group’s actions. The theme of
cooperative learning is based upon consensus building through cooperation by group
members, in contrast to competition among individuals. There are many mechanisms for
group analysis and introspection the fundamental approach is teacher centered whereas
cooperative learning is more student centered.

OBJECTIVES

After studying this unit you will be able to:

1. Describe the nature of Cooperative learning
2. Explain Cooperative learning principles
3. Discuss different strategies of cooperative learning
4. Discuss Cooperative learning structures and techniques
5. Apply the conditions for effective cooperative learning
6. Manage activities based on cooperative learning strategies

cxcvi
 1. COOPERATIVE LEARNING
Cooperative learning is the instructional use of small groups so that students work
together to maximize their own and each other’s learning (Johnson and Johnson, 1993, p.
9). Further these are principles and techniques for helping students work together more
effectively (Jacobs, Power, & Loh, 2002, p. 1). According to UNESCO 2003:
Cooperative learning is the process of getting two or more students to work together to
learn. Students often work in small groups composed of participants with differing ability
levels and using a variety of learning activities to master material initially developed by
an instructor, or construct knowledge on substantive issues. Each member of the team is
responsible for learning what is taught and for helping teammates learn (Retrieved
from http://webworld.unesco.org/gcexhibition2003/169/online/instructstrat.html accessed
on 27-10-2011.
Figure No. 7: Cooperative Learning

Source: http://edtech.kennesaw.edu/intech/cooperativelearning.htm
Panitz (1996) differentiates between collaboration and cooperation in the following words:
“Collaboration is a philosophy of interaction and personal lifestyle whereas cooperation is a
structure of interaction designed to facilitate the accomplishment of an end product or goal.”
Gerlach (1994) described the definition of cooperative learning as “Cooperative learning
is based on the idea that learning is a naturally social act in which the participants talk
among themselves. It is through the talk that learning occurs.” While Gokhale (1995)

cxcvii
defines cooperative learning as “An instruction method in which students work in groups
toward a common academic goal.”
Different authors categorize “community” as “...cultural aggregations, a group of people
who exchange words and ideas” (Rheinhgold, 1994), “alliances of members based on
emotional relationship” (Dyson, 1997), “people who interact socially to satisfy their own
needs” (Preece, 2000), “members with a shared goals, interest need” (Issacs, et al, 2000),
“people who create, manage, and participate in a group” (Kom, 2000).
Figure No. 8: Sharing of Ideas in Cooperative Learning

Source: http://edtech.kennesaw.edu/intech/cooperativelearning.htm
Speaking in groups is more natural, because in real life students spend most of their time
talking to one another. If they speak to a large group of people, it is usually a more formal
situation where they have spent time preparing what they are going to say (Qiang, 2007,
p100). Small group work helps students learn to work cooperatively and it helps them
develop interpersonal skills. When students work with other students who are not their
friends, they learn how to work with a wider variety of people and this fosters development of
tolerance, mutual respect and harmony. If students cooperate in harmony and with joy,
anxiety will surely be forgotten.

Cooperative learning creates the special learning environment that is open for any kind of
beneficial information, exchange of ideas, trust building, sharing of ideas, and ongoing
cooperative process. Learners work together, participating in various groups and teams. That
is why the definition “learning community” is so often mixed with such definitions as
“learning teams”, “partnerships”, or “mentorships”.

The main difference of learning communities from other Internet communities

(geographical communities, communities of practitioners, non-profit and non-
governmental communities, etc.) is the specific educational goal that influences both
teachers and learners, identifies their roles in the educational process, and requires the
thoughtful organizational basis of the learning process. A sense of a learning community
can only be created within an online course, or “virtual university”, under the certain
circumstances. The lessons are based on a learner-oriented approach to teaching and
within an overall democratic learning environment; collaboration, cooperative learning

cxcviii
and project-based learning are the leading methods of teaching. A common set of the
tools for communication and knowledge sharing (Internet software and hardware) is
available to all members. The benefits of learning communities, enrichment of ideas,
informal discourse and knowledge swap over that provide deeper understanding of the
learning content; development of communication skills; socializing of the members
within group learning and community activities; improved emotional and learning
support of the learning communities’ members, decreasing drop-outs in distance learning
environment; high motivational level of learning and awareness of individual
responsibility for the success in learning; development of the group learning experiences,
which are more than the sum of individual experiences because of the interactive nature
of the knowledge construction process; learning through practice, learning as experience,
making meaning in a social context.

The structural approach to cooperative learning is based on the design, analysis and logical
application of structures, or content-free ways of organizing social communication in the
classroom. Structures usually involve a chain of steps with proscribed behavior at each step. An
important cornerstone of the approach is the distinction between “structures” and “activities”.

To exemplify, teachers can design many excellent supportive activities such as making a team
mural or a coverlet. Such activities almost always have a specific content-bound objective
and thus cannot be used to deliver a range of academic content. Structures may be used
repeatedly with almost any subject matter, at a wide range of grade levels and at various
points in a lesson plan.

Computer-Supported Cooperative Learning (CSCL) is a relatively new educational paradigm

within cooperative learning which uses technology in a learning environment to help mediate
and support group interactions in a cooperative learning context. CSCL systems use
technology to control and monitor interactions, to regulate tasks, rules, and roles, and to
mediate the acquisition of new knowledge. Most recently, one study showed that using robots
in the classroom to promote cooperative learning led to an increase in learning effectiveness
of the activity and an increase in the student’s motivation. Researchers and practitioners in
several fields, including cognitive sciences, sociology, computer engineering have begun to
investigate CSCL, thus, it constitutes a new trans-disciplinary field.

The cooperative learning is based on constructivist theory that knowledge is socially

produced by communities of inhabitants, and each person could get this awareness if he
would join these communities. The inhabitants share their ideas, experiences, way of
thinking, information, and within this practice of exchange of ideas, they come to the
consideration of what is important and acceptable for the other members of the group, and for
the group on the whole. The main ability that students get within collaboration is the skill to
listen to other people; to respect their views, understand the substitute points of view, not
rejecting the personality, but at the same time, remaining the associated member of the
community.

cxcix
 2. COOPERATIVE LEARNING PRINCIPLES
Many principles have been proposed for cooperative learning. Below is one list of eight
such principles.

1. Heterogeneous Grouping. This principle means that the groups in which students
do cooperative learning tasks are mixed on one or more of a number of variables
including sex, ethnicity, social class, religion, personality, age, language
proficiency, and diligence.

2. Collaborative Skills. Collaborative skills such as giving reasons are those needed
to work with others. Students may lack these skills, the language involved in using
the skills, or the inclination to apply the skills. Most books and websites on
cooperative learning urge that collaborative skills be explicitly taught one at a time.

3. Group Autonomy. This principle encourages students to look to themselves for resources
rather than relying solely on the teacher. When student groups are having difficulty, it is very
tempting for teachers to intervene either in a particular group or with the entire class. We may
sometimes want to resist this temptation because as Roger Johnson writes, “Teachers must trust
the peer interaction to do many of the things they have felt responsible for themselves”
(http://www.clcrc.com/pages/qanda.html).

4. Simultaneous Interaction (Kagan, 1994). In classrooms in which group activities

are not used, the normal interaction pattern is that of sequential interaction in which
one person at a time – usually the teacher – speaks. In contrast, when group
activities are used, one student per group is speaking. In a class of 40 divided into
groups of four, ten students are speaking simultaneously, i.e., 40 students divided
into 4 students per group = 10 students (1 per group) speaking at the same time.

5. Equal Participation (Kagan, 1994). A frequent problem in groups is that one or

two group members dominate the group and for whatever reason, impede the
participation of others. Cooperative learning offers many ways of promoting more
equal participation among group members.

6. Individual Accountability. When we try to encourage individual accountability in

groups, we hope that everyone will try to learn and to share their knowledge and
ideas with others.

cc
7. Positive Interdependence. This principle lies at the heart of CL. When positive
interdependence exists among members of a group, they feel that what helps one
member of the group helps the other members and that what hurts one member of the
group hurts the other members. It is this “All for one, one for all” feeling that leads
group members to want to help each other, to see that they share a common goal.

8. Cooperation as a Value. This principle means that rather than cooperation being
only a way to learn, i.e., the how of learning, cooperation also becomes part of the
content to be learned, i.e., the what of learning. This flows naturally from the most
crucial cooperative learning principle, positive interdependence. Cooperation as a
value involves taking the feeling of “All for one, one for all” and expanding it
beyond the small classroom group to encompass the whole class, the whole school,
on and on, bringing in increasingly greater numbers of people and other beings into
students’ circle of ones with whom to cooperate.

cci
 3. STRATEGIES OF COOPERATIVE LEARNING
Cooperative learning strategies could be used in the planning, translating and reviewing.
The teachers should encourage the students to participate in good discussions. Different
cooperative strategies included:
1. Jigsaw: Groups with five students are set up. The faculty member divides an
assignment or topic to the group. Each student is assigned some material to learn
and to teach to his group members. The representative of the students working on
the same topic gets together and discusses the important concepts and the ways to
teach it to the whole class. After the practice in these “expert” groups the original
groups get together and teach each other. Tests and assessments follow.
2. Think-Pair-Share: This is a simple and quick technique; the instructor develops
and poses questions preferable one demanding analysis, gives the students a few
minutes to think about a response, and then asks students to share their ideas with a
partner. This “think-time” can be spent writing, also. Students then turn to a partner
and share their responses. This task gives them opportunity to collect and organize
their thoughts. “Pair” and “share’ components encourage learners to compare and
contrast their understanding with those of another, and to rehearse their response
first in a low-risk situation before going public with the whole class. And then
responses can be shared within a four-person learning team, within a larger group,
or with an entire class during a follow-up discussion. All students have an
opportunity to learn by reflection and by verbalization.
3. Three-Step Interview: Common as an ice-breaker or a team-building exercise,
this structure can also be used also to share information such as hypotheses or
reactions to a film or article. In it each member of a team chooses another member
to be a partner. In the first step students form dyads (pair of individuals); one
student interviews the other. Then Students switch roles. And at the third step the
dyad links with a second dyad. This four-member learning team then discusses the
information or insights gleaned from the initial paired interviews.
4. Numbered Heads Together: Members of learning teams usually composed of four
individuals, count off: 1, 2, 3, or 4, the instructor poses a question, usually factual in
nature, but requiring some higher order thinking skills. Students discuss the question,
making certain that every group member knows the agreed upon answer. The instructor
calls a specific number and the team members originally designated that number during
the count off respond as group spokespersons. Because no one knows which number
the teacher will call, all team members have a vested interest in understanding the
appropriate response. Again, students benefit from the verbalization, and the peer
coaching helps both the high and the low achievers. Class time is usually better spent
because less time is wasted on inappropriate responses and because all students become
actively involved with the material.

5. Round Robin: It is primarily a brainstorming technique in which students generate

ideas but do not elaborate, explain, evaluate, or question the ideas. Group members
take turns responding to a question with words, phrases, or short answers. The

ccii
 order of responses is organized by proceeding from one student to another until all
students have had an opportunity to speak. This technique helps generating many
ideas because all students participate, because it discourages comments that
interrupt or inhibit the flow or ideas. The ideas could be used to develop a piece of
good paragraph on a given topic.
6. Three-minute review: Teacher stops any time during a lecture or discussion on the
various formats of letter writing, report writing, etc and give team members three
minutes to review what has been said, ask clarifying questions or answer questions.
7. Numbered Heads: A team of four is established. Each member is given number 1,
2, 3 and four. Questions are asked of the group. Groups work together to answer
the questions so that all can verbally answer the questions. Teacher calls out a
number (three) and the number three in each group is asked to give the answer.
This could be used for comprehension exercises.
8. Buzz Groups: Buzz groups are teams of four to six students that are formed
quickly and extemporaneously. They discuss on a particular topic or different
topics allotted to them. The discussion is informal and they exchange the ideas.
Buzz Groups serve as a warm-up to whole-class discussion. They are effective for
generating information and ideas in a short period of time. This technique could be
used to write essays on current issues.
9. Talking Chips: In talking chips, students participate in a group discussion,
surrendering a token each time they speak. This technique ensures equitable
participation by regulating how often each group member is allowed to participate.
This technique encourages silent students to participate and solve communication
or process problems, such as dominating or clashing group members.
10. Critical Debate: This activity could be used while drafting argumentative essays. In
this individual students select their side of an issue in contrary to their own views. They
form teams and discuss, present, and argue the issue against the opposing team. It
exposes the class to a focused, in-depth, multiple-perspective analysis of issues. It can
move students beyond simple dualistic thinking, deepen their understanding of an
issue, and help them to recognize the range of perspectives inherent in complex topics.
This technique is suitable for tertiary level students.
11. Write Around: For creative writing or summarizing, teachers could give a
sentence starter (for e.g. If there were no plants on the earth. A man met an alien on
the sea shore) then all students in each team have to finish the sentence. Then, they
pass the paper to the right, read the one they receive, and add sentence to than one.
After a few round, four summaries or stories emerge. Students should be given
time to add a conclusion and/or edit their favorite one to share with the class.
12. Praise-Question-Polish: In this technique the group members take turns to read
aloud their papers as their other group members follow along with copies. First, the
respondents are asked to react to the piece of writing by asking them to identify
what they liked about the work (Praise), then identify what portion of the writing
they did not understand (Question), finally offering specific suggestions for

cciii
improvement of the writing (Polish). The students would be able to improve their
own writing by critically evaluating the writing of their peers.

cciv
 4. COOPERATIVE LEARNING TECHNIQUES
There are many cooperative learning techniques available for just about any learning
situation. Kagan (1989/1990) provides an excellent overview of the various cooperative
learning techniques, including their academic and social functions.

1. Roundtable
Roundtable structures can be used to brainstorm ideas and to generate a large
number of responses to a single question or a group of questions.
 Faculty poses question.
 One piece of paper and pen per group.
 First student writes one response, and says it out loud.
 First student passes paper to the left, second student writes response, etc.
 Continues around group until time elapses.
 Students may say “pass” at any time.
 Group stops when time is called.

The key here is the question or the problem you’ve asked the students to consider. It
has to be one that has the potential for a number of different “right” answers. Relate the
question to the course unit, but keep it simple so every student can have some input.
Once time is called, determine what you want to have the students do with the
lists...they may want to discuss the multitude of answers or solutions or they may
want to share the lists with the entire class.

2. Focused Listing
Focused listing can be used as a brainstorming technique or as a technique to
generate descriptions and definitions for concepts. Focused listing asks the students
to generate words to define or describe something. Once students have completed
this activity, you can use these lists to facilitate group and class discussion.

Example: Ask students to list 5-7 words or phrases that describe or define what a
motivated student does. From there, you might ask students to get together in small
groups to discuss the lists, or to select the one that they can all agree on. Combine
this technique with a number of the other techniques and you can have a powerful
cooperative learning structure.

3. Structured Problem-solving
Structured problem-solving can be used in conjunction with several other
cooperative learning structures.
 Have the participants brainstorm or select a problem for them to consider.
 Assign numbers to members of each group (or use playing cards). Have each
member of the group be a different number or suit.
 Discuss task as group.

ccv
  Each participant should be prepared to respond. Each member of the group
needs to understand the response well enough to give the response with no
help from the other members of the group.
 Ask an individual from each group to respond. Call on the individual by
number (or suit).

4. One Minute Papers

Ask students to comment on the following questions. Give them one minute and
time them. This activity focuses them on the content and can also provide feedback
to you as a teacher.
 What was the most important or useful thing you learned today?
 What two important questions do you still have; what remains unclear?
 What would you like to know more about?

You can use these one minute papers to begin the next day’s discussion, to
facilitate discussion within a group, or to provide you with feedback on where the
student is in his or her understanding of the material.

5. Paired Annotations
Students pair up to review/learn same article, chapter or content area and exchange
double-entry journals (see below) for reading and reflection.

Students discuss key points and look for divergent and convergent thinking and
ideas. Together students prepare a composite annotation that summarizes the
article, chapter, or concept.

6. Structured Learning Team Group Roles

When putting together groups, you may want to consider assigning (or having
students select) their roles for the group. Students may also rotate group roles
depending on the activity.
Potential group roles and their functions include:
 Leader - The leader is responsible for keeping the group on the assigned task
at hand. S/he also makes sure that all members of the group have an
opportunity to participate, learn and have the respect of their team members.
The leader may also want to check to make sure that all of the group
members have mastered the learning points of a group exercise.
 Recorder - The recorder picks and maintains the group files and folders on a
daily basis and keeps records of all group activities including the material
contributed by each group member. The recorder writes out the solutions to
problems for the group to use as notes or to submit to the instructor. The
recorder may also prepare presentation materials when the group makes oral
presentations to the class.
 Reporter - The reporter gives oral responses to the class about the group’s
activities or conclusions.

ccvi
  Monitor - The monitor is responsible for making sure that the group’s work
area is left the way it was found and acts as a timekeeper for timed activities.
 Wildcard (in groups of five) - The wildcard acts as an assistant to the group
leader and assumes the role of any member that may be missing.

7. Send-A-Problem
Send-A-Problem can be used as a way to get groups to discuss and review material,
or potential solutions to problems related to content information.
(1) Each member of a group generates a problem and writes it down on a card.
Each member of the group then asks the question to other members.
(2) If the question can be answered and all members of the group agree on the answer,
then that answer is written on the back of the card. If there is no consensus on the
answer, the question is revised so that an answer can be agreed upon.
(3) The group puts a Q on the side of the card with the question on it, and an A
on the side of the card with an answer on it.
(4) Each group sends its question cards to another group.
(5) Each group member takes ones question from the stack of questions and
reads one question at a time to the group. After reading the first question, the
group discusses it. If the group agrees on the answer, they turn the card over
to see if they agree with the first group’s answer. If there again is consensus,
they proceed to the next question. If they do not agree with the first group’s
answer, the second group writes their answer on the back of the card as an
alternative answer.
(6) The second group reviews and answers each question in the stack of cards,
repeating the procedure outlined above.
(7) The question cards can be sent to a third, fourth, or fifth group, if desired.
(8) Stacks of cards are then sent back to the originating group. The sending
group can then discuss and clarify any question

Variation: A variation on the send a problem is to use the process to get groups to
discuss a real problem for which there may be no one set answer.
1. Groups decide on one problem they will consider. It is best if each group
considers a different problem.
2. The same process is used, with the first group brainstorming solutions to a
single problem. The problem is written on a piece of paper and attached to
the outside of a folder. The solutions are listed and enclosed inside the folder.
3. The folder is then passed to the next group. Each group brainstorms for 3-5
minutes on the problems they receive without reading the previous group’s
work and then place their solutions inside the folders.
4. This process may continue to one or more groups. The last group reviews all
the solutions posed by all of the previous groups and develops a prioritized
list of possible solutions. This list is then presented to the group.

8. Value Line
One way to form heterogeneous groups is to use a value line.

ccvii
 (i) Present an issue or topic to the group and ask each member to determine how
they feel about the issue (could use a 1-10 scale; 1 being strong agreement,
10 being strong disagreement).
(ii) Form a rank-ordered line and number the participants from 1 up (from strong
agreement to strong disagreement, for example).
(iii) Form your groups of four by pulling one person from each end of the value
line and two people from the middle of the group (for example, if you had 20
people, one group might consist of persons 1, 10, 11, 20).

9. Team Expectations
Some of the common fears about working with groups include student fears that
each member will not pull their weight as a part of the group. Students are scared
that their grade will be lower as a result of the group learning vs. learning they do
individually. One way to address this issue is to use a group activity to allow the
group to outline acceptable group behavior. Put together a form and ask groups to
first list behaviors (expectations) they expect from each individual, each pair and as
a group as a whole.
Groups then can use this as a way to monitor individual contributions to the group
and as a way to evaluate group participation.
10. Double Entry Journal
The Double Entry Journal can be used as a way for students to take notes on
articles and other resources they read in preparation for class discussion.
 Students read and reflect on the assigned reading(s).
 Students prepare the double entry journal, listing critical points of the readings
(as they see them) and any responses to the readings, in general, or specific
critical points.
 Students bring their journal notes to class
 Once in class, students may use their double entry journal to begin discussion, to
do a paired annotation, or for other classroom and group activity.
11. Guided Reciprocal Peer Questioning
The goal of this activity is to generate discussion among student groups about a
specific topic or content area.
 Faculty conducts a brief (10-15 minutes) lecture on a topic or content area.
Faculty may assign a reading or written assignment as well.
 Instructor then gives the students a set of generic question stems.
 Students work individually to write their own questions based on the material
being covered.
 Students do not have to be able to answer the questions they pose. This
activity is designed to force students to think about ideas relevant to the
content area.
 Students should use as many question stems as possible.
 Grouped into learning teams, each student offers a question for discussion,
using the different stems.
Sample question stems:
 What is the main idea of...?
 What if...?

ccviii
  How does...affect...?
 What is a new example of...?
 Explain why...?
 Explain how...?
 How does this relate to what I’ve learned before?
 What conclusions can I draw about...?

12. The Make-up of a Cooperative Learning Session

Members of effective cooperative learning groups have specific roles. Each
member may assume several roles at a given session; in fact, for smaller groups it
will be necessary for each member to have more than one duty.
 Chair or Leader
o This person is the agenda-setting facilitator.
o In other words, the chair or leader sets the agenda of the session, with
input from the rest of the group.
 Time Keeper
o This person is the agenda facilitator.
o The time keeper keeps track of the amount of time spent on each
activity in the session and makes sure pre-arranged time allocations in
the agenda are followed.
 Room Scheduler
o This person arranges the date, time and place of the study session with
school administrators, if necessary.
o The room scheduler may also be responsible for contacting study
group members to remind them about sessions.
 Resource Arranger
o This person arranges for supplies and resources for the session.
o Resources may include reference books from the library, peer tutors, or
overhead projectors.
 Group Process Evaluator
o This person evaluates the effectiveness and efficiency of the session.
 Producer or Participant
o This person takes part in the scheduled activities of the session.
o In most cases, all members of the study group are participants.
 Resource Person
o This person is not necessarily a constant member of the group.
o The resource person is present when needed to provide additional
resources to the group members.
o The resource person may be a faculty member, a tutor, or another
knowledgeable person.

ccix
 5. INTERACTIVENESS IN COOPERATIVE LEARNING
1. Pre and Post-Tests: Before the session begins, learners can be given a 3-5
question quiz or asked to list 3-5 points they would cover in an essay on a
particular question. If learners are provided access to correct or sample answers, the
tests can be self-scoring. These tests can help focus learner attention on key ideas
and provide feedback to learners on whether or not they understand the material.
(This can work for online instruction, too.)
2. Attention Span Breaks: After every ten to twenty minutes of your session pose a
question that summarizes the subtopic or foreshadows the next portion of the session.
Or, you could ask learners to vote on an opinion question relevant to your topic. In
pairs, you might ask learners to provide a written example appropriate to your topic,
collect them, and discuss a few that are either excellent or erroneous examples.
3. Reflecting on and Improving Note-taking, a three-session technique: Provide a
triple-spaced outline of your session as a guide for learners’ note-taking. After 20
minutes, ask learners to compare their notes with two other people in the class.
Give the next 20 minutes of the session without an outline, then ask learners to
compare their notes with the same two learners. For the next session, provide an
outline for only half the session but follow the same procedures as above, having
learners compare notes twice during the session. At the beginning of the third
session, conduct a short discussion as to what learners learned from comparing
notes. Have learners compare notes once a week thereafter. You may want to join
in and take a look at some of their notes as well.
4. Checking Learner Understanding: After 15-25 minutes of lecturing (or after a
page or two of an online, textual session) ask learners to respond to one or two
questions. Vary the questions, sometimes asking questions that check
comprehension or summarize main points, other times asking learners to apply,
analyze, or evaluate conceptual material.
5. Think-Pair-Share: This is a cooperative learning technique that can has dramatic
results. After a bit of lecturing, ask a multiple-choice question that is fact-based or
checks learner comprehension. After counting the vote to each choice, ask learners
to pair-up and explain their answers, then take the vote again. Almost inevitably the
number of votes for the right answer increases dramatically.
6. Making Material Relevant: After lecturing on an idea or concept, stop and ask
learners for examples from their own experiences or readings. Or, you might show
a news clip or a movie segment and ask learners how it relates to the session
material. The variety of learner perceptions can be amazing and provide the
instructor with feedback about how learners think.
7. Changing People’s Minds: Sessions have been shown to be fairly ineffective at
changing people’s attitudes or values. Discussion and concrete experiences are

ccx
 better for meeting these types of learning goals. When appropriate, ask learners to
discuss or write you a note at the end of class discussing how the course material
has affected their thinking or beliefs.
8. Discussion Questions: At some point during the session, groups of 2-4 learners
respond to a carefully prepared and written out discussion question. It is extremely
useful to give learners the type of discussion question that they might find on an
exam as a short answer to essay question.
9. Group Activities: A variation on discussion is to provide a small group activity
instead of a discussion question. For example, learners could be asked to fill out a
comparison chart between philosophers discussed in the session, list the causes of
an event noted in the session, define terms used in session in their own words, or
list attributes of theories identified in the session.
10. Summarizing and Evaluating: At the end of the session or a session segment, ask
learners to summarize or evaluate the session in a short paragraph. Take these
home and flip thought them. You will learn much.
11. Hints for Better Learning Groups
Below is a checklist adapted from Bowen and Jackson (1985-6) of things groups
can do to function better. If appropriate for your class, distribute to your students.
i) Before the group begins:
 Expect to learn, to enjoy, and to discover.
 Team up with people you don’t know.
ii) As the group begins:
 Make a good first impression.
 Build the team.
o Do something that requires self-disclosure.
o Take interpersonal risks to build trust.
o Establish team goals as appropriate.
 Start thinking about group processing.
iii) While the group is in existence:
 Work at increasing self-disclosure.
 Work at giving good feedback.
 Get silent members involved.
 Confront problems.
o Apply lessons from class work.
o Work on issues in the group even if they appear at first to be just
between two members.
o Don’t assume you can’t work with someone just because you
don’t like or respect them.
o If the group can’t solve a problem, consult the instructor as a group.
 Regularly review your data.
 Vary the leadership style as needed.
iv) Wrapping up the group:
 Summarize and review your learning from group experiences.
o Analyze the data to discover why the group was more
effective or less so.
o Provide final feedback to members on their contribution.
 Celebrate the group’s accomplishments.

ccxi
ccxii
 6. ADVANTAGES OF COOPERATIVE LEARNING
Some of the advantages enlisted by Cooper (1994) are:
1. Cooperative learning increases student retention by increasing student involvement
2. It can increase tolerance of diversity
3. It can increase learning in televised and interactive video classes
4. It increases critical thinking skills
5. It is an effective means to various liberal education goals
6. It prepares students for work groups in later employment
7. It builds a sense of community on campus
8. It offers a method to improve instruction
9. It responds to diversity of learning preferences and styles

7. SUMMARY
Cooperative learning is a style of education that gets students actively participating in the
classroom. It is much more than group work, though that is a part of it. Cooperative
learning is the process of getting two or more students to work together to learn.
Different principles of cooperative learning includes:
1. Heterogeneous Grouping.
2. Collaborative Skills.
3. Group Autonomy.
4. Simultaneous Interaction
5. Equal Participation
6. Individual Accountability.
7. Positive Interdependence.
8. Cooperation as a Value.

Different strategies of cooperative leaning included:

 Jigsaw
 Think-Pair-Share
 Three-Step Interview
 Numbered Heads Together
 Round Robin
 Three-minute review
 Numbered Heads
 Buzz Groups
 Talking Chips
 Critical Debate
 Write Around
 Praise-Question-Polish

ccxiii
 8. ACTIVITIES
1. Visit a cooperative learning web site and briefly discuss (in 2 or 3 sentences) what
you learned there.

2. Describe a cooperative learning lesson that you could use in your classroom. Show the
content of the lesson, select a cooperative learning structure, select a classroom
design pattern, explain (in 2 or 3 sentences) why you believe the cooperative learning
structure and the classroom design pattern is appropriate for the cooperative learning
lesson.

3. Write the five major topic of cooperative learning activity from your syllabus.
Read more: Classroom Activities for Cooperative Learning | eHow.com
http://www.ehow.com/info_7916223_classroom-activities-cooperative-
learning.html#ixzz1lyKIQN8i

9. SELF-ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

1. Provide an explanation of what cooperative learning is, what the benefits of

cooperative learning are and why you will be using it.

2. Enlist some critical thinking objective(s) for the cooperative learning

activity.

3. What is cooperative learning and what is different strategies use for it?

4. Describe principles of cooperative learning.

5. Discuss different cooperative learning structures.

ccxiv
 10. REFERENCES
Andrini, Beth. Cooperative Learning & Mathematics: A Multi-Structural Approach. San
Juan Capistrano,CA: Kagan Cooperative Learning, 1991.

Aronson, Elliot., et al. The Jigsaw Classroom. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage, 1978.

Artzt, A, F., and Claire M. Newman. How to Use Cooperative Learning in the
Mathematics Class.Reston, VA: National Council of Teachers of Mathematics, 1990.

Cohen, E, G. Designing Group work. 2nd ed. New York: Teachers College Press, 1994.

Cooper,J. (1994). Cooperative learning. Retrieved from

http://www.virginia.edu/~trc/cooperat.htm on January 2012.

Hassard, Jack. Science Experiences: Cooperative Learning and the Teaching of Science.
Menlo Park, CA: Addison-Wesley, 1990.

Johnson, David W., and Roger T. Johnson and Edythe Johnson Holubec. Cooperation in
the Classroom. Rev. ed. Edina, MN: Interaction Book Company, 1991.

Jacobs, G. M., Power, M. A., Loh, W. I. (2002). The teacher's sourcebook for cooperative
learning: Practical techniques, basic principles, and frequently asked questions. Thousand
Oaks, CA: Corwin Press. http://www.corwinpress.com/index1.asp?id=detail.asp?id=27713

Johnson, D. W., Johnson, R. T., & Stanne, M. B. (2000). Cooperative learning methods:
A meta-analysis. http://www.clcrc.com/pages/cl-methods.html.

Kagan, S. (1994). Cooperative learning. San Clemente, CA: Kagan Publications.

Panitz, T. (1996). A Definition of Collaborative Vs Cooperative Learning.

Raihan, A. (2009). ICT for Development: The Immediate Do-able. Paper presented in the
Conference on Development with Equity and Justice: Immediate Tasks for the Newly
Elected Government, Bangladesh-China Friendship Conference Centre. Dhaka:
Bangladesh; 28-29 March, 2009: Centre For Policy Dialogue (CPD).

Sharan, S and Shachar, H. (1988). Language and Learning in the Cooperative

Classroom. New York: Springer-Verlag

Slavin, R, E. (1990). Cooperative Learning: Theory, Research, and Practice. Englewood

Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall

ccxv
United Nations Children’s Fund [UNICEF], 2007, p.1, (Retrieved from
http://webworld.unesco.org/gcexhibition2003/169/online/instructstrat.html accessed on
27-10-2010.

ccxvi
Unit No. 8

TEACHING SKILLS

Written by: Naila Naseer

Reviewed by: Dr. Shaista Majid

ccxvii
 CONTENTS
Introduction -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------195

Objectives ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------196

1. Teaching Skills ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------197

2. Set Induction ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------197

3. Presentation -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------201

4. Identifying Learning Difficulties of Students --------------------------------------------204

5. Preparing Lessons According to the Individual Needs --------------------------------209

6. Students’ Evaluation --------------------------------------------------------------------------212

7. Self Assessment Questions ------------------------------------------------------------------214

8. Suggested Readings ---------------------------------------------------------------------------214

9. References ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------215

ccxviii
 INTRODUCTION
Education is back bone in the development of a society and teacher has a pivotal role in
the education system. Effectiveness of a teacher is always gauged on the basis of teaching
skills. Effective teaching skills are a precondition for translating theory into practice. The
criterion of effective teacher includes not only the subject expertise, but ability to create
an effective classroom environment in the classroom to reshape and redesign the
knowledge, stimulate intellectual curiosity, encourage innovative and independent
thinking of students. To inculcate these attributes in teachers, teacher training programs
put utmost stress on developing skills among student teachers. During teaching practice,
the novice student teacher uses teaching skills strictly per guidelines given by the teacher
educator, but this state of affair becomes different in real class room situations.

Most importantly, the aim of teachers has always been to assist students to learn
efficiently. To meet with this target, teachers have to be expert in applying different
teaching skills during instruction. To achieve learning targets and to maximize learning,
teachers must understand the significance of individual skill and the integration of
various skills. This is imperative in secondary classes where teacher uses various
techniques to keep students involved in the classroom, e.g. discussions, questions
answers, use of teaching aids to change the sensory focus and, in particular, summarize to
help students learn. A thorough knowledge of content matter is fundamental for teaching
effectively. Besides this, logical presentation of subject matter is also essential for
effective instruction. To plan the instruction in a logical sequenced way, teaching
expertise is crucial. Even experienced teachers need to refine this aspect and add value to
maximize the effect of teaching in the classroom (Sharma, 2000).

Teacher training programs inculcate effective teaching skills among teachers. Such Pre-
service training programs assist teachers in grasping different teaching-learning theories
related to help them to design subject matter, develop curriculum, and know
psychological principles of andragogy and pedagogy. Such trainings foster teachers to
learn the basics to teaching-learning process. Without understanding of how and under
what circumstances a pupil becomes engaged in instructional activities, mapping a
learning environment is vague. The circumstances under which students engage in
learning include the classroom environment, the explicit teaching strategy used, and the
place of the learning goal. In executing plans for instruction, a significant role is the
introduction of introductory experiences a teacher applies to produce the yearning high

ccxix
level of students’ involvement. Techniques for set induction are crucial for planning and
following precise procedures for getting the best of instruction. Pre-service training
programs make use of a range of techniques i.e. simulation, demonstration, and
especially, micro teaching to increase teaching skills among novices. Much value is
attached to proper use of set induction, presentation, understanding students’
psychological needs and students’ evaluation (Murthy, 2008).

There are two aspects of effective teaching. One aspect focuses on the teaching behavior
and second aspect emphasizes on learning outcomes. Effective teacher is one who
intellectually effective and utilizes different approaches during instruction by applying
different learning activities. Implementation of teaching principles in the classroom is
facilitated with certain skills acquired by teachers through education and training.
Teaching skills is the combination of verbal and non-verbal behavior of a teacher. These
skills can be examined and gauged in terms of a student’s change in behavior. This
indicates that teaching skills are instructional techniques used by teachers to make
teaching learning viable by initiating two way communications between teacher and
student. Teacher’s performance is judged by the ability to know where and how to apply
these skills. Teaching skills are essential for teachers as the means to accomplish the
eventual target of bringing constructive and desired change in the behavior of the
students. All the teaching skills are interrelated and indispensible for each other.
Teacher’s success is not determined not by the number of skills he/she applies in the
class, but depends on how these skills are interlinked, regulated and adapted to make
teaching an effective tool in helping students to become active learners, explorers and
critical thinkers (Bhargava, 2009).

OBJECTIVES

After reading this unit, you will be able to:

1. Gain knowledge about importance of teaching skills.
2. Identify different teaching skills.
3. Explain the nature, importance and different types of set induction.
4. Discuss the process of identifying learning difficulties of students.
5. Examine the worth of preparing lessons according to the individual needs.
6. Analyze the importance of students’ evaluation.

ccxx
 1. TEACHING SKILLS

Teaching is an indispensable part of education. Its unique function is to deliver

knowledge, expand understanding and talents. It is generally linked with imparting of 3
R’s (reading, writing, arithmetic). The teacher plays a fundamental role in imparting
knowledge to the learners. Hence, teaching does not primarily mean telling. It is rather
helping students to learn. This means the focus is on the learners instead on teachers. A
teacher needs to get into the shoes of the students to know what they need and where they
are in understanding a particular subject matter. This demands certain teaching skills
from teacher to have an insight regarding the level of students’ understanding. The
teaching skills are defined as a group of teaching operations or behaviors or acts, which
are aimed to assist students’ learning directly or indirectly. To know how to teach is the
great art of teaching (Brookfield, 1995). Here are some teaching skills which are
necessary for effective teaching. These include set induction, presentation of content in a
meaningful way, identification of students’ learning difficulties, preparation of lessons
according to individual needs, and students’ evaluation. You will read the detail of each
skill and grasp the importance of these on the following pages.

2. SET INDUCTION
Cheek (2006) says that sometimes students do not understand the lesson and disturb
their classes. The opening of every lesson is imperative because this occasion is the
base for understanding so that the rest of the lesson is established. An effective proactive
teacher obtains the students’ attention before launching the lesson. When all the students’
attention is collectively obtained, it is called set induction. It is also called anticipatory
set, and sometimes labeled as a "hook" to capture the learner's attention. Basic purpose of
using set induction is to place students into a receptive frame of mind and to create an
organizing framework for the ideas, principles, or information that is to follow. Teacher
can use this skill technically in several ways i.e. teacher can use an announcement, apply
a set of instructions, and ask a provocative question. Teacher can also launch the lesson
by telling exciting stories about the lesson and motivate students by using examples or
analogies to extend the understanding and the application of abstract ideas.

Set induction is about preparation of lessons. When the students are set, they are ready to
learn. Set induction is thus about getting them ready, inducing them into the right mind-
set. Sets are used before any new activity, from introduction of a new concept to giving
homework. It is important in each set both to create clarity about what is expected happen

ccxxi
(both what you will do and what they should do), and to create motivation for what to
occur, with students being fully engaged in the learning.

Set is a mental state of readiness, in which, induction brings it on. Set Induction gets
learners thinking and ready for the lesson. Anticipatory set is another name used. Set
induction should contain a statement of the learning to provide a reference point between
what the student knows and the new material, thus creating a link from one lesson or
class to the next. Moreover it must relate the lesson’s objectives; and involve the learner
in the learning. Relating the objective to some experience past, present and future helps in
retention and transfer at a later time. Teacher can use certain techniques for involvement
of the learner in the learning i.e. Covert, Overt, Questions, Activity, Pictures, Objects,
Cartoons, Stories, Anecdotes, Outlines, Transparencies, Summarizing etc.

Set induction is useful strategy to explain prospective benefits to the learner, providing
obvious instructions and describing what is going to happen.

The STEP acronym may be used to help remember what to do:

 Start: Welcome the students and settle them down and gain attention.
 Transact: Understand their expectations and explain yours. Link with previous
learning.
 Evaluate: Assess the gap between their expectations and current reality. Clarify any
discrepancies for them.
 Progress: Move on to the main body of learning.

There are several reasons for using set induction to induce students to concentrate and
learn.
1. To focus attention on what is to be learned.
2. To create a frame of reference before or during a lesson.
3. To give meaning to a new concept or principle.
4. To stimulate student interest and involvement.

The question arises “how” set induction is used. Set induction is used for preliminary
attention gaining and orientation purposes. For preliminary attention gaining purpose,
teacher can give pause/ look at students and wait for their response. For orientation
purpose, teacher can select an event, process, object or device which matches objectives.
The teacher also needs to know “when” to induce a set. Sets are appropriate for almost
any learning activity. For example, a set is appropriate:
 At the start of a unit
 Before a discussion.
 Before a question-and-answer period.
 When assigning homework.
 Before hearing a panel discussion.
 Before student reports,
 When assigning student reports.
 Before a film or other media event.

ccxxii
 Before a homework assignment based on a discussion that followed a filmstrip.

The most effective sets are those that catch the students' attention and interest them in the
material.
Activity No. 1
Give short answers to the following questions:
1. What do you understand by teaching skills?
2. Define set induction.
3. Explain the acronym “STEP”.
4. When set induction is appropriate?
5. What are the reasons to use set induction?

2.1 Importance of Set Induction:

Alliss (2011) says that many teachers spend outrageously little time preparing their
students for classroom activities. Often this preparation consists only of telling their
students to read some story by the next class session or to watch some demonstration
carefully. With such a limited introduction, could any teacher truly expect students to be
attentive and eager to learn the material?
Several psychological experiments have demonstrated the importance of set induction in
learning. Research indicates that activities preceding a learning task influence the
performance of the task. The research also indicates that the effectiveness of a set
depends somewhat on the situation to which it is applied. Hence, teachers must find those
kinds of sets most appropriate to their purposes and must modify these sets to fit the
specific classroom situation.
In most cases, the initial instructional move of the teacher should be to establish a set.
The set focuses students' attention on some familiar person, object, event, condition, or
idea. The established set functions as a point of reference around which the students and
the teacher communicate. The teacher uses this point of reference as a link between
familiar and new or difficult material. Furthermore, an effective set encourages student
interest and involvement in the main body of the lesson.
The establishment of a set usually occurs at the beginning of a class period, but it may
occur during the session. Set induction is appropriate whenever the activity, the goal of
the content of the lesson is changed so that a new or modified frame of reference is
needed. Set induction is also used to build continuity from lesson to lesson and from unit
to unit. Thus, a new set may be linked to an established set to a series of sets.
All of us have experienced the influence of set induction on our responses to a situation.
If we have been told that some person is a brilliant scientist, we respond differently than
we would if we had been told he or she was a star athlete. What we "learn" during our
conversation with this person will depend in part on what we have been told. Similarly,
whatever information a teacher gives students about the degree of difficulty and format of
a test will probably affect the way they study for it.

ccxxiii
Suppose that a teacher wants the students to read Chapter Six in their textbooks as
homework. Suppose Chapter Six is about the “Independence of Pakistan”. What remarks
or activities will produce the most learning for the next day? The teacher could say,
"Now class, for tomorrow I want all of you to read chapter six in the text." Such a weak
set would normally produce a weak response. The next day the teacher might discover
that half the class had not read the assignment, and that the other half, although claiming
to have read it, was unable to discuss it in any depth.
The teacher might have said, "For tomorrow, I want you to read Chapter Six in the text
and come to class prepared for a discussion." This set is an improvement. It gives the
students more information about eh instructional goal; they are to prepare for a
discussion. But the students need a good deal more information before they will be able,
or disposed, to prepare themselves for an interesting, stimulating discussion. Exactly
what will be discussed? What points should they consider as they read? What should be
the focus while they read? How should they use previously learned material? Should they
study facts or principles? Should they compare? Should they contrast? Both? Neither?
Activity No. 2
Discuss importance of set induction while teaching at primary level.

2.2 Types of Set Induction:

Set induction can be used by a teacher by variety of ways. Some of the set induction
types include facilitating sets, motivating sets, and summary.
 Facilitating Sets
Facilitating set is used to summarize information presented in previous lessons. It is
also used to summarize information that will occur. In short, teacher can use facilitating
set to emphasize the cognitive aspects of a new lesson by reviewing or summarizing.
 Motivating Sets
By using this type of set, teacher can catch the students’ attention and arouse
curiosity. In motivating set, teacher poses interesting questions and uses dramatic
appeal. It also creates a need or interest among students and induces an affective or
emotional response.
 Summary
It is best to provide both motivating and facilitating sets. Teacher can monitor
behavior by involving students in overt behavior.

Set Induction Example:

Here is one example of set induction. If a teacher is teaching hypertension topic to 10th
grade biology class, set induction may be used as following:
“How many of you have a friend or a family member that has a heart problem or blood
condition? (After posing the question, teacher waits for the students’ answers and
proceeds towards the topic).
Well, today we are going to learn about hypertension and its causes.
Making healthy lifestyle choices and starting those habits now can help you in preventing
this disease in your future”.

ccxxiv
 Activity No. 3.
Read “Types of set induction” carefully. Which type do you think is
more effective to teach at primary level?
3. PRESENTATION
Kyriacou (1998) highlights that lesson presentation is comprised of learning experiences
which a teacher sets up to achieve the learning objectives. Basically, presentation
introduces new information, checks learner comprehension of the new material, and
models the tasks that the learners will do in the practice stage. There are variety of
teaching strategies, and as a result of it, there is now a wide range of learning activities
which a teacher can set up to achieve best results. Moreover, teachers are actively
encouraged and expected to make use of a number of different teaching methods in their
program of lessons. According to Kelley (2010) teaching/presentation includes input,
modeling, and checking for understanding.

1. Input: The teacher provides the information needed for students to gain the
knowledge or skill through lecture, film, tape, video, pictures, etc.

2. Modeling: Once the material has been presented, the teacher uses it to show
students examples of what is expected as an end product of their work. The critical
aspects are explained through labeling, categorizing, comparing, etc. Students are
taken to the application level (problem-solving, comparison, summarizing, etc.)

3. Checking for Understanding: Determination of whether students have "got it"

before proceeding. It is essential that students practice doing it right so the teacher
must know that students understand before proceeding to practice. If there is any
doubt that the class has not understood, the concept/skill should be re-taught before
practice begins.
 Questioning strategies: asking questions that go beyond mere recall to
probe for the higher levels of understanding is necessary to ensure memory
network binding and transfer. Bloom's Taxonomy of Educational Objectives
provides a structure for questioning that is hierarchical and cumulative. By
using this taxonomy, teachers can structure questions at the level of proximal
development, i.e., a level at which the pupil is prepared to cope. Questions
progress from the lowest to the highest of the six levels of the cognitive
domain of the Taxonomy of Educational Objectives: knowledge,
comprehension, application, analysis, synthesis, and evaluation. During
presentation, questioning skill is indispensable for pupils’ active participation
and long term learning.

3.1 The Components of Presentation Skills:

According to Kyriacou (1998) teacher’s manner is considered the key element in lesson
presentation. Here are some components of lesson presentation skills which a teacher is
supposed to posses. These are:

ccxxv
 Voice: Teacher should speak in a clear, firm voice and vary his volume and pitch
when he wants to emphasize something. Make sure that all students can hear
teacher’s voice easily but be sure not to shout or talk so loud that his/her sound
irritates students.

 Tone: Many teachers confuse voice and tone. Tone is the ‘feeling’ that emanates
from voice and mannerisms. A tone that is confident and warm, and not dry or ego-
centric works well in projecting a comfortable feeling to the students.

 Vocabulary: While presenting a lecture, teacher should stay away from unfamiliar
terms and jargon as much as possible. If there is a need to introduce technical terms
and jargon, teacher should take the time to define them for students to understand.
Acronyms fall into this category. If teacher has to use them, then students should
be told what the acronyms stand for.

 Humor: A teacher with a good sense of humor can actually help to create a more
relaxed learning atmosphere for the students. Humor in teaching has been known to
liven up boring material and helps to diminish the traditional idea that the teacher is
dominant and the students are subordinate. Too much humor can be detrimental.
Teacher wants the students to know that he takes his work seriously so they will too.

 Body Language: It is a known fact that students respond better to a teacher who is
moderately active and moves around the room to connect with students. The
teacher who stands at the board or sits at his chair all the day does nothing to
present an image of comfort in the classroom. On the other hand, getting too close
to a student’s personal space is not good either. Teacher might want to try teaching
from the back of the room when students are doing exercises so that teacher can
readily see if anyone if having problems without making them draws attention to
themselves. Questions such as "how is it going" as teacher approaches a
workstation prevents him from startling the student.

Here are some tips by Flagler and Hamlin (2009) for teachers to make presentation more
effective and attractive for students:

 Teacher should know the material. He should have the content well in hand. Most
problems can be alleviated by being very well prepared.
 Teacher should show interest in the topic to be taught. He must try to find something
unique of special interest about the topic and most importantly, shows your enthusiasm
and interest. An enthusiastic teacher will get an enthusiastic audience.
 Teacher should also know the audience. Whom will he be presenting to? How
involved with the topic is his audience? What level of sophistication does his
audience have with the topic? Does he expect them to be asking questions? How
teacher’s presentation of the material will foster questioning, comments or
arguments etc.
 Teacher should prepare an outline of his talk in advance. The fewer notes teacher
uses the more natural his talk will be. Good teachers always get a clear idea of the

ccxxvi
 main points and supporting information, anecdotes, etc. Keep it simple and to the
point and utilize all the appropriate parts of a speech including introduction, body
and conclusion.
 There should be appropriate utilization of visual aids. They are a good way to draw
and maintain interest from the students as well as highlight main points. Teacher
must be sure they are appropriate and support his presentation. Check them out to be
sure they work. When teacher does not use them, set them aside or cover them up.
 Good teachers always practice their presentation. Teacher should talk to himself
OUT LOUD going through all the motions and gestures he expects to use during
his presentation. He should try to make the practice as real as possible. It is easy to
start practicing with notes, teacher will quickly find that he will no longer need
them and his presentation will be more natural.
 Look sharp and expect butterflies. Teacher shouldn’t be fooled! Everyone is
nervous to some degree; some people hide it better than others. Preparation is an
important event. Teacher should dress, eat, and sleep appropriately.
 Teacher should try to smile, speak and gesture as naturally as possible. It is important
to remember that the more one practice’s the more at ease one will become.
 Don't apologize. Teacher should not downgrade his self by making excuses either
at the beginning or the end of his presentation. Rather, he should stand up. Give his
talk with enthusiasm. Don't drag it out. Then, sit down and let others decide how
well he did-unbiased by any apologies from him.
 Giving a good presentation requires skill. Above all, teacher must be well prepared
and practiced. Be observant of others. Watch what they do well and how teacher
thinks they can improve.

Activity No. 4

Fill in the blanks.

1. ------------------ is comprised of learning experiences which a teacher sets
up to achieve the learning objectives.
2. Teaching/presentation includes input, ------------------, and checking for
understanding
3. In ------------------ the teacher provides the information needed for students to
gain the knowledge or skill through lecture, film, tape, video, pictures, etc.
4. Teacher’s manner is considered the key element in ------------------.
5. Many teachers ------------------ voice and tone.
6. Teacher should ------------------ in a clear, firm voice and vary his volume
and pitch when he wants to emphasize something.
7. While presenting a ------------------, teacher should stay away from
unfamiliar terms and jargon as much as possible.
8. A teacher with a good sense of ------------------ can actually help to create a
more relaxed learning atmosphere for the students.
9. Teacher should show ------------------ in the topic to be taught.
10. Teacher should try to smile, speak and ------------------ as naturally as
possible.

ccxxvii
ccxxviii
4. IDENTIFYING LEARNING DIFFICULTIES OF STUDENTS
Every student has a unique identity, mind, learning styles and learning needs. During
instruction students face different learning difficulties. Interstate New Teachers
Assessment and Support Consortium (INTASC) (2010, Pp.1-4) has presented some
standards for teachers to identify learning difficulties of students.

Standard # l: The teacher understands the central concepts, tools of inquiry, and
structures of the discipline(s) he or she teaches and can create learning experiences that
make these aspects of subject matter meaningful for students.

To accomplish this standard, the teacher should understand major concepts, assumptions,
debates, processes of inquiry, and ways of knowing that are central to the discipline(s)
s/he teaches. The teacher should also understand how students 'conceptual frameworks
and their misconceptions for an area of knowledge can influence their learning. In this
regard, the teacher relates his/her disciplinary knowledge to other subject areas.

The teacher realizes that subject matter knowledge is not a fixed body of facts but is
complex and ever-evolving. S/he seeks to keep abreast of new ideas and understandings
in the field. The teacher appreciates multiple perspectives and conveys to learners how
knowledge is developed from the vantage point of the learner. The teacher has
enthusiasm for the discipline(s) s/he teaches and sees connections to everyday life. The
teacher is committed to continuous learning and engages in professional discourse about
subject matter knowledge and children's learning of the discipline.

The teacher can do following performances:

 The teacher effectively uses multiple representations and explanations of
disciplinary concepts that capture key ideas and links them to students' prior
understandings.
 The teacher can represent and use differing viewpoints, theories, "ways of
knowing," and methods of inquiry in his/her teaching of subject matter concepts.
 The teacher can evaluate teaching resources and curriculum materials for their
comprehensiveness, accuracy, and usefulness in representing particular ideas and
concepts.
 The teacher engages students in generating knowledge and testing hypotheses
according to the methods of inquiry and standards of evidence used in the
discipline.
 The teacher develops and uses curricula that encourage students to see, question,
and interpret ideas from diverse perspectives.
 The teacher can create interdisciplinary learning experiences that encourage students to
integrate knowledge, skills, and methods of inquiry from several subject areas.

ccxxix
Standard #2: The teacher understands how children learn and develop, and can provide
learning opportunities that support their intellectual, social, and personal development.

To accomplish this standard, the teacher should understand how learning occurs-how
students construct knowledge, acquire skills, and develop habits of mind-and knows how
to use instructional strategies that promote student learning for a wide range of student
abilities. The teacher should also understand that students 'physical, social, emotional,
moral, and cognitive development influence learning and knows how to address these
factors when making instructional decisions. Moreover, the teacher should be aware of
expected developmental progressions and ranges of individual variation within each
domain (physical, social, emotional, moral, and cognitive), can identify levels of
readiness in learning, and understands how development in any one domain may affect
performance in others. The teacher should also appreciate individual variation within
each area of development, show respect for the diverse talents of all learners, and must be
committed to help them develop self confidence and competence. The teacher is
supposed to be disposed to use students 'strengths as a basis for growth, and their errors
as an opportunity for learning.

The teacher can do following performances:

 The teacher assesses individual and group performance in order to design
instruction that meets learners 'current needs in each domain (cognitive, social,
emotional, moral, and physical)and that leads to the next level of development.
 The teacher stimulates student reflection on prior knowledge and links new ideas to
already familiar ideas, making connections to students 'experiences, providing
opportunities for active engagement, manipulation, and testing of ideas and
materials, and encouraging students to assume responsibility for shaping their
learning tasks.
 The teacher accesses students 'thinking and experiences as a basis for instructional
activities by, for example, encouraging discussion, listening and responding to
group interaction, and eliciting samples of student thinking orally and in writing.

Standard #3: The teacher understands how students differ in their approaches to learning
and creates instructional opportunities that are adapted to diverse learners.

To achieve this standard, the teacher should understand and identify differences in
approaches to learning and performance, including different learning styles, multiple
intelligences, and performance modes, and may design instruction that helps use students'
strengths as the basis for growth. The teacher should also understand and provide
adaptations for areas of exceptionality in learning, including learning disabilities, visual
and perceptual difficulties, and special physical or mental challenges. The teacher should
have knowledge about the process of second language acquisition and about strategies to
support the learning of students whose first language is not English. The teacher needs to
know how students 'learning is influenced by individual experiences, talents, and prior
learning, as well as language, culture, family and community values. In this regard, the

ccxxx
teacher should have a well-grounded framework for understanding cultural and
community diversity.

The teacher can do following performances:

 The teacher believes that all children can learn at high levels and persists in helping
all children achieve success.
 The teacher appreciates and values human diversity, shows respect for students'
varied talents and perspectives, and is committed to the pursuit of "individually
configured excellence.
 The teacher respects students as individuals with differing personal and family
backgrounds and various skills, talents, and interests.
 The teacher is sensitive to community and cultural norms.
 The teacher makes students feel valued for their potential as people, and helps them
learn to value each other.
 The teacher identifies and designs instruction appropriate to students' stages of
development, learning styles, strengths, and needs.
 The teacher uses teaching approaches that are sensitive to the multiple experiences
of learners and that address different learning and performance modes.
 The teacher makes appropriate provisions (in terms of time and circumstances for
work, tasks assigned, and communication and response modes) for individual
students who have particular learning differences or needs.
 The teacher can identify when and how to access appropriate services or resources
to meet exceptional learning needs.
 The teacher can identify when and how to access appropriate resources to meet the
needs of students with particular talents.
 The teacher seeks to understand students’ families, cultures, and communities, and
uses this information as a basis for connecting instruction to students’ experiences
(e. g. drawing explicit connections between subject matter and community matters,
making assignments that can be related to students’ experiences and cultures).
 The teacher brings multiple perspectives to the discussion of subject matter,
including attention to students 'personal, family and community experiences and
cultural norms.
 The teacher creates a learning community in which individual differences are
respected.

According to Sedita (2001), every student has an individual learning style based on his
unique set of learning strengths and weaknesses. How can teachers present information in
ways that suit various learning styles? What procedures should they follow to ensure that
students understand and master language arts skills? The following teaching principles
are universal; they represent good pedagogy for any instruction setting:

1. Apply Multi Sensory Strategies:

Multi sensory instruction means teaching that utilizes all learning modes, including
visual, auditory, and tactile-kinesthetic. The principle of multi-sensory instruction

ccxxxi
 is useful beyond simply teaching reading and spelling. It should be used to teach
any information or skill. Educators should encourage students to see, hear, re-
verbalize, read, copy, write, discuss, and touch what they are learning. When
teachers present information, they should appeal to all three modes of learning:
visual, auditory and tactile-kinesthetic. Students need to be shown as well as told
how to do something. Whenever possible, teachers should give an example or
demonstrate skill.

2. Practice to the Point of Automatization:

Automatization means learning a skill to the point that the student can accomplish a
task with ease, speed, and little deliberate attention. Automatic reading occurs
when a response to a letter, syllable or word becomes so established that the
student does not have to consciously try to select an appropriate response.

Automatization is not only essential to reading. Automatization is important for all

language arts tasks. Every writing, spelling, comprehension, organization, and
study skill should be practiced until it becomes a habit (e.g., spelling rules and
patterns, strategies for identifying and formulating main ideas, grammar and
punctuation rules, sentence and paragraph structures, and study skills strategies
such as note taking and summarizing).

3. Micro-Unit and Structure Tasks:

Micro-uniting, also known as task analysis means breaking down a skill or task
into a series of smaller steps or units. Each step is taught in turn, and then
eventually combined to learn the larger skills or complete the larger task. The
hierarchical nature of language structures lend themselves quite well to micro-
united instruction. For example, students should learn and practice each step of the
decoding scope and sequence (i.e., consonant and vowel sounds, consonant blends,
double vowel combinations, etc.) so they can eventually apply these combined
decoding skills to read text.

Often, assignments such as writing a composition or reading a text chapter can be

overwhelming much in the same way that hiking a mountain might be to a novice
hiker. When the hiker is given a trail guide that provides step-by-step directions
and information about each part of the trail, the once formidable task becomes a
series of manageable steps, each building upon the other. If teachers micro-unit
their instruction, and teach students how to apply their own micro-uniting strategies
to complete assignments, students will see a larger, overwhelming task in terms of
manageable steps that they are confident they can complete.
Structure is key to micro-uniting. Tutorial goals should be clear and specific.
Tutorial lessons should be planned and presented step by step. Directions should be
clear and given one at a time.

4. Provide Direct, Systematic Instruction:

ccxxxii
 Although some students are able to intuit the structure of language and strategies
for developing language arts skills, most need explicit, direct instruction in
methods for reading, spelling, writing, and study skills.

Instruction should be systematic, starting with the most basic element of a

skill, and progressing to more advanced elements. There is a scope and
sequence for learning reading, spelling, writing and study skills, and it is best
to follow those sequences without skipping steps. Teachers should be careful
not to make assumptions about what skills students possess. Some st udents
may appear to have some fairly advanced skills, such as writing an essay or
taking notes, but at the same time they may be lacking in some very basic
skills, such as telling time or spelling common sight words. The older and/or
more cognitively adept a student is, the greater the temptation to make
assumptions about skills.

5. Review and Spiral Back:

Sometimes students appear to learn something only to forget it a day, week, or
month later. To achieve automatization, students need to constantly review and
spiral back over previously learned skills and information. Do not assume that one
demonstration of mastery is sufficient over a length of time. Teachers should
provide frequent repetition of “old” skills, while slowly introducing and practicing
new skills.

6. Provide Immediate Feedback and Opportunities for Success:

Provide immediate, specific feedback. When students make a mistake, you should
offer corrective negative feedback, which doesn’t threaten or harm their
confidence, but does allow them to see their mistakes. “Can you do this in another
way?” or “You did this part O.K., but then what happened?” are examples of
corrective feedback questions. The feedback must be given as immediately as
possible so the student does not repeat the mistake or learn an incorrect pattern.
Finally, offer praise that is genuine. When the student does something well, provide
positive feedback, but not to the point that it becomes meaningless with overuse.

Activity No. 5

If you have to teach at primary level, what strategies you will

follow to identify learning difficulties of students?

ccxxxiii
 5. PREPARING LESSONS ACCORDING
TO THE INDIVIDUAL NEEDS
Lesson planning is one of the most important and basic conditions in organizing learning,
being one of the main duties of the teacher as a regulator of his pupils’ learning. There is
no doubt that organizing others’ learning in a certain situation is considered to be a
magnificent job which has its rules and conditions that a dutiful teacher should be aware
of according to the available circumstances. Meaningful planning is a major step towards
success to pave the way for a suitable atmosphere for learning inside or outside the
classroom without wasting time in useless affairs.

Preparation is the teacher’s best assistance in performing his duty whatever his lesson is
(easy or difficult). A teacher should plan for his lesson whatever excellent the teacher is.
It is not reasonable for anyone to excel any work without preparation and being ready to
perform it. Inefficiency in this domain is considered an inefficacy in one of the main
duties of his job. The teacher plans his year or term plan before the school year begins by
specifying the main features of the subject (distribution, objectives, methods, techniques,
suggested time and methods of evaluation). The teacher should also write his daily plan
regularly by stating the behavioral objectives for each period and what techniques, aids,
activities and timing does each objective need in addition to the various suitable
evaluation techniques. Each teacher should be aware of the difference between the year
plan and the lesson plan (daily plan) that lies in the level of execution i.e. the daily plan is
prepared for one period while the year plan covers a complete school year or term. As for
objectives, the year plan is characterized by generalization and the daily plan is
characterized by specification.

Teacher’s mental preparation (understanding his subject matter), psychological (getting

his pupils ready to receive the new experiences) and materially (audio-visual aids, class
findings etc.) in addition to his written preparation. Each period should have its own
preparation, in case of teaching the same preparation in more than one class in different
days, the teacher should denote to that by writing the date. If classes are different in the
scientific standard or individual differences, the teacher must prepare the lesson for each
class according to the different standards because lesson planning is related to the learner
himself. Organizing the course and arranging its different elements logically in order to
make the lesson well-linked and clear. Preparation should be free from grammatical or
spelling mistakes. Handwriting should be good and clear. The teacher should take his
preparation notebook with him in each classroom to make use of it. He shouldn’t read
from it in a noticeable way, instead, he can have a look whenever he needs that.
Processing difficulties during the lesson daily planning leads to logical scientific and
proper preparation. Revision lesson preparation should include the objectives and topics
of the revision in addition to the aids and the questions that should be discussed. The test
lesson preparation must contain objectives, questions and instructions of the test. The

ccxxxiv
teacher should organize the school library or any other learning resources visits and he
should prepare for that in the special field according to the directives concerning this
matter. The teacher should write the remarks and recommendations - written by the
educational supervisor in the visits record - to be aware of what he is asked to execute in
order to improve and develop his performance to facilitate the follow up process done by
the school headmaster and the educational supervisor. Free reading and benefiting from
the scientific and educational references can help in the teacher’s continuous self
cultivation and professional growth to enrich his experiences.

A teacher has to follow certain steps to prepare lessons according to individual needs.
These include the following steps:
 Preparation
 Presentation
 Practice
 Evaluation
 Expansion

The five parts of a lesson may all take place in one class session or may extend over
multiple sessions, depending on the nature of the topic and the activities. The lesson plan
should outline who will do what in each part of the lesson. The time allotted for
preparation, presentation, and evaluation activities should be no more than 8-10 minutes
each. Communication practice activities may run a little longer.

1. Preparation:
As the class begins, teacher should give students a broad outline of the day’s goals
and activities so they know what to expect. He must help them focus by eliciting
their existing knowledge of the day’s topics. Teacher should:
 Use discussion or homework review to elicit knowledge.
 Use discussion of what students do and/or like to do to elicit their knowledge
of the topic they will address in communication activities.

2. Presentation/Modeling:
Teacher should move from preparation into presentation of the content of the
lesson and relevant learning strategies. Present the strategy first if it will help
students absorb the lesson content. Presentation provides the lesson’s input that
gives students the foundation for their learning. Input comes from the instructor
and from course textbooks. An important part of the presentation is structured
output, in which students practice the form that the instructor has presented. In
structured output, accuracy of performance is important. Structured output is a type
of communication that is found only in language classrooms. Because production is
limited to pre-selected items, structured output is not truly communicative.

3. Practice:
In this part of the lesson, the focus shifts from the instructor as presenter to the
students as completers of a designated task. Students work in pairs or small groups

ccxxxv
 on a topic-based task with a specific outcome. Completion of the task may require
the bridging of an information gap. The instructor observes the groups and acts as a
resource when students have questions that they cannot resolve themselves.
Activities for the practice segment of the lesson may come from a textbook or be
designed by the instructor.

4. Evaluation:
When all students have completed the practice task, reconvene the class as a group
to recap the lesson. Ask students to give examples of how they used the content
and learning or communication strategies to carry out the academic task.
Evaluation is useful for four reasons:
 It reinforces the material that was presented earlier in the lesson.
 It provides an opportunity for students to raise questions of usage and style.
 It enables the instructor to monitor individual student comprehension and
learning.
 It provides closure to the lesson.

5. Expansion:
Expansion activities allow students to apply the knowledge they have gained in the
classroom to situations outside it. Expansion activities include out-of-class
observation assignments, in which the instructor asks students to find examples of
something or to use a strategy and then report back.

Activity No. 6.
1. Make a chart and highlight the importance of lesson preparation, then
discuss it with a nearby primary school teacher.
2. Identify the main steps of lesson preparation.

ccxxxvi
 6. STUDENTS’ EVALUATION
According to Tufo (2002) evaluation is the process of determining the value or worth of a
program, course, or other initiative, toward the ultimate goal of making decisions about
adopting, rejecting, or revising the innovation. It should not be confused with assessment,
which encompasses methods for measuring or testing performance on a set of
competencies. Evaluation is the more inclusive term, often making use of assessment data
in addition to many other data sources. While student evaluation is to make decisions
about teaching and students’ performance. Understanding the purposes of evaluation
helps teachers make decisions about the types of assessments and criteria they will use in
evaluating student progress. The purpose of an assessment may be clarified by asking
"who is this information for and how will it be used.
There are different techniques for students’ evaluation. Davis (1993) has highlighted
following tools for students’ evaluation:
 Questioning: A very simple tool for checking effective teaching is to incorporate
specific questions within a lesson to gauge student understanding of the material.
For example, an instructor may ask students to verbally answer a question similar
to one that will be asked on an exam. This tool is more useful than simply asking if
students have any questions because students who are confused may not be able to
articulate their questions. Moreover, some students may falsely believe they
understand the lesson and not ask questions. Checking for understanding within a
lesson helps the instructor discover students’ level of learning and to make
adjustments during the lesson itself.
 Classroom Response Systems: A problem with simple questioning is that an
instructor generally will get a response from only one or two students rather than
the entire class. This problem can be resolved with a few strategies that fall under
the Classroom Response umbrella.
The first strategy is the easiest to implement. An instructor asks a multiple choice
question or makes an agree/disagree statement about the material. Students indicate
by the position of their thumb whether they believe the answer is A (upright), B
(sideways), or C (downward) or Agree (upright) or Disagree (downward).The
instructor can then quickly look around the room to determine how many students
have the correct answer.
The second strategy involves the use of colored index cards. Its method is identical
to the first strategy except that the instructor is using color coded cards for the
responses. The advantage of using colored index cards is that they are easier to see
than thumbs.
The third strategy involves the use of hand-held remote controls (“clickers”) to
measure student responses. The technology is linked to software in a computer,
either a laptop or a classroom computer and can keep a record of student responses.
Many instructors use this technology by imbedding the question into their
presentation software. Both the instructor and students receive immediate feedback
to the responses. In addition to the recordkeeping aspect of this system, a primary
advantage of clickers is student anonymity in their responses in the classroom. A

ccxxxvii
 major disadvantage is the cost and performance reliability of the clickers
themselves.
 Open Class Discussion: This technique can be used either during the class session
or by monitoring student online discussion. By asking discussion questions that
require critical thought, instructors are able to gauge students’ understanding of the
lesson material and whether they are making necessary connections to other course
material. Many times students believe they know the material but their
misunderstandings are revealed during discussion.
 Minute Paper: This evaluation tool is done at the end of class several times
during the quarter. It derives its name from the fact that students spend no more
than one minute answering any number of questions. The instructor reads the
responses before the next class meeting and responds appropriately. Examples of
questions asked are:
 What was the most important thing you learned during class?
 What unanswered questions do you have?
 What was the muddiest point for you?
 At what point this week were you most engaged as a learner?
 Can you summarize today’s lesson in one sentence? If so, please summarize it.
 What has been most helpful to you this week in learning the course material?
 Index Card: A variation on the Minute Paper is for the instructor to write the
responses to the following questions on a 3 x 5” index card following a
lesson:“What worked? What didn’t work? What are some ideas for changing the
lesson?”The 3 x 5 card limits the amount of information than can be written down
and serves as a reminder to write down ideas but to only spend a few minutes
writing them down. Attach the card to the lesson notes to serve as a reminder the
next time the lesson is taught.
 Course Exams and Assignments: Student success on course exams and
assignments are a powerful data source on teaching effectiveness. A short
questionnaire at the end of exams can ask students to identify which questions were
the most difficult to answer and why they were difficult. A pattern may develop
that can be used to make changes. Additionally, an instructor may ask students to
critique assignments. Questions instructors may ask are:
 Were instructions clear?
 Did the assignment help students learn course material?
 Were the expectations reasonable for the time-frame?
 How many hours were devoted to completing the assignment?
 Mid-quarter evaluation: An effective way of gauging student learning and
satisfaction is via anonymous mid-quarter evaluations. The evaluations can take a
variety of forms. A simple survey asking students to describe what is working,
what is not working, and suggestions for change can be conducted via paper-pencil
or online. Many of the course management systems have tools that allow
anonymous feedback. Instructors need to check with their system’s administrator to
find out how to do it. Many instructors provide 15-25 minutes of class time to a
neutral party for the purpose of getting feedback from students. A more formal
method is to use the same forms that are used for course evaluations. One thing to
note is that even if course changes cannot be made during the quarter the evaluation
takes place, mid-quarter evaluations allow instructors to engage in dialogue with
their students regarding the teaching-learning process and students will feel more
positive toward the instructor.

ccxxxviii
ccxxxix
 7. SELF ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS
Q. 1 Offer a working definition teaching skills.
Q. 2 “Set induction is about preparation of lessons”. Discuss in detail.
Q. 3 Elaborate different types of set induction.
Q. 4 Critically analyze importance of set induction.
Q. 5 Kelley (2010) says that “teaching/presentation includes input, modeling, and
checking for understanding”. Discuss with solid examples from Pakistan.
Q. 6 Elaborate components of presentation skills with examples.
Q. 7 Discuss some tips for teachers to make classroom presentation more effective.
Q. 8 Analyze different standards to identify learning difficulties of students.
Q. 9 Critically evaluate different strategies to identify learning difficulties of students.
Q. 10 “Preparation is the teacher’s best assistance in performing his duty whatever his
lesson is (easy or difficult)” critically analyze the statement.
Q. 11 Explain the steps to prepare lessons according to individual needs. Give examples
from Pakistan.
Q. 12 Define the terms “Evaluation” and “Students Evaluation”. Also highlight the
importance of students’ evaluation.
Q. 13 Critically discuss different techniques of students’ evaluation.

8. SUGGESTED READING
Chowdary, S. B. J. R., Raju, N., & Rao, D. B. (2004). New Delhi: Discovery Publishing
House.

Cooper, J. M., et.al. (2011) Classroom Teaching Skills. 9th Ed. USA: Wadsworth,
Cengage Learning.

Lewis, D., & White, D. (2008). Transferring your Teaching Skills into the Wider World:
Life Beyond the Classsroom. USA: Routledge.

Wragg, E. C. (1993). Primary Teaching Skills. New York: Routledge.

ccxl
 9. REFERENCES
Alliss, p. (2011). Materials for Microteaching. Retrieved from
http://www.d.umn.edu/~lmillerc/TeachingEnglishHomePage/5922/5922-MT1.html
Accessed on January 22, 2012.

Anderson, L.W. (1989). The effective teachers, Study guide and reading, New York:
Random House.

Aubertine, H. E. (1968). The Set Induction Process and Its Application in Teaching. The
Journal of Educational Research, (Volume 61, Number 8) p.264.

Bhargava, A. (2009). Comparative Study of Teaching Skills of In-Service Teachers

Trained through Regular and Distance Mode, Retrieved from
http://www.itdl.org/Journal/Aug_09/article02.htm, Accessed on December 12, 2012.

Brookfield, S. D. (1995).The Skillful Teacher on Technique, Trust and Responsiveness in

the Classroom. 1st Edition USA: Jossey Bass Publishers.Pg.No.38-42

Cheek, B. (2006). Microteaching, Retrieved from http://www.gp-

training.net/training/educational_theory/adult_learning/microteaching.htm Accessed on
January 10, 2012.
Davis, B.G. (1993). Tools for Teaching. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.

Hamlin, R., & Flager, J. (2009).Student Presentations Performing In front of others.

Retrieved from www.student_7790/stu/ev/presentation/staff.html, Accessed on January 1, 2012.

INTASC, (Interstate New Teachers Assessment and Support Consortium), Standards for
Teacher Development and Licensure. (2010). A Project of the Council of Chief State
School Officers. Retrieved from http://dpi.wi.gov/tepdl/standards.html, Accessed on
November 12, 2011.

Kelley, A. K. (2010).The Madeline Hunter Direct Instruction Model, Retrieved from

http://www.humboldt.edu/~tha1/hunter-eei.html#direct, Accessed on January 2, 2012.

Kyriacou, C. (1998). Essential Teaching Skills. UK: Stanely Thornes Publishers.

Murthy, G.S. (2008). Academic skills of teachers for student performance. New Delhi:
Rajat Publications.

Perrott, E. ((1982). Effective Teaching: A Practical Guide to Improving Your Teaching,

New York: Longman

ccxli
Porter, L. (1982). Giving and receiving feedback; it will never be easy, but it can be
better. In Porter, L. & Mohr, B. (Eds.), NTL reading book for human relations training
(pp. 42-45). Arlington, Virginia: NTL Institute.

Sakthiramalakshmi. (2011). Set Induction and Reinforcement Skills, Retrieved from

http://sakthiramalakshmi.wordpress.com/2011/05/10/set-induction-and-reinforcement-
skills/, Accessed on November 13, 2011.

Sharma, S.R. (2000). Modern teaching strategies, New Delhi: Omsons Publications.

Sedita. (2001). Learning Strategies, Retrieved from www.keystoliteracy.com, Accessed

on January 2, 2012.

Tufo, S. D. (2002). Classroom Evaluation. Retrieved from

http://www.oid.ucla.edu/publications/evalofinstruction/eval3, accessed on March 1, 2012

ccxlii
Unit No. 9

TEACHING TOOLS

Written by: Dr. Amtul Hafeez

Reviewed by: Dr. Tanzila Nabeel

ccxliii
 CONTENTS

Introduction -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------219

Objectives ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------219

1. The Teaching Tools ---------------------------------------------------------------------------220

2. Selecting the Audio Visual Material -------------------------------------------------------222

3. Planning to Use the Material ---------------------------------------------------------------222

4. Preparing for the Audio-Visual Activities ------------------------------------------------223

5. Kinds of Audio Visual Materials -----------------------------------------------------------224

6. Activities ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------235

7. Exercise ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------236

8. Self Assessment Questions ------------------------------------------------------------------236

9. Suggested Readings ---------------------------------------------------------------------------237

10. References ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------237

11. Web References --------------------------------------------------------------------------------238

ccxliv
 INTRODUCTION
Teaching tools are teaching aids that classroom teachers employ to help their students
learn quickly and thoroughly. A teaching tool can be as simple as a chalkboard or as
complex as a computer program. Because every individual learns in a different way,
teachers rely on these tools to explain concepts to students with a wide variety of learning
needs. Teaching tools are crucial for educators as they are keys in differentiating
instruction for all types of learners.

As we all know that today's age is the age of science and technology. The teaching
learning programs have also been affected by it. The process of teaching - learning
depends upon the different type of teaching tools available in the classroom.

OBJECTIVES
After study the material, it is hoped that you will be able to:

1. Explain the teaching tools

2. Identify the audio-video materials

3. Discuss kinds of audio visual aids.

4. Pin points the preparation for audio- visual activities.

5. Evaluate the planning to use the material

ccxlv
 1. THE TEACHING TOOLS
Every individual has the tendency to forget. Proper use of teaching tools helps to retain
more concepts permanently. Students can learn better when they are motivated properly
through different teaching tools.
Teaching tools develop the proper image when the students see, hear taste and smell
properly. Teaching tools provide complete example for conceptual thinking. The teaching
tools create the environment of interest for the students. Teaching tools helps to increase
the vocabulary of the students.
Teaching tools helps the teacher to get sometime and make learning permanent. Teaching
tools provide direct experience to the students.
(i) Need and Importance
Teaching aids play very important role in Teaching- Learning process. Importance
of Teaching aids are as follows:
1) Motivation: Teaching aids motivate the students so that they can learn better.
2) Clarification: Through teaching aids, the teacher clarifies the subject matter
more easily.
3) Discouragement of Cramming: Teaching aids can facilitate the proper
understanding to the students which discourage the act of cramming.
4) Increase the Vocabulary: Teaching aids helps to increase the vocabulary of
the students more effectively.
5) Saves Time and Money: Teaching aids are helpful to save time and money
6) Classroom Live and active: Teaching aids make the classroom live and active.
7) Avoids Dullness: Teaching aids motivate the students to take active part n
the classroom activities and avoid dullness.
8) Direct Experience: Teaching aids provide direct experience to the students
(ii) Purpose
The Teaching aids are very purposeful. These are used:
● To supplement and enrich teachers own teaching to make teaching-learning
more concrete
● To serve an instructional role in itself
● To create interest among the group
● To make teaching as an effective process
(iii) History
The globe is the earliest-known teaching tool. Originating in ancient Greece, the
globe has been used as an educational tool since as early as 150 B.C. The hornbook
was another early teaching tool. Used in classrooms starting in the mid-1400's, the
hornbook is a piece of paper containing the alphabet that was mounted on wood,
bone, or in some cases leather. The chalkboard was patented in 1923 by Samuel
Read Hall, and replaced the hornbook in classrooms around the world.

(iv) Types

ccxlvi
 There are many aids available these days. We may classify these aids as follows:
1) Visual Aids 2) Audio Aid 3) Audio - Visual Aid
1) Visual Aids
The aids which use sense of vision are called Visual aids. For example :-
actual objects, models, pictures, charts, maps, flash cards, flannel board,
bulletin board, chalkboard, overhead projector, slides etc. Out of these black
board and chalk are the commonest ones.

2) Audio Aids
The aids that involve the sense of hearing are called Audio aids. For
example: - radio, tape recorder, gramophone etc.

3) Audio - Visual Aids

The aids which involve the sense of vision as well as hearing are called
Audio- Visual aids. For example: - television, film projector, film strips etc.

Most teaching tools are visual in nature. Blackboards and whiteboards, posters,
calendars, charts, drawings, and overhead projectors are all examples of visual
teaching tools. This type of tool is important because many people learn best
through use of visual/special thinking. Some teaching tools are aurally-based.
These aural aids include recordings of spoken broadcasts and songs. Audio-visual
teaching tools include film projectors, videocassettes, DVDs, and movies on the
Web. Though audio-visual aids were once seen as a method for students to teach
themselves, they are now considered to be educational tools rather than a
replacement for teachers.

(v) Technology-Based Tools

Since the dawn of the technology age, computers have proved to be the most
multifaceted teaching tool available. With technology like digital video presenters,
power point presentations, and educational software, teachers are now able to
quickly and accurately enlarge any physical visual aid, create and edit
informational slides, and can ultimately provide their students with information in a
faster, more comprehensive way. Computers provide an interactive educational
experience that engages learners and makes the task of preparing lesson materials
less time-consuming for teachers.

(vi) Considerations
A few considerations in this aspect are suggested, though teaching tools are crucial
to successful teaching, they are not a replacement for quality teaching strategies.
Instead of relying upon teaching aids to do the instruction, these tools are used as
supplemental resources for educators. Many students cannot perform to their fullest
potential without the use of teaching tools, but no student can produce their best
work without a skilled teacher behind them. With a excess of multimedia resources
available, it is important to remember that teaching tools are meant to enrich
student learning, not provide it. Keeping these in view you should prepare a
planner which would integrate teaching tools with teaching strategies.

ccxlvii
 2. SELECTING THE AUDIO VISUAL MATERIAL
Audio-visual aids are intended to impart knowledge to the pupils through senses to
ensure quick and effective learning. No wise teacher can ignore the use of aids in order to
make his lesson more interesting and real. It is an admitted fact that the child learns
through the senses of sight and hearing have a great share in this process. But it should
always be borne in mind that these aids should be used as aids to teaching and should not
replace the teacher but revolutionize the methods of teaching.

For selecting the audio visual material these points may be kept in mind.
1. Audio visual aids should be integrated with learning.
2. Should be according to the age, intelligence and experiences of the students.
3. Should be suiting the physical, psychological, intellectual and social development
of the group.
4. Language should be familiar and understandable.
5. Should be accurate, truthful and realistic.
6. Should be motivational and highly informative.
7. Should be available in the need.

3. PLANNING TO USE THE MATERIAL

There is need of proper planning for using effective audio visual aids for the students;
Following are some suggestions which can be helpful for the planning to use the material.
1. The teacher must be trained and fully skilled in the use of the teaching aids. They
should be actually taught and does not used for deco rational or ornamental value in
the class.
2. While using the aid, active participation of the students should be sought.
3. The teaching aid should be adequately protected and preserved for maintaining due
interest and motivation of the students.
4. The teaching aid should be within the range of immediate availability in the hour of
urgent need.
5. The aid should be evaluated at regular intervals in order to know their use and
effect of learning.

ccxlviii
 4. PREPARING FOR THE AUDIO-VISUAL ACTIVITIES
The key to preparing effective audiovisual aids is to remember that they are only aids.
Their role is to add a visual dimension to the points that you made orally. They cannot
make those points for you; they can only reinforce them. When you plan for audiovisual
aids, follow these simple guidelines:
1. We can use them to summarize or show the sequence of content.
2. We can use them to visually interpret statistics by preparing charts and graphs that
illustrate what you will say.
3. We can use them to illustrate and reinforce your support statements.
4. We can use them to add visual clarity to your concepts and ideas.
5. We can use them to focus the attention of the target group on key points.
6. We should not project copies of printed or written text. Instead, summarize the
information and show only the key points on the visual aids. If the group must read
every word, use handouts for reading, either before or after your presentation.
7. Do not put yourself in the role of aiding your visuals: A presentation is primarily an
oral form of communication. If your only function is to read the information on
your overheads or slides, the target group will become easily bored.
8. Do not use copies of your transparencies as handouts. They reinforce what you are
saying-- they don't say it for you. If you want your target group to remember what
you meant, you'll need to provide written text in addition to any key point
summaries or charts that you need for your transparencies.
9. Do not use charts, graphs, or tables that contain more information than you want
to provide. The group will have difficulty focusing on the point that you're trying
to make.

ccxlix
 5. KINDS OF AUDIO VISUAL MATERIALS
Teachers may wish to combine different types of media in a single presentation. The
media used most often are overhead projection transparencies, flip charts, slides,
blackboards, and handouts. Teachers may occasionally use videotapes and/or films.

According to Edger Dale: “audio visual aids are those devices by the use of which
communication of ideas between persons and groups in various teaching and training
situations is helped” These are also termed as multi sensory materials.

Audio visual aids are sensitive tools used in teaching and as avenues for learning. These
are planned educational materials that appeal to the senses of the people and quicken
learning facilities for clear understanding. A.V aids are multisensory materials which
motivate and stimulate the individual. It makes dynamic learning experience more
concrete realistic and clarity. It provides significant gains in thinking and reasoning.
Audio visual material must be seen in their relationship to teaching as a whole and to the
learning process as a whole, until the teacher understands the relationship between audio
visual material and teaching learning process. Audio visual materials are produced,
distributed and used as planned components of educational programs. It helps the process
of learning that is motivation, classification and stimulation.

According to Kinder S. James: “Audio visual aids are any device which can be used to
make the learning experience more concrete, more realistic and more dynamic”.

Classifications of Audio-Visual Aids

1. Projected aids: Projected aids are those which require projection material or any
electric power.
2. Non-Projected aids: Non-Projected aids are those which require no projection
material or any electric power.

5.1 Whiteboard/marker
Whiteboards have a smooth, shiny surface on which coloured felt tip pens can be used.
Some are designed for use with water-soluble ink; more modern ones ("dry-marker"
boards) must be used with special dry marker, solvent-based pens. Using the wrong kind
of pen can damage the board. It is therefore important to know which type of board you
are dealing with and it is a good idea to make sure no pens of the wrong kind are
available near the whiteboard. Whiteboards are easier to use than chalkboard s from both
the agent's and the audience's point of view. The pens flow smoothly over the surface and
the colours are clearer than chalk on a chalkboard. Markers for white boards must be the
erasable type. It would be advisable to provide your own chalk and markers--to make
sure they are avaliable and they are the correct type. The popularity of whiteboards
increased rapidly in the mid-1990s and they have become a fixture in many offices,
meeting rooms, school classrooms, and other work environments.

ccl
Advantages
 Whiteboard ink markings are less susceptible to external factors, such as water,
because the ink adheres in a different manner than does chalk to a chalkboard.
Using markers does not generate the dust that comes from using and erasing chalk,
allowing their use in areas containing dust-sensitive equipment. Some who are
allergic to chalk or are asthmatic use whiteboards as an alternative.
 A whiteboard can be used as the projecting medium for an overhead or video projector.
This allows the person giving the presentation to fill in blanks, edit, and underline and
make comments by writing directly onto the whiteboard, which in turn shows through
the projected image. Proper dry wipe boards are high gloss to enable the dry marker ink
to be wiped off easily and high gloss surfaces will reflect the projector light, creating a
so called "hot spot", a glare back from the board. Semi-matte whiteboards are better
suited for projection but more difficult to dry wipe clean.
 A whiteboard pen is easier than chalk to hold and write with. This can benefit
persons with limited mobility in their hands, such as those affected by diseases
such as arthritis or systemic lupus erythematosus. In addition, marking on a
whiteboard takes less time, effort, and pressure than marking on a chalkboard
 Like chalkboards, whiteboards help to save paper.
 When compared to a chalkboard a whiteboard can have significantly more colors
because markers have a greater range of color than chalk.

Disadvantages
 Only special whiteboard markers are suitable for use on whiteboards. Using other
markers that resemble whiteboard markers but contain the wrong kind of ink
creates markings that are hard or impossible to remove, depending on the surface
type. However, some techniques have been developed, which include filling over
them using a marker with the right type of removable ink and then erasing the ink;
wiping the marks with acetone or alcohol; or by using board cleaning sprays or pre
packaged wipes commercially available from the whiteboard manufacturers.
 The white background can cause contrast problems for people with vision
impairment. Additionally, whiteboards cause some problems for those who write
left-handed as many write with their hand curved around the pen, therefore causing
their hand to drag across the board, smearing the marker strokes previously made.
Similarly, right-handed people have this problem with right-to-left languages, such
as the very "curvy" and cursive Arabic abjad, and to a lesser extent with the
Hebrew abjad (due to the square and differentiated shape of the letters). This
limitation is also present with a chalkboard.
 Markers on whiteboards are generally less pressure sensitive than chalk, making it
harder to draw heavier/lighter lines
 Whiteboard markers are often sealed in opaque plastics and difficult to determine
the amount of ink remaining; only fading in color intensity with use. Like other
contemporary markers, they can dry out with if the writing tip is uncapped for long
periods of time.

ccli
 Whiteboard markers often have a pungent and strong odor (depending on brand and
color) whereas chalk has a mild smell mainly from the chalk dust.
 Whiteboard markers, once dry, are disposed of and are generally non-
biodegradable, having a increased impact on the environment.
 When writing on a vertical surface, most people incline markers upwards; however
this impedes the flow of ink which is dependent on gravity.

5.2 Charts, posters, maps, graphs and models

There are many non-projected teaching aids such as Charts, posters, maps, graphs and
models. The detail of each is given below;

5.2.1 Charts:
A chart is a combination of pictorial, graphic, numerical or vertical material which
presents a clear visual summary. Edgar Dale defines charts as, “a visual symbol
summarizing or comparing or contrasting or performing other helpful services in
explaining subject-matter”. The main function of the chart is always to show
relationships such as comparisons, relative amounts, developments, processes,
classification and organization.

Characteristics:
1. Charts can be carefully stored and preserved for use in the future.
2. They have an educational value.
3. Usually the charts are teacher made.
4. Charts can be of any size.
5. Charts display specific information.
6. Easy to carry.

Types of charts:
● Picture charts
● Time charts
● Table charts
● Graphic charts
● Flow or organization charts
● Tree charts
● Pie charts

Uses of charts:
1. Motivates the students
2. Shows continuity in the process
3. Shows relationships by means of facts, figures and statistics
4. Presents matter symbolically
5. Presents abstract ideas in visual form
6. Summarizes information
7. Shows the development of structures
8. Creates problems and stimulates thinking

cclii
9. Encourages utilization of other media of communication

Limitations of charts:
1. If the selection of material for preparing the charts is not good they will not last
long.
2. Takes up the time of the teacher if she has to prepare the chart.
3. Charts only emphasize the key points. This leaves the students in doubt, if the
clarification is not clear.
4. Charts lose their charm, if it contains too much matter on it.
5. Poor use of color combination, improper spacing and margins creates confusion in
the minds of the students.

5.2.2 Posters:
S.L.Ahulwalia’s view: “A poster is a pictorial device designed to attract attention and
communicate a story, a fact, an idea, or an image rapidly and clearly.” Good’s Dictionary
of Education: A poster is a “placard, usually pictorial or decorative, utilizing an
emotional appeal to convey a message aimed at reinforcing an attitude or urging a course
of action”.

The poster can be defined as a graphic representation of some strong emotional appeal
that is carried through a combination of graphic aids like pictures, cartoons lettering and
other visual arts on a placard. It aims for conveying the specific message, teaching a
particular thing, giving a general idea etc. Posters exert a great influence on the observer.

Characteristics:
1. Brevity: Use of minimum words, i.e., four or five.
2. Idea: Idea or a feeling should be put in original form.
3. Simplicity of lay-out: It refers to the arrangement of the elements of the poster.
4. Efficient use of colors: (i) Use bold illustrations, (ii) Avoid fancy lettering style,
(iii) Proper use of color,
5. Makes the poster more attractive.

Uses of posters:
1. Presents a single idea or a subject forcefully.
2. Publicizes important school and community events and projects.
3. Adds atmosphere to the class-room.
4. Captures attention by some attractive feature and thus convey the message
attractively and quickly.
5. Motivates the class.
6. Strong lasting impression.
7. Satisfies the viewer emotionally and aesthetically.

Limitations of Posters:
1. Because of its impressive presentation, a poster captivates the eye, regardless of the
message and is capable of being comprehended.

ccliii
2. Poster is a simple and dynamic medium at a glance of presenting a message in a
compact form.
3. Poster tells the story vividly with the desired effect.
4. Poster conveys a single theme.
5. The lettering if not attractive and accurate, makes the poster illegible.
6. If smudge marks makes the posters unattractive and futile.

Suggestions for preparing Posters:

1. Decide the theme.
2. Decide the most suitable words to provide a title or a slogan.
3. Sketch some layouts and decide o n the best.
4. Gather all needed material to prepare the poster.
5. Prepare the lettering.
6. Add desired objectives.
7. Give the finishing touches and erase the smudge marks.

5.2.3 Maps
Maps constitute an indispensable aid in teaching many subjects like geography, history,
economics and social studies. The learning of these subjects becomes unreal, inadequate
and incomplete without map media. A resourceful teacher will turn the fear of map into
the genuine love by motivating the students. This, however, presupposes the invariable
uses of maps at every possible opportunity by the teacher in the class-room, and the
possession of individual atlases (a combination of maps) by the students. Every student
should also know certain elementary aspects of map preparation such as copying,
enlarging and reducing, symbolizing, coloring, and preparation of hey. Many students
develop aversion for maps because they do not know skills relating to map preparation.

Meaning
Maps are called as “Encyclopedia of Man’s Existence”. The map as a record of spatial
concepts tells a story as nothing else can. A map is an accurate representation plane
surface in the form of a diagram drawn to scale, the details of boundaries of whole of
earth’s surface, continents, countries etc. Geographical details like location of mountains,
rivers, altitude of f a place, contours of the earth surface and important locations can also
be represented, taught and learnt accurately. Maps depict the climatic conditions, natural
conditions, location etc. of certain countries and continents.

Purpose or Uses of Maps

1. To depict geographical features of earth’s surface and to understand the position of
earth in the universe.
2. To show relationship between places
3. To furnish information concerning distances, directions, shapes and sizes.
4. To clarify descriptive materials.
5. To reduce the scale of areas and distances and thus bring the abstract concepts of
size, distance and directions into the region of reality.

ccliv
6. To understand the lines-boundary lines, lines of communication, lines indication
the rivers, contours, meridians and parallels.
7. To understand the colors, tints, shadows, symbols in a map or globe.
8. To understand the distinction between various types of maps such as relief,
political, distribution maps.

Richard E. Servey states that maps can be used in a wide variety of ways to express
many different statements which are listed below:-
1. With color as a basic symbol
2. Through the use of conventional or invented symbols
3. Rearranged maps
4. Three dimensional maps
5. Globe

Limitations of Maps
1. Maps should indicate accurate, well planned, well printed, wall mounted and
durable.
2. Many of the maps are not visible to all the students in the class.
3. The teacher often does not take effort to teach map reading to the students.
4. Each type of map should have the relevant details.
5. If the lettering is not taken care of, it will prove futile.

5.2.4 Graphs
Graph is defined as a visual representation of numerical data. Graph is fundamentally a
tool for expressing number relationships, which is much easier to visualize than can be
done if the statement were made only in words and figures. It offers a judicious technique
for analyzing, comparing and prophesying of facts which are vital to an intelligent study
of a problem.

Characteristics of graphs:
1. Graphs are by nature a summarizing device.
2. Effective tool for comparisons and contrast or for presenting complicated facts.
3. Made according to exact specifications and depict specifically quantitative data for
analysis, interpretation or comparison.
4. Graphs, being symbolic are abstract in character.
5. Self explanatory and simple.
6. Regarded as flat pictures which employ dots, lines or pictures to visualize
numerical and statistical data to show statistics or relationships.

Kinds of graphs
● Line grap
● Bar graph
● Circle or pie graph
● Pictorial graph
● Flannel graph

cclv
Steps in Presenting Graphs, Maps, Diagrams
Graphs, maps, diagrams re potent spark plugs because they can be ignited at the crucial
moments. To ensure success the following steps may be followed:
1. Prepare students
2. Present the aid
3. Apply information
4. Test students after the aid has been presented
5. Review or reshow the illustration if the previous step reveals misunderstanding

Uses of Graphs
1. Awareness: The teacher should be well aware of the method of drawing of graph
in a neat and accurate manner.
2. Neatness: The graph should be neat, clean and artistic. It should be of good
quality.
3. Accuracy: The scales and the measurement of the graph should be accurate and
intelligible to the students.
4. Drawing and paper: The graph should be properly drawn. The graph paper should
be good. The pencil that is used should also be good.
5. Hints: The hints should be properly explained. The marks on the graph should be
such that the students may know them by themselves.
6. Blackboard: The teacher may draw a graph on the black board.

Limitations of Graphs
1. If the graph is not drawn neatly, it looses it purpose.
2. The teacher should be adept at drawing the graphs and presenting it properly to the
students.
3. Graphs cannot be preserved for a long time if the quality of the paper is not good.
4. Graphs will not be self explanatory, if proper hints and scale are not given.
5.2.5 Models
Models can be particularly helpful in the case of buildings and other fixed structures. The
construction of a poultry shed or grain store, for example, or the layout and dimensions of
a fish pond, can be shown using a model, which can be assembled and taken to pieces in
front of the audience.

Models of objects can be valuable additions to your presentation. When the object itself
is too large or too small, a model of the object is an important substitute. Three
dimensional items give the audience an easier opportunity to grasp exactly what you are
talking about. They see the dimensions and other aspects firsthand instead of in their
imagination.

5.3 Text books

cclvi
Textbooks are books containing information about a particular subject, organized in a
manner calculated to make presenting the information easier. Teachers can read a
textbook to confirm or expand their personal knowledge and/or assign readings from a
textbook for students to complete. Many textbooks also include quizzes or review
questions to help assess how well students have comprehended what they have read.
Publishing companies often release matched pairs of textbooks with workbooks (books
full of worksheets) on the same subject matter.

5.4 Handouts
Handouts are sometimes used as visual aids. This is a mistake. Avoid handouts during
your presentation if at all possible. You, the presenter, are the most important thing to
focus on, and handouts are distractions from you. People look at it, flip through it,
waiting for their copy, hand a friend a copy, point out some item to their neighbor, doodle
on it, fold it, and wonder why it is taking you so long to cover so little information. They
may also wonder why they have to sit and listen to you right now when they can take this
information home and read it later. At times, handouts must be used, and we will discuss
how best to use them later.

5.5 Projectors
By projected aids we mean those aids where a bright light is passed through a transparent
picture, and by means of a lens, an enlarged picture is thrown or projected on the screen.
Projected aids mainly fall into three groups, viz; opaque projections, transparent still
projections and cine projections.
The Overhead projector has opened a new dimension in communication. It represents a
lot of improvement over magic lantern, slide and film projectors.

The name ‘Overhead projector’ comes from the fact that the projected image is behind
and over the head of the speaker/teacher. In overhead projection, a transparent visual is
placed on a horizontal stage on top of light source. The light passes through this
transparency and then is reflected at 90° angle on the screen at eh back of the speaker.
The over head projector is the most used in all a.v. aids. It projects transparencies with
brilliant screen images suitable for use in a lighted room. The teacher can write or draw
diagrams on the transparency while he teaches; these are projected simultaneously on the
screen by the OHP.

(i) During presentations:

● Keep the screen above the heads of the participants.
● Keep the screen in full view of participants.
● Make sure you are not blocking any ones view when presenting.
● Darken the room appropriately by blocking out sunshine and dimming nearby.
● Turn the screen off between slides if you are going to talk for more than two.
● Talk to the audience, not to the screen.

(ii) Purposes:
● To develop concepts and sequences in a subject matter area

cclvii
 ● To make marginal notes on the transparencies for the use of the teacher that
can carry without exposing them to the class.
● To test students performances, while other classmates observe
● To show relationships by means of transparent overlays in contrasting color
● To give the illusion of motion in the transparency
(iii) Uses of Projectors:
1. Large image: It projects a very large image on the screen form a minimum
of projection distance.
2. Face the class: In this projector the image is projected over the shoulder of
the teacher. Therefore, he can face the class at all times. He can maintain eye
contact with the students. It helps the teacher to keep watch on the class as or
indicates points of importance on the transparency.
3. Lighted room: O.H.P. can operate in an illuminated room. There is no need
of darkening the room. It enables the teacher to develop a ‘circuit of
understanding’ by watching expression of others.
4. Bright image: The lens and mirror arrangement in overhead projector makes
it possible to have a bright image even in a well lighted room.
5. Simple operation: It is simple, easy and convenient to operate the overhead
projector. It does not need separate projector operator or the instructor. It
permits the teacher to face the class and at the same time operate the
machine. Slides can be changed quite easily.
6. Light weight: The light weight of the equipment makes it portable.
7. Class control: The teacher can maintain complete class control and interest in a
lesson by turning a switch on or off. He, while sitting on hi desk, can indicate
specific items on the screen buy location them with his pencil on the slides.
8. Process on the screen: By putting a piece of ground glass over the slide
space the teacher can draw a diagram sketch with pencil or wax pencil and
the class can watch the process on the screen. He can also place sheets of
transparent plastic over the slides for writing on them. Thus the overhead
projector permits the teacher to use the screen as a blackboard.
9. Large slide: Due to largeness of its aperture it may allow the use of slides of
the size 20 X 20 cms or 25 X 25 cms. It may facilitate the preparation of art
work for slides.
10. Use of pointer: The teacher can use a pointer or pencil to point out important
details of a slide. He has not to run about the machine to the wall to explain
things to the students.
11. Preparation and presentation of transparencies: Transparencies can be
prepared ahead of time, presented exactly when required and quickly
remove, when they serve their purpose.
12. Low cost: Effective visuals can be made in a minimum of time and at low
cost. Once a transparency is made, it is permanent. It need not be erased as in
a blackboard. It can be stored for recall at any later time.
13. Easier to write on horizontal surface.
14. Permits the use of color.

cclviii
(iv) Limitations:
1. Cannot be used for long time.
2. Writing by some types of writing pens get blotted out on plastic.
3. Transparencies create a storage problem.

(v) Advantages:
It permits the teacher to stand in front of the class while using the projector, thus
enabling her to point out features appearing on the screen by pointing to the
materials at the projector itself and at the same time, to observe the students
reactions to her discussion. Gains attention of the student

5.6 Multimedia
Multimedia is a term frequently heard and discussed among educational technologists
today. Unless clearly defined, the term can alternately mean .a judicious mix of various
mass media such as print, audio and video or it may mean the development of computer-
based hardware and software packages produced on a mass scale and yet allow
individualized use and learning. In essence, multimedia merges multiple levels of
learning into an educational tool that allows for diversity in curricula presentation.

According Fenrich, 1997 Multimedia is the exciting combination of computer hardware

and software that allows you to integrate video, animation, audio, graphics, and test
resources to develop effective presentations on an affordable desktop computer.

Multimedia is characterized by the presence of text, pictures, sound, animation and video;
some or all of which are organized into some coherent program. (Phillips, 1997).

Throughout the 1980s and 1990s, the concept of multimedia took on a new meaning, as
the capabilities of satellites, computers, audio and video converged to create new media
with enormous potential. Combined with the advances in hardware and software, these
technologies were able to provide enhanced learning facility and with attention to the
specific needs of individual users. A primary application of the interactive multimedia for
instruction is in an instructional situation where the learner is given control so that he/she
may review the material at his or her own pace and in keeping with his/her own
individual interests, needs, and cognitive processes. The basic objective of interactive
multimedia material is not s much to replace the teacher as to change the teacher’s role
entirely. As such multimedia must be extremely well designed and sophisticated enough
to mimic the best teacher, by combining in its design the various elements of the
cognitive processes and the best quality of the technology. With today’s multimedia
courseware, once a programme has been designed and built in with the appropriate
responses, it should be flexible and permit change and alteration.

Today’s multimedia is a carefully woven combination of text, graphic art, sound,

animation, and video elements. When you allow an end user, i.e. the viewer of a
multimedia project, to control ‘what’ and ‘when’ and ‘how’ of the elements that are
delivered and presented, it becomes interactive multimedia.

cclix
Benefits to Learners
● Work at own pace and control their learning path
● Learn from an infinitely patient tutor
● Actively pursue learning and receive feedback
Benefits to Teachers
● Allows for creative work
● Saves time for more challenging topics
● Replaces ineffective learning activities
● Increases student contact time for discussion

Specific uses of multimedia include:

● Drill and practice to master basic skills
● The development of writing skills
● Problem solving
● Understanding abstract mathematics and science concepts
● Simulation in science and mathematics
● Manipulation of data
● Acquisition of computer Skills for general
● Purposes, and for business and vocational training
● Access and communication to understand populations and students
● Access for teachers and students in remote locations
● Individualized and cooperative learning
● Management and administration of classroom activities

For further details please visit these Internet links:

http://www.unesco.org/education/nfsunesco/pdf/LESTAG_E.PDF
http://www.ehow.com/about_5108016_types-audiovisual-aids-used-teaching.html
http://vedyadhara.ignou.ac.in/wiki/images/8/83/ES-201(Unit-7).pdf

Conclusion:
The significance of Audio Visual aids are as under:
1. Inculcating scientific attitude.
2. Satisfy curricular needs.
3. Best attention compellers.
4. Economic in terms of time and verbalism.
5. Enhance effective learning.
6. Effective retaining of the content by the students.
7. Reduce meaningless and extra verbalism on the part of teacher.
8. Pupils get opportunity to correct misconceptions.
9. Bringing vivid reality into classroom.
10. Natural and easier way of learning.
11. Impart first-hand experiences to students.

cclx
12. Avoiding monotony.

cclxi
 6. ACTIVITIES
1. Write below a working definition of teaching tools.
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________

2. Prepare a chart showing non-projected aids in teaching.

3. List below the latest technological based teaching aids.

____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________

4. Draw a diagram showing the prepration of audio visual activities.

5. Write below four advantages of the following:

Multimedia:
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
__________________________________________

Charts:
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
__________________________________________

Projectors:
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
__________________________________________

Models:
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
__________________________________________

cclxii
 7. EXERCISE
Hopefully you have studied the referred material, now please answer the following
questions.
1. Explain the need and importance of teaching tools in education.

2. Offer a working definition of teaching aids.

3. “Teaching aids make the classroom live and active”. Discuss.

4. “Audio visual aids are those devices by the use of which communication of ideas
between persons and groups in various teaching and training situations is helped”
Discuss the statement of Edger Dale.

5. Highlight the problems in using projectors in the classrooms.

8. SELF ASSESSMENT QUESTIONS

Q. 1 Describe the purpose of teaching tools and how many types are there of
teaching tools?

Q. 2 Discuss the use of different kinds of projected and non-projected aids during
lecture.

Q. 3 Write down the advantages and disadvantages of multimedia.

Q. 4 Write short notes on:

a. Textbooks
b. Handouts
c. Charts
d. Models
e. Whiteboard

Q. 5 Critically examine the role of maps and posters in making lesson easy and
interesting for the learner.

Q. 6 Which points may be kept in mind while selecting audio visual aids for teaching?

Q. 7 What steps are required for preparing effective audiovisual aids?

cclxiii
 9. SUGGESTED READINGS

1. Bates, Anthony (1999) Broadcasting in Education: an evaluation land on: constable

and company limited.

2. Brown, Stephen (2002) video cassettes. In A.W.Bates (ed) the role of technology in
distance education. New York: st. Martin, s press.

3. Hawk ridge, D (2005) New information in education technology. London: Croom Helm.

4. Ralph, C. (1999), Audio-Visual Handbook, London, University of London press

Ltd. P.11

5. Romiszowski, A.J. (1992), The selection and Use of Instructional Media a

Systems Approach, London, Kogan Page. P. 65

10. REFERENCES

Aggarwal J.C. (1996).Essentials of Educational Technology, New Delhi: Vikas

Publishing House Pvt.Ltd.

Edger, Dale (1969).Audio Visual Methods in teaching (4thedition) Illinois: The Dryden
press Inc. Hinsdale.

Adewoyin, J.A. (1991). Introduction to EducationalTechnology. Lagos: John Lad

PublishersLtd.

Ibeneme, O.T. (2000). Provision and utilization of instructional equipment for teaching
and learning science and technology in Issues in Educational Journal, 1: 139-144.

Rays, R. & Thomas, R. (1973). Consideration for teachers using manipulative materials. In
the National Council of Teachers of Mathematics Laboratory. Inc. Virginia, pp. 101-108.

Okeke, C.C. (1990). Educational technology and primary science learning: Implications
for Nigeria’s technology emancipation Jotter 2(2) Mubu. The Technology Writers Assoc
of Nigeria.

Salomon, G. (1976). A cognitive approach to media. Educational Technology, 16, 25-28.

cclxiv
cclxv
 11. WEB REFERENCES
http://avaudiovisualaids.blogspot.com/2010/10/av-aids-in-teaching.html.

http://www.smallstock.info/info/comm/audio-visual.htm#range.

http://www3.uakron.edu/schlcomm/Turner/avbenfts.htm.

http://www.ehow.com/how_2099990_work-teaching-aids.html.

http://www.ehow.com/video_4950111_audiovisual-aids-teaching.html

http://www.2myprofessor.com/Common/guidelines_for_using_audiovisual.htm

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Textbook.

http://religionmanuals.tpub.com/14229/css/14229_320.htm

http://www.teachervision.fen.com/curriculum-planning/new
teacher/48347.html?page=2&detoured=1

http://www.indiastudychannel.com/resources/120148-Teaching-Aids-Their-Needs-
Types-Importance.aspx

Types of Teaching Aids | eHow.com http://www.ehow.com/list_6100903_types-

teaching-aids.html#ixzz1gqfG5oo1

http://www.scribd.com/doc/11631190/6-Effective-Use-of-Audio-Visual-Aids

http//59.163.61.3:8080/GRATEST/SHOWTEXFILE.do?page_id+user_image&user_image
_id=1020

cclxvi